Manual Servicio Field

FrameMaker Ver5.
5E(PC) COVER [FIELD] FOR CF1501/CF2001

18.01.2001
CF1501/CF2001
SERVICE MANUAL
[FIELD]
400-47991-11
FrameMaker Ver.5.5E(PC) PL/PS Standard Document Ver.01
00.09.13
Safety Precautions for Inspection and Service

When performing inspection and service procedures, observe the following precautions to
prevent accidents and ensure utmost safety.
✽ Depending on the model, some of the precautions given in the following do not apply.
WARNING
1. Always observe precautions.

• Parts requiring special attention in this product will include a label containing the
mark shown on the left plus precautionary notes. Be sure to observe the precau-
tions.
• Be sure to observe the “Safety Information” given in the Operator’s Manual.
2. Before starting the procedures, be sure to unplug the power cord.

• This product contains a high-voltage unit and a circuit with a large current
capacity that may cause an electric shock or burn.
• The product also contains parts that can jerk suddenly and cause injury.
• If this product uses a laser, laser beam leakage may cause eye damage or
blindness.
3. Use the specified parts.

• For replacement parts, always use the genuine parts specified in the manufac-
turer’s parts manual. Installing a wrong or unauthorized part could cause dielec-
tric breakdown, overload, or undermine safety devices resulting in possible
electric shock or fire.
• Replace a blown electrical fuse or thermal fuse with its corresponding genuine
part specified in the manufacturer’s parts manual. Installing a fuse of a different
make or rating could lead to a possible fire. If a thermal fuse blows frequently,
the temperature control system may have a problem and action must be taken
to eliminate the cause of the problem.
4. Handle the power cord with care and never use a multiple outlet.
• Do not break, crush or otherwise damage the power cord. Placing a heavy
object on the power cord, or pulling or bending it may damage it, resulting in a
possible fire or electric shock.
• Do not use a multiple outlet to which any other appliance or machine is con-
nected.
• Be sure the power outlet meets or exceeds the specified capacity.
5. Be careful with the high-voltage parts.

• A part marked with the symbol shown on the left carries a high voltage. Touch-
ing it could result in an electric shock or burn. Be sure to unplug the power cord
before servicing this part or the parts near it.
6. Do not work with wet hands.

• Do not unplug or plug in the power cord, or perform any kind of service or
inspection with wet hands. Doing so could result in an electric shock.
P-1
00.09.13
7. Do not touch a high-temperature part.

• A part marked with the symbol shown on the left and other parts such as the
exposure lamp and fusing roller can be very hot while the machine is energized.
Touching them may result in a burn.
• Wait until these parts have cooled down before replacing them or any surround-
ing parts.
8. Maintain a grounded connection at all times. (This item may not apply in the USA.)
• Be sure to connect the ground wire to the ground terminal even when perform-
ing an inspection or repair. Without proper grounding, electrical leakage could
result in an electric shock or fire.
• Never connect the ground wire to a gas pipe, water pipe, telephone ground wire,
or a lightning conductor.
9. Do not remodel the product.

• Modifying this product in a manner not authorized by the manufacturer may
result in a fire or electric shock. If this product uses a laser, laser beam leakage
may cause eye damage or blindness.
10. Restore all parts and harnesses to their original positions.

• To promote safety and prevent product damage, make sure the harnesses are
returned to their original positions and properly secured in their clamps and sad-
dles in order to avoid hot parts, high-voltage parts, sharp edges, or being
crushed.
• To promote safety, make sure that all tubing and other insulating materials are
returned to their original positions. Make sure that floating components mounted
on the circuit boards are at their correct distance and position off the boards.
P-2
00.09.13
CAUTION
1. Precautions for Service Jobs
• A toothed washer and spring washer, if used originally, must be reinstalled.
Omitting them may result in contact failure which could cause an electric shock
or fire.
• When reassembling parts, make sure that the correct screws (size, type) are
used in the correct places. Using the wrong screw could lead to stripped
threads, poorly secured parts, poor insulating or grounding, and result in a mal-
function, electric shock or injury.
• Take great care to avoid personal injury from possible burrs and sharp edges on
the parts, frames and chassis of the product.
• When moving the product or removing an option, use care not to injure your
back or allow your hands to be caught in mechanisms.
2. Precautions for Servicing with Covers and Parts Removed

• Wherever feasible, keep all parts and covers mounted when energizing the
product.
• If energizing the product with a cover removed is absolutely unavoidable, do not
touch any exposed live parts and use care not to allow your clothing to be
caught in the moving parts. Never leave a product in this condition unattended.
• Never place disassembled parts or a container of liquid on the product. Parts
falling into, or the liquid spilling inside, the mechanism could result in an electric
shock or fire.
• Never use a flammable spray near the product. This could result in a fire.
• Make sure the power cord is unplugged before removing or installing circuit
boards or plugging in or unplugging connectors.
• Always use the interlock switch actuating jig to actuate an interlock switch when
a cover is opened or removed. The use of folded paper or some other object
may damage the interlock switch mechanism, possibly resulting in an electric
shock, injury or blindness.
3. Precautions for the Working Environment

• The product must be placed on a flat, level surface that is stable and secure.
• Never place this product or its parts on an unsteady or tilting workbench when
servicing.
• Provide good ventilation at regular intervals if a service job must be done in a
confined space for a long period of time.
• Avoid dusty locations and places exposed to oil or steam.
• Avoid working positions that may block the ventilation ports of the product.
4. Precautions for Handling Batteries (Lithium, Nickel-Cadmium, etc.)

• Replace a rundown battery with the same type as specified in the manufac-
turer’s parts manual.
• Before installing a new battery, make sure of the correct polarity of the installa-
tion or the battery could burst.
• Dispose of used batteries according to the local regulations. Never dispose of
them at the user’s premises or attempt to try to discharge one.
P-3
00.09.13
5. Precautions for the Laser Beam (Only for Products Employing a Laser)
• Removing the cover marked with the following caution label could lead to possi-
ble exposure to the laser beam, resulting in eye damage or blindness. Be sure
to unplug the power cord before removing this cover.
• If removing this cover while the power is ON is unavoidable, be sure to wear
protective laser goggles that meet specifications.
• Make sure that no one enters the room when the machine is in this condition.
• When handling the laser unit, observe the “Precautions for Handling Laser
Equipment.”
1167P001AA
DANGER
Invisible laser radiation when open.
AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE
TO BEAM 0947-7127-01
1144D270AA
Other Precautions
• When handling circuit boards, observe the “HANDLING of PWBs”.
• The PC Drum is a very delicate component. Observe the precautions given in “HAN-
DLING OF THE PC DRUM” because mishandling may result in serious image problems.
• Note that replacement of a circuit board may call for readjustments or resetting of partic-
ular items, or software installation.
P-4
00.09.13
Used Batteries Precautions

ALL Areas
CAUTION
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
Germany
VORSICHT!
Explosionsgefahr bei unsachgemäßem Austausch der Batterie.
Ersatz nur durch denselben oder einen vom Hersteller empfohlenen ähnlichen Typ.
Entsorgung gebrauchter batterien nach Angaben des Herstellers.
France
ATTENTION
Ily a danger d’explosion s’ily a remplacement incorrec de la batterie.
Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du meme type ou d’un type équivalent recom-
mande par le constructueur.
Mettre au rebut les batteries usageés conformément aux instructions du fabricant.
Denmark
ADVARSEL!
Lithiumbatteri - Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering Udskiftning må kun ske med bat-
teri af samme fabrikat og type.
Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandøren.
Norway
ADVARSEL
Eksplosjonsfare ved feilaktig skifte av batteri.
Benytt samme batteritype eller en tilsvarende type anbefalt av apparatfabrikanten.
Brukte batterier kasseres i henhold til fabrikantens instruksjoner.
Sweden
VARNING
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.
Använd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparat-
tillverkaren.
Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion.
Finland
VAROlTUS
Paristo voi räjähtää, los se on virheellisesti asennettu.
Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin. Hävitä Käytetty paristo
valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti.
P-5
00.09.13
Precautions for Service

prevent mishandling of the machine and its parts.
Precautions Before Service

• When the user is using a word processor or personal computer from a wall outlet of the
same line, take necessary steps to prevent the circuit breaker from opening due to over-
loads.
• Never disturb the LAN by breaking or making a network connection, altering termination,
installing or removing networking hardware or software, or shutting down networked
devices without the knowledge and express permission of the network administrator or
the shop supervisor.
How to Use this Book

1. DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
• To reassemble the product, reverse the order of disassembly unless otherwise specified.
2. TROUBLESHOOTING
• If a component on a PWB or any other functional unit including a motor is defective, the
text only instructs you to replace the whole PWB or functional unit and does not give
troubleshooting procedures applicable within the defective unit.
• All troubleshooting procedures contained herein assume that there are no breaks in the
harnesses and cords and all connectors are plugged into the right positions.
• The procedures preclude possible malfunctions due to noise and other external causes.

• Check the area surrounding the service site for any signs of damage, wear or need of
repair.
• Keep all disassembled parts in good order and keep tools under control so that none will
be lost or damaged.
• After completing a service job, perform a safety check. Make sure that all parts, wiring
and screws are returned to their original positions.
• Do not pull out the toner hopper while the toner bottle is turning. This could result in a
damaged motor or locking mechanism.
• If the product is to be run with the front door open, make sure that the toner hopper is in
the locked position.
• Do not use an air gun or vacuum cleaner for cleaning the ATDC Sensor and other sen-
sors, as they can cause electrostatic destruction. Use a blower brush and cloth. If a unit
containing these sensors is to be cleaned, first remove the sensors from the unit.
P-6
00.09.13
Precautions for Dis/Reassembly

• Be sure to unplug the copier from the outlet before attempting to service the copier.
• The basic rule is not to operate the copier anytime during disassembly. If it is absolutely
necessary to run the copier with its covers removed, use care not to allow your clothing
to be caught in revolving parts such as the timing belt and gears.
• Before attempting to replace parts and unplug connectors, make sure that the power
cord of the copier has been unplugged from the wall outlet.
• Be sure to use the Interlock Switch Actuating Jig whenever it is necessary to actuate the
Interlock Switch with the covers left open or removed.
• While the product is energized, do not unplug or plug connectors into the circuit boards
or harnesses.
• Never use flammable sprays near the copier.
• A used battery should be disposed of according to the local regulations and never be dis-
carded casually or left unattended at the user’s premises.
• When reassembling parts, make sure that the correct screws (size, type) and toothed
washer are used in the correct places.
• If it becomes necessary to replace the thermal fuse or any other fuse mounted on a
board, be sure to use one of the rating marked on the blown fuse. Always note the rating
marked on the fuse, as the rating and mounting site or number used are subject to
change without notice.
Precautions for Circuit Inspection

• Never create a closed circuit across connector pins except those specified in the text and
on the printed circuit.
• When creating a closed circuit and measuring a voltage across connector pins specified
in the text, be sure to use the GND wire.
P-7
00.09.13
Handling of PWBs
1. During Transportation/Storage:
• During transportation or when in storage, new P.W. Boards must not be indiscriminately
removed from their protective conductive bags.
• Do not store or place P.W. Boards in a location exposed to direct sunlight and high tem-
perature.
• When it becomes absolutely necessary to remove a Board from its conductive bag or
case, always place it on its conductive mat in an area as free as possible from static elec-
tricity.
• Do not touch the pins of the ICs with your bare hands.
• Protect the PWBs from any external force so that they are not bent or damaged.
2. During Inspection/Replacement:
• Avoid checking the IC directly with a multimeter; use connectors on the Board.
• Never create a closed circuit across IC pins with a metal tool.
• Before unplugging connectors from the P.W. Boards, make sure that the power cord has
been unplugged from the outlet.
• When removing a Board from its conductive bag or conductive case, do not touch the
pins of the ICs or the printed pattern. Place it in position by holding only the edges of the
Board.
• When touching the PWB, wear a wrist strap and connect its cord to a securely grounded
place whenever possible. If you cannot wear a wrist strap, touch a metal part to dis-
charge static electricity before touching the PWB.
• Note that replacement of a PWB may call for readjustments or resetting of particular
items.
Handling of Other Parts

• The magnet roller generates a strong magnetic field. Do not bring it near a watch, floppy
disk, magnetic card, or CRT tube.
P-8
00.09.13
Handling of the PC Drum

✽ Only for Products Not Employing an Imaging Cartridge.
• Use the specified carton whenever moving or storing the PC Drum.
• The storage temperature is in the range between –20°C and +40°C.
• In summer, avoid leaving the PC Drum in a car for a long time.
2. Handling:
• Ensure that the correct PC Drum is used.
• Whenever the PC Drum has been removed from the copier, store it in its carton or pro-
tect it with a Drum Cloth.
• The PC Drum exhibits greatest light fatigue after being exposed to strong light over an
extended period of time. Never, therefore, expose it to direct sunlight.
• Use care not to contaminate the surface of the PC Drum with oil-base solvent, finger-
prints, and other foreign matter.
• Do not scratch the surface of the PC Drum.
• Do not apply chemicals to the surface of the PC Drum.
• Do not attempt to wipe clean the surface of the PC Drum.
If, however, the surface is contaminated with fingerprints, clean it using the following proce-
dure.
1. Place the PC Drum into one half of its carton.
1076D001
2. Gently wipe the residual toner off the surface of the

PC Drum with a dry, Dust-Free Cotton Pad.
A. Turn the PC Drum so that the area of its surface on
which the line of toner left by the Cleaning Blade is
present is facing straight up. Wipe the surface in
one continuous movement from the rear edge of
the PC Drum to the front edge and off the surface
of the PC Drum.
1076D002
B. Turn the PC Drum slightly and wipe the newly
exposed surface area with a CLEAN face of the
Dust-Free Cotton Pad. Repeat this procedure until
the entire surface of the PC Drum has been thor-
oughly cleaned.
✽ At this time, always use a CLEAN face of the dry
Dust-Free Cotton Pad until no toner is evident on the
face of the Pad after wiping.
P-9
00.09.13
3. Soak a small amount of either ethyl alcohol or iso-

propyl alcohol into a clean, unused Dust-Free Cot-
ton Pad which has been folded over into quarters.
Now, wipe the surface of the PC Drum in one con-
tinuous movement from its rear edge to its front
edge and off its surface one to two times.
✽ Never move the Pad back and forth.
1076D003
4. Using the SAME face of the Pad, repeat the proce-

dure explained in the latter half of step 3 until the
entire surface of the PC Drum has been wiped.
Always OVERLAP the areas when wiping. Two
complete turns of the PC Drum would be appropri-
ate for cleaning.
1076D004
N O T E S
• Even when the PC Drum is only locally dirtied, wipe the entire surface.
• Do not expose the PC Drum to direct sunlight. Clean it as quickly as possible even under
interior illumination.
• If dirt remains after cleaning, repeat the entire procedure from the beginning one more
time.
Handling of the Imaging Cartridge

✽ Only for Products Employing an Imaging Cartridge.
• In summer, avoid leaving the Imaging Cartridge in a car for a long time.
2. Handling:
• Store the Imaging Cartridge in a place that is not exposed to direct sunlight.
3. Precautionary Information on the PC Drum Inside the Imaging Cartridge:

P-10
FrameMaker Ver.5.5(PC) CF1501/CF2001
00.12.25
INSTALLATION
DIS/REASSEMBLY,
ADJUSTMENT
SWITCHES ON PWBs,
TECH. REP. SETTINGS
TROUBLESHOOTING
UNIT REPLACEMENT
MANUAL
Rev. 1.0/03.99
right
I-1
3
INSTALLATION
Di250
Allgemein
Installation
Mechanik/Elektrik
ST-1000/ST-1100
left
1 Installation
1.1 INSTALLATION CF1501 / CF2001 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-1

1.1.1 Unpacking the accessories - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-1
1.1.2 Unpacking the Printer - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-1
1.1.3 Removing the protective tape and packing materials - - - - - - I-2
● Paper Feed Section - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4
1.1.4 Installing the Imaging Cartridges - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-5
1.1.5 Installing the Oil-Coating Unit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-8
1.1.6 Filling the Toner - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-11
1.1.7 If the copy desk, copy table or Large-capacity cabinet
is to be used together with the copier stand - - - - - - - - - - - I-14
1.1.8 Connecting the Scanner - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-16
1.1.9 Installing the Manual Holder - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-18
1.1.10 Checking the operation of the printer - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-19
● Loading Paper for a Test Print - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-19
● Connecting the Power Cord - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 20
● Turning On the Copier - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 21
● Adjusting the Touch Panel Position - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 22
● Setting the CD and FD Magnification - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 23
● Setting the Gradation Adjustment - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 25
● Making a Test Copy - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 27
● Printing a copy of the test chart - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 27
1.1.11 Making System Settings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-29
● Specifying who performs replacements - - - - - - - - - - - - 29
● Specifying the Serial Number - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 30
● Checking the Date Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 31
● Printing the List - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 32
1.1.12 Loading Paper - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-34
● 1st Drawer - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 34
● 2nd Drawer - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 35
1.1.13 Turning Off the Copier - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-36
1.1.14 Disconnecting the Power Cord - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-37
Di250 I-2 Rev. 1.0/03.99

right
Mechanik/Elektrik
Installation
Allgemein
1.2 INSTALLATION AFR-16 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-38
1.2.1 Installing the Contents of the Duplexing Document Feeder Kit H
I-38
1.2.2 Unpacking the Duplexing Document Feeder - - - - - - - - - - I-41
ST-1000/ST-1100
1.2.3 Installing the Duplexing Document Feeder - - - - - - - - - - - - I-41
1.2.4 Checking for and correcting skewed feeding - - - - - - - - - - I-43
1.2.5 Checking and adjusting the scanning position of a
single-sided document I-44
1.2.6 Adjusting the scanning position of a single-sided
document - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-45
double-sided document I-47
1.2.8 Adjusting the scanning position of a double-sided
document I-48
manually fed document - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-49
1.2.10 Adjusting the scanning position of a manually fed
document - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-50
1.2.11 Checking and adjusting the position of the fixed
document guide - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-51
1.2.12 Checking and adjusting the position of the fixed
document guide in the manual document feed slot - - - - - - I-52
1.2.13 Securing the stoppers - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-53
1.3 INSTALLATION SCANNER - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-54

1.3.1 Unpacking - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-54
1.3.2 Unpacking the Scanner - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-55
1.3.3 Removing the protective tape - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-55
1.3.4 Removing the packing materials - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-56
1.3.5 If the optional copier stand is used - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-58
1.3.6 If the Optional Sorter or Finisher Is To Be Used Together
With the Optional Copier Stand I-60
1.3.7 Connecting the Cables - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-61
Rev. 1.0/03.99 I-3 Di250

left
1.4 INSTALLATION COPY TABLE (CT-2)

COPY DESK(CD-2M) I-62
1.4.1 Unpacking the Copy Table - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-62
1.4.2 Unpacking the Copy Desk - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-63
1.4.3 Installing the Copy Table/Copy Desk - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-64
1.4.4 Adjusting the Adjusters - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-65
1.4.5 Attaching the paper feed unit to the copy table - - - - - - - - - I-65
1.4.6 Attaching the paper feed unit to the copy desk - - - - - - - - - I-66
1.4.7 If the Copy Desk or Copy Table Is To Be Used
Together With the Copier Stand I-67
1.5 INSTALLATION JS-1002- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-69

1.5.1 Unpacking the 10-Mailbin Sorter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-70
1.5.2 Installing the Accessories - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-71
1.5.3 Unpacking the Horizontal Transport Unit - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-74
1.5.4 Installing the Horizontal Transport Unit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-74
1.5.5 Adjusting the Tilt of the 10-Mailbin Sorter - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-76
1.5.6 Installing the shelves and connecting the hookup cord - - - I-77
1.5.7 Removing the Rail - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-77
1.6 Installation AD-14 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-78

1.6.1 Unpacking the duplex unit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-78
1.6.2 Preparing to install the duplex unit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-79
1.6.3 Installing the duplex unit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-81
1.6.4 Checking and adjusting the paper reference position - - - - I-83
1.7 INSTALLATION PF-118 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-85

1.7.1 Unpacking the paper feed unit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-85
1.7.2 Connecting the Optional Paper Feed Unit to the Copier - - I-86
1.7.3 Loading Paper into the Paper Feed Unit - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-90
1.7.4 Affixing the Labels - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-91
1.7.5 Checking the Paper Reference Position - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-91
1.7.6 Adjusting the Paper Reference Position - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-93
1.8 INSTALLATION PF-117 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-95

1.8.1 Unpacking the large capacity cabinet - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-95
1.8.2 Installing the stoppers - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-97
1.8.3 Adjusting the Adjusters - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-97
1.8.4 Installing the Large Capacity Cabinet - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-98
1.8.5 If the Large Capacity Cabinet Is to be used
together with the Copier Stand I-101
Di250 I-4 Rev. 1.0/03.99

right
Mechanik/Elektrik
Installation
Allgemein
1.8.6 Specifying the Paper Size - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-102
1.8.7 Checking and Adjusting the Paper Reference Position - - I-104
1.9 INSTALLATION FN-107 / 108 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-106
ST-1000/ST-1100
1.9.1 Before Setting Up the Finisher - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-106
1.9.2 Unpacking the Finisher - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-107
1.9.3 Installing the accessories
if the copier stand is not used I-109
1.9.4 Installing the Accessories
If the copier stand is used - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-110
1.9.5 Unpacking the horizontal transport unit - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-112
1.9.6 Installing the horizontal transport unit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-112
1.9.7 Adjusting the height and tilt of the finisher - - - - - - - - - - - I-113
1.9.8 Connecting the Hookup Cord - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-114
1.9.9 Affixing the Labels - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-115
1.9.10 Installing the Tray and Protective Guide - - - - - - - - - - - - I-115
1.9.11 Checking the Hole-Punching Positions (FN-107 only) - - - I-116
1.9.12 Adjusting the Hole-Punching Positions (FN-107 only) - - - I-116
1.9.13 Removing the Rail - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-117
1.10 INSTALLATION INTERFACE KIT-E - - - - - - - - - - I-118

1.10.1 UNPACKING - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-118
1.10.2 Installing the Circuit Board Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-118
1.11 INSTALLATION INTERFACE KIT-I - - - - - - - - - - - I-119

1.11.1 UNPACKING - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-119
1.11.2 Installing the Cooling-Air Duct - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-119
1.11.3 Installing the Circuit Board Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-120
1.11.4 Install the Control Panel for the Internal Controller - - - - - I-121
1.12 INSTALLATION M128-2 (DIMM) - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-123

1.12.1 Unpacking the Expansion Memory (DIMM) - - - - - - - - - - I-123
1.12.2 Installing the Expansion Memory - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-123
1.13 INSTALLING THE MECHANICAL COUNTER - - - I-125
Rev. 1.0/03.99 I-5 Di250

left
Di250 I-6 Rev. 1.0/03.99

right
Installation
1 INSTALLATION
1.1 INSTALLATION CF1501 / CF2001

1.1.1 Unpacking the accessories
1. Remove the accessories from the box, and then check that the following are
enclosed.
1) Imaging cartridges......................................4
2) Waste toner bottle ......................................4
3) Power cord *1.............................................1
4) LED cleaning tool *2...................................1
5) LED cleaning papers *2..............................5
6) Manual holder.............................................1
7) Operator’s Manual......................................1
8) Setup Instructions (this manual).................1
9) Quick Guide................................................1
10) Warranty card.............................................1
11) Power cord instruction *3 ...........................1
12) Paper size label..........................................1
*1 North America and Philipine only.
*2 The LED cleaning tool and its papers are not used during setup. Since they
will be needed when the imaging cartridge is changed or the printer is cleaned,
keep them in a safe place for later use.
*3 Except North America, Taiwan and Saudi Arabia.
1.1.2 Unpacking the Printer

1. Remove the printer from the plastic bag.
2. Open the two handle covers, and then pull out the handles.
Rev. 1.1/01.01 I-1 CF1501/2001

left
3. Grasp the two handles on the right side of the

printer and the two grips on the left (as shown
in the illustration), and then, while keeping the
printer level, remove it from its box.
NOTE
The printer weighs about 77 kg (169-3/4 lbs.).
The printer must be lifted by at least two people.
When lifting the printer, be careful not to strain
your back.
4. Carefully place the printer on a level and

sturdy surface, such as a table.
1.1.3 Removing the protective tape and packing materials
Outside surface of the Printer

1. Remove the tape affixed to the outside
surface of the printer.
CF1501/2001 I-2 Rev. 1.1/01.01

right
Installation
Inside of the Printer
2. Grasp the handle of the front door, and then
carefully swing the door open to the right as
shown.
3. Pinch the release lever for an imaging

cartridge.
4. Swing the release lever toward you.
5. Remove the packing material from the

imaging cartridge slot.
Rev. 1.1/01.01 I-3 CF1501/2001

left
6. Remove the packing materials from the other

three imaging cartridge slots as described in
steps 3 through 5.
7. Carefully swing each of the release levers
back up to their original positions, pushing
them in until they lock into place.
NOTE
If the release levers are not correctly positioned,
the front door cannot be closed.
8. Carefully swing the front door closed, making

sure that it is securely shut.
1.1.3.1 Paper Feed Section
Packing material
1. Pull out the paper drawer for the 1st drawer.
paper take-up NOTE

roller
Be careful not to touch the surface of the paper
take-up roller with your hands. If the roller has
been touched, wipe it with a dry cloth.
2. Remove the 2 pieces of tape shown in the

illustration from the paper-lifting plate.
3. Remove the 2 pieces of packing material from
the paper-lifting plate.
4. Close the paper drawer.
CF1501/2001 I-4 Rev. 1.1/01.01

right
Installation
5. Pull out the paper drawer for the 2nd drawer.
paper take-up
roller
Packing NOTE
material
6. Remove the tape affixed to the paper-lifting

plate as shown.
7. Remove the packing material from the paper-
lifting plate.
1.1.4 Installing the Imaging Cartridges
1. Grasp the handle of the front door, and then

carefully swing the door open to the right as
shown.
2. Pinch the release lever for the yellow imaging

cartridge. (The colors of the imaging
cartridges are, from the left, yellow, magenta,
cyan, and black.)
3. Swing the release lever toward you.
Rev. 1.1/01.01 I-5 CF1501/2001

left
4. Remove the yellow imaging unit from its box

Protective tape
and its protective plastic bag, and then place
the imaging unit on a stable, level surface,
such as a table.
NOTE
The imaging unit can easily be damaged by light.
Therefore, leave the imaging unit in its protective
plastic bag until immediately before it is to be
installed.
When holding the imaging unit, be sure to hold it
by its bottom cover. If the top imaging unit cover
is held, it may fall off or the PC drum installed on
the imaging unit may become damaged, resulting
in decreased image quality.
5. Remove the protective tape from the imaging

unit.
6. Keeping the imaging unit level, pick it up by
supporting it on the bottom with your left hand
and on the bottom at the front with your right
hand.
7. Keeping the imaging unit level, insert the

imaging unit as far as possible into the
imaging unit compartment. Be sure to insert
the imaging unit until the end of the bottom
imaging unit cover contacts the back of the
imaging unit compartment.
CF1501/2001 I-6 Rev. 1.1/01.01

right
Installation
NOTE
Do not insert the imaging unit into the compart-
ment at an angle.
8. While keeping the bottom of the imaging

cartridge supported with your left hand,
carefully insert the imaging cartridge with
your right hand, as shown, until the cartridge
snaps into place.
9. Pull out the empty imaging cartridge cover.
10. Separate the top and bottom halves of the

empty imaging cartridge cover.
NOTE
Since the bottom half of the imaging cartridge
Bottom cover cover will be used when the imaging cartridge is
replaced again, store it in a safe place.
11. Carefully swing the release lever back up to

its original position, pushing it in until it locks
into place.
Rev. 1.1/01.01 I-7 CF1501/2001

left
12. Install the magenta, cyan, and black imaging

cartridges in the same way (as described in
steps 2 through 11).
NOTE
Be sure to install the imaging cartridges in their
correct slots.
13. After all four imaging cartridges have been

installed, grasp the handle of the front door,
and then carefully swing the door closed as
shown.
1.1.5 Installing the Oil-Coating Unit
1. Pull up on the right-side door release lever to

open the right-side door.
Image transfer belt NOTE

Do not to touch the surface of the image transfer
belt at the bottom of the fusing unit; otherwise,
decreased image quality may result.
2. Grasp the upper right-side door as shown,

and then carefully open the door completely
while making sure to support it.
NOTE
Be sure to support the upper right-side door while
carefully opening it; otherwise, it may become
damaged.
CF1501/2001 I-8 Rev. 1.1/01.01

right
Installation
NOTE
Do not touch the metal terminals at the front of
the fusing unit; otherwise, damage may occur
due to static electricity.
3. Remove the two pieces of tape from the lock

levers of the oil-coating unit shown.
4. Remove the oil-coating unit from its box.
NOTE
When picking up the oil-coating unit, pick it up by
the two handles (one on each end of the unit) with
both hands.
5. Insert the oil-coating unit, making sure that

the two pins (one on each end of the unit) fit
into the notches in the copier.
6. Swing the oil-coating unit up to install it.
Rev. 1.1/01.01 I-9 CF1501/2001

left
7. Secure the oil-coating unit by moving the two

lock levers (one on each end of the unit)
toward you.

and then carefully close it.
9. Carefully close the right-side door.
CF1501/2001 I-10 Rev. 1.1/01.01

right
Installation
1.1.6 Filling the Toner
NOTE
Be careful not to spill toner inside the printer or get toner on your clothes and hands.
If toner gets on your hands, wash them using water and a neutral soap. If toner gets
in your eyes, immediately rinse them, and then consult a medical professional.
1. Grasp the toner hopper door as shown, and

then carefully swing the door up to open it.
2. Open the yellow toner hopper lid (leftmost) by

swinging it toward you. (The toner hopper lids
are, from the left, yellow, magenta, cyan, and
black.)
3. Remove the yellow toner bottle from its

packaging. Hit the bottom of the bottle against
a strong surface, such as a desk or table, four
or five times from a height of about 10 cm
(4in.). (Since the toner within the bottle may
have become compacted, be sure to break it
up by performing this step.)
NOTE
Be sure to hit the bottom of the toner bottle
against the strong surface (the opening of the
bottle should be pointing up).
Rev. 1.1/01.01 I-11 CF1501/2001

left
4. While holding the bottle securely, shake it

well in all directions to mix up the toner.
5. With the rounded side (marked with “▼”) of

the bottle mouth facing towards you, place
the toner bottle on top of the hopper, and then
press down on the bottle until it snaps into
place.
6. Fully pull the toner hopper shutter out toward

you. Pulling out the toner hopper shutter
allows the toner to begin filling the toner
hopper. Check that all of the toner has
emptied out of the toner bottle and into the
hopper, which may take a while.
NOTE
Do not tap on the toner bottle while refilling the
hopper; otherwise, the toner may spurt out.
7. Push the toner hopper shutter closed until it

snaps into place and closes the bottle.
CF1501/2001 I-12 Rev. 1.1/01.01

right
Installation
8. Tilt the toner bottle slightly backward, and
then pull the opening of the bottle up and
toward you to remove it.
9. Carefully close the yellow toner hopper lid.
10. Fill the magenta, cyan, and black toner in the

same way (as described in steps 2 through
8).
NOTE
Be sure to fill the toner hoppers with the correct
color of toner.
11. After all four toner hoppers are filled, grasp

the toner hopper door as shown, and then
carefully swing the door down to close it.
Rev. 1.1/01.01 I-13 CF1501/2001

left
1.1.7 If the copy desk, copy table or Large-capacity cabinet is to be used

together with the copier stand
NOTE
If the optional copy desk, copy table or large-capacity cabinet is to be used together
with the optional copier stand, set up the copier stand as described below.
For details on attaching the scanner to the copier stand, refer to the scanner’s
Unpacking/Setup Instructions. In addition, for details on installing the copy desk,
copy table or large-capacity cabinet, refer the corresponding manual.
1. Make sure that the supports for the optional

copy desk and copy table are not installed. If
the supports are installed, remove them.
2. Position the scanner (attached to the copier

stand) over the printer (attached to the copy
desk, copy table or large-capacity cabinet).
(The illustration shows the copy desk used
with the copier stand.)
3. Turn the adjusters on the copier stand (one on each leg) until the four holes in
the copier stand align with the holes in the lower unit (large-capacity cabinet,
copy desk, or copy table).
4. Attach the lower unit (copy table or copy desk) to the copier stand using the four
screws supplied with the copier stand. Lightly tighten the screws.
CF1501/2001 I-14 Rev. 1.1/01.01

right
Installation
NOTE
If the large-capacity cabinet or copy table is installed, insert the two spacers
(supplied with the copier stand) as shown.
Spacer
5. Firmly tighten the four screws installed in step 4.

6. Install the five decorative covers supplied with the copier stand.
Rev. 1.1/01.01 I-15 CF1501/2001

left
1.1.8 Connecting the Scanner
NOTE
Make sure that the scanner is completely set up. If the scanner is not set up, set it
up according to the Unpacking/Setup Instructions supplied with the scanner.
1. If the copier stand is installed, pass one end

of the interface cable under the frame of the
copier stand.
2. Insert the connector on the scanner’s
interface cable into the interface connector on
the printer.
NOTE
Be sure to insert the cable connectors straight
into the connectors on the units; otherwise, the
connectors may become damaged.
3. Tighten the two connector-securing screws

using your fingers, and then firmly tighten the
screws using a screwdriver.
CF1501/2001 I-16 Rev. 1.1/01.01

right
Installation
4. Affix the cable clamp supplied with the
scanner as shown. Then, secure the interface
cable with the cable clamp.
Cable clamp
NOTE
10mm - 30mm
1/2 - 1-1/4 in. Secure the interface cable so that the bend in the
interface cable is between 10 and 30mm
(between 1/2 in. and 1-1/4 in.) from the bottom of
the scanner.
5. If the copier stand is installed, pull the plug of

the scanner’s power cord down, passing it
between the printer and the copier stand.
6. Insert the plug on the scanner’s power cord

into the power cord socket on the printer.
Rev. 1.1/01.01 I-17 CF1501/2001

left
1.1.9 Installing the Manual Holder
1. Insert the tab on the bottom of the manual

holder into the slot in the side of the printer.
2. Insert the tabs on the left and right sides of

the manual holder into the corresponding
slots in the side of the printer.
NOTE
If the optional copier stand is used, attach the
manual holder to the copier stand at the position
shown, using the same procedure described
above.
NOTE
If the optional finisher is used, attach the manual
holder to the back of the finisher at the position
shown, using the same procedure described
above.
CF1501/2001 I-18 Rev. 1.1/01.01

right
Installation
1.1.10 Checking the operation of the printer
1.1.10.1 Loading Paper for a Test Print
NOTE
Load paper that will be used in the procedure described in “Setting the Gradation
Adjustment”.
1. Prepare A3-size paper or 11 × 17-size paper

of the recommended type.
3. Press down on the paper-lifting plate until it

locks into place.
4. Slide the adjustable paper guides to the A3

paper size or 11 × 17 paper size.
5. Load the paper into the drawer so that the

front side of the paper (the side facing up
when the package was unwrapped) faces up.
NOTE
Do not load so much paper that the top of the
stack is higher than the mark indicating the
maximum paper capacity.
Rev. 1.1/01.01 I-19 CF1501/2001

left
7. Turn the paper type dial on the drawer to the

setting for normal paper.
1.1.10.2 Connecting the Power Cord
1. Make sure that the power switch is set to “O”.
2. If the copier stand is installed, pass the plug

of the power cord between the printer and the
copier stand.
3. Insert the plug on the power cord into the

power cord socket on the printer.
If the copier stand is installed, connect the

power cord as shown.
4. Insert the plug on the other end of the power

cord into an electrical outlet.
CF1501/2001 I-20 Rev. 1.1/01.01

right
Installation
1.1.10.3 Turning On the Copier
1. Set the power switch to “I”.
2. While the copier warms up, the message

“Warming up. Pre-program a job.” is
displayed on the touch panel. Warming up
takes about five minutes. After warming up is
finished, the message “Ready to copy”
appears on the touch panel.
NOTE
If the message “Ready to copy” does not appear
on the touch panel after the copier has been
turned on, the copier has not been set up
correctly or is malfunctioning. Perform the setup
procedure again from the beginning.
Rev. 1.1/01.01 I-21 CF1501/2001

left
1.1.10.4 Adjusting the Touch Panel Position
1. Check that the Basic screen appears in the

touch panel.
2. Display the Touch Panel Adj. screen.

(For details about displaying the Touch Panel
Adj. screen, refer to the Service Manual.)
3. Touch each of the four “+” marks displayed in

the touch panel.
(The marks can be touched in any order.)
4. Touch [OK].
CF1501/2001 I-22 Rev. 1.1/01.01

right
Installation
1.1.10.5 Setting the CD and FD Magnification
1. Check that “Ready to copy” appears in the

Basic screen displayed in the touch panel.
2. Display the Tech. Rep. Mode screen. (For

details about displaying the Tech. Rep. Mode
screen, refer to the Service Manual.)
3. Touch [Machine Adjust].
4. Touch [IR Area].
5. Touch [CD-Mag].
6. Carefully place the 200 mm scale on the

original glass parallel to the document width
scale (in the CD direction).
NOTE
Be careful not to scratch the original glass;
otherwise, decreased image quality may result.
Rev. 1.1/01.01 I-23 CF1501/2001

left
7. If the optional document cover is installed,

close the document cover, and then press the
[Start] key.
8. Check that the length of the copied image
meets its standard length.
Standard length: 200±1 mm
9. If the length of the copied image does not
meet its standard length, touch [ ] and [ ] in
the lower-right corner of the screen to adjust
the CD magnification. Repeat steps 6 through
8, and then check that the length of the
copied image meets its standard length.
10. Touch [FD-Mag].

11. Carefully place the 300 mm scale on the
original glass parallel to the document width
scale (in the FD direction).
NOTE
Be careful not to scratch the original glass;
otherwise, decreased image quality may result.

close the document cover, and then press the
[Start] key.
13. Check that the length of the copied image
meets its standard length.
Standard length: 300±1.5 mm
14. If the length of the copied image does not
meet its standard length, touch [ ] and [ ] in
the lower-right corner of the screen to adjust
the FD magnification. Repeat steps 11
through 13, and then check that the length of
the copied image meets its standard length.
15. Touch [Menu] to return to the Machine Adjust
screen, touch [Menu] to return to the Tech.
Rep. Mode screen, and then touch [Fin.
Time].
CF1501/2001 I-24 Rev. 1.1/01.01

right
Installation
1.1.10.6 Setting the Gradation Adjustment


3. Touch [Gradation Adjust].
4. Press the [Start] key to print the test pattern

on A3 paper or 11 × 17 paper.
NOTE
It takes about three minutes to print the test
pattern.
NOTE
If the test pattern is not printed, the copier has not been set up correctly or is
malfunctioning. Perform the setup procedure again from the beginning.
Rev. 1.1/01.01 I-25 CF1501/2001

left
5. Position the printed test pattern face down on the original glass.
6. Place about ten sheets of blank A3-size

paper or 11 × 17-size paper on top of the
printed test page. If the optional document
cover is installed, close it.
7. Press the [Start] key to begin scanning the

test pattern.
NOTE
Pressing the [Start] key only scans the image; a
page is not printed.
8. After the image is scanned, the Tech. Rep.

Mode screen re-appears on the touch panel.
9. Repeat steps 3 through 8 to scan the test

pattern three times.
10. Touch [Menu], and then touch [Fin. Time].
CF1501/2001 I-26 Rev. 1.1/01.01

right
Installation
1.1.10.7 Making a Test Copy
Position the test copy document or test chart
1. Prepare the test chart for making a test copy.
NOTE
For more details about positioning the document,
refer to the Operator’s Manual.
2. Position the test chart face down on the

original glass.
3. Align the corner of the test chart with the

arrow marks on the document width scales
above and to the left of the original glass.

close it
1.1.10.8 Printing a copy of the test chart
NOTE
For more details about making copies, refer to
the Operator’s Manual.

2. Press the [Start] key to begin the test copy.
Rev. 1.1/01.01 I-27 CF1501/2001

left
3. The test copy is fed out into the copy output

tray.
NOTE
If the test chart is not copied, the copier has not
been set up correctly or is malfunctioning.
Perform the setup procedure again from the
beginning.
4. Check that there is no banding in the halftone

areas of the printed test copy. If the image is
not printed correctly, for example if there is
banding, refer to the section “IMAGE
FAILURE” in the Troubleshooting chapter of
the Service Manual.
Halftone bands
CF1501/2001 I-28 Rev. 1.1/01.01

right
Installation
1.1.11 Making System Settings
1.1.11.1 Specifying who performs replacements
NOTE
The message that appears a unit must be replaced can be changed to indicate that
either the user or the service representative must perform the replacement. Select
the appropriate settings depending on the type of servicing being performed.

2. Touch [System Input].
3. Touch [Unit Change].
4. Touch [User] or [Service] to select whether

each unit should be replaced by the user or
the service representative
5. Touch [END].
Rev. 1.1/01.01 I-29 CF1501/2001

left
1.1.11.2 Specifying the Serial Number
NOTE
Be sure to specify the serial number.
When the serial number is specified, the settings for each unit can be read by the
printer. If the serial number is not specified, a correctly adjusted image cannot be
printed.

2. Touch [System Input].
3. Touch [Serial # Input].
4. Make sure that [Printer] is selected. Using the

keypad, enter the printer’s serial number
5. Touch [IR]. Using the keypad, enter the

scanner’s serial number.
Repeat this step to enter the serial numbers
for [ADF], [LCC], [Sorter/FN], [Duplex], and
[Vender].
6. Touch [END].
CF1501/2001 I-30 Rev. 1.1/01.01

right
Installation
1.1.11.3 Checking the Date Setting
1. Display the Date/Time Input screen. (For

details about displaying the Date/Time Input
screen, refer to the Service Manual.).
2. Check that the current date and time settings

are correct. If the settings are not correct, use
the keypad to enter the correct date and time
in the upper row of the screen.
Example) To specify April 1, 2001 15:30,
press:
[2], [0], [0], [1], [0], [4], [0], [1], [1], [5], [3], [0]
3. Touch [END].
4. Touch [Menu].
5. Check that the Basic screen appears on the

touch panel.
Rev. 1.1/01.01 I-31 CF1501/2001

left
1.1.11.4 Printing the List
1. Prepare about 20 sheets of A4-size or Letter-

size plain paper.
3. If any A3-size paper or 11 × 17-size paper

(used for the test copy) still remains in the
drawer, remove it.

locks into place.
5. Slide the adjustable paper guides to the A4(L)

paper size or Letter(L) paper size.
6. Load the prepared A4(L)-size or Letter(L)-

size plain paper into the paper drawer.
CF1501/2001 I-32 Rev. 1.1/01.01

right
Installation
8. Make sure that the paper type dial on the
drawer is turned to the setting for normal
paper.


11. Touch [List Output].
12. Touch [Image Processing].
13. Press the [Start] key to print out a list of all

image-related settings and each counter
value on A4-size paper (portrait orientation).
Rev. 1.1/01.01 I-33 CF1501/2001

left
1.1.12 Loading Paper
NOTE
For more details about loading paper, refer to the Operator’s Manual.
1.1.12.1 1st Drawer
1. Prepare paper that meets this product’s

specifications.

locks into place.
4. Slide the adjustable paper guides to fit the

size of paper to be loaded.
CF1501/2001 I-34 Rev. 1.1/01.01

right
Installation
NOTE

7. Turn the paper type dial on the drawer to the
setting for the type of paper loaded.
1.1.12.2 2nd Drawer
1. Prepare paper that meets this product’s

specifications.
2. Pull out the paper drawer for the 2nd drawer.

locks into place.
4. Slide the adjustable paper guides to fit the

size of paper to be loaded.
Rev. 1.1/01.01 I-35 CF1501/2001

left

NOTE

7. Affix the enclosed paper size label to the 2nd
drawer as shown.
8. Affix the enclosed drawer number label as
shown.
Paper size label

Drawer number label
1.1.13 Turning Off the Copier
1. Set the power switch to “O”.
2. Check that the copier stops running and that

the touch panel and all indicators go off.
CF1501/2001 I-36 Rev. 1.1/01.01

right
Installation
1.1.14 Disconnecting the Power Cord
1. Make sure that the power switch is set to “O”.
2. Remove the plug on the power cord from the

electrical outlet.
3. Remove the power cord plug from the power

cord socket on the printer.
Rev. 1.1/01.01 I-37 CF1501/2001

left
1.2 INSTALLATION AFR-16

When attaching the duplexing document feeder to the CF1501/CF2001, use the en-
closed kit H, containing the following accessories:
1) Conductive glass ..................................1
2) Document width scale...........................1
3) Scale holder (front) ...............................1
4) Scale holder (rear) ................................1
5) Springs..................................................2
6) Screws (3 mm × 8 mm) .......................2
7) Setup Instructions (this manual) ...........1
8) Seal.......................................................1
1 2
3
5 6 8
4 7
1.2.1 Installing the Contents of the Duplexing Document Feeder Kit H
1. Remove the original cover, the document

width scale, and the hinge covers (right and
left).
2. Remove the original glass.
CF1501/2001 I-38 Rev. 1.1/01.01

right
Installation
3. Install the conductive glass, making sure that
Holders the right end of the glass is inserted into the
holders on the right side.
NOTE
Check that the holders at the right-front and -
back corners contact the upper surface of the
conductive glass.
Check that the glass does not hit the frame of the
copier.
4. Attach the seal at the center of the document

width scale bracket.
5. Install the springs at the positions in the

document width scale bracket as shown in
the illustration at the left.
NOTE
Insert the springs as far down as possible.
Rev. 1.1/01.01 I-39 CF1501/2001

left
6. Install the document width scale, making sure

Notch to align the notches in the document width
A scale with the springs installed in step 5.
7. Align the holes in the scale holders (front and

back) with the pins on the document width
scale.
Attach the scale holders to the document
width scale using the two screws (3 mm x 8
mm).
8. Check that the document width scale moves

smoothly.
NOTE
Check that part A of the document width scale
(shown in the illustration for step 6) fits under the
conductive glass.
9. Slide the glass toward the document width

scale, then toward the back of the copier.
NOTE
Check that the holders at the right-front and -
back corners contact the upper surface of the
conductive glass.
CF1501/2001 I-40 Rev. 1.1/01.01

right
Installation
1.2.2 Unpacking the Duplexing Document Feeder
Remove the duplexing document feeder from its box, and then check that the fol-
lowing accessories are also enclosed:
1) Output tray...................................... 1
2) Flat-head screw.............................. 4
3) Shoulder-head screws.................... 1
1.2.3 Installing the Duplexing Document Feeder
1. Insert an enclosed flat-head screw into each

of the two center holes, and use a screwdriver
to tighten the screws securely.
2. Install the duplexing document feeder as

shown in the illustration.
NOTE
To install the duplexing document feeder, hold it
vertically, and then lower it into position.
Rev. 1.1/01.01 I-41 CF1501/2001

left
3. Attach the hinges using two of the enclosed flat-head screws, and then use a
screwdriver to tighten the screws securely.
NOTE
Make sure that the flat-head screws are securely tightened.
OK
NG
4. Remove all accessories attached with tape to

the duplexing document feeder, and then
remove the hookup cord from its plastic bag.
5. Attach the output tray.
6. Secure the output tray with the enclosed

shoulder-head screw from the bottom of the
duplexing document feeder.
CF1501/2001 I-42 Rev. 1.1/01.01

right
Installation
7. Connect the hookup cord from the duplexing
document feeder to the copier.
1.2.4 Checking for and correcting skewed feeding
Checking for skewed feeding

1. Turn on the copier.
2. Insert a piece of paper between the document

width scale and the scale holders, so that the
document scale is lower than the surface of
the original glass.
3. Select the following settings:
Auto Paper size setting
Single-Sided Original/Single-Sided Copy
settings.
4. Load one sheet of an A4-size or Letter-size
document lengthwise into the document feed
tray.
5. Press the start key, and then press the stop

key as soon as scanning begins.
6. Gently open the duplexing document feeder.
NOTE
If the duplexing document feeder is opened
quickly, the paper may slide out of place.
Rev. 1.1/01.01 I-43 CF1501/2001

left
a
7. Check if the paper on the original glass is
skewed. If so, determine in which direction,
and then measure distance “a” or “b” on the
scale.
Maximum allowable skew: 1.0 mm on the
document width scale
If the paper is skewed more than the
b maximum allowed, follow the procedure in the
next section, “Correcting Skewed Feeding”,
to correct it.
Correcting skewed feeding

1. Loosen the flat-head screw securing each of
the two hinges, and then loosen the screws
on both sides of the flat-head screw on the
right hinge.
2. In the case of an “a” measurement, slide the

duplexing document feeder toward the back
of the copier. In the case of a “b”
measurement, slide the duplexing document
feeder toward the front of the copier. Then,
tighten the screws loosened in step 1.
1.2.5 Checking and adjusting the scanning position of a single-sided

document
Checking the scanning position of a single-sided
documen
document scale is lower than the surface of
the original glass.

settings.

tray.
CF1501/2001 I-44 Rev. 1.1/01.01

right
Installation
NOTE
6. Determine the direction (“c” or “d”) and

measure the distance from the edge of the
paper on the original glass to the edge of the
scale.
Maximum allowable distance: 1.0 to 3.0 mm
in direction “d” from the edge of the scale.
d c
If the paper is further from the scale than the
maximum allowed, follow the procedure in the
next section, “Adjusting the Scanning
Position of a Single-sided Document”, to
adjust it.
1.2.6 Adjusting the scanning position of a single-sided document
1. Display the Tech. Rep. Mode screen.

(For details about displaying the Tech. Rep.
Mode screen, refer to the Service Manual.)
2. Touch “ADF Check”.
3. Touch “Tech. Rep. Choice”.
Rev. 1.1/01.01 I-45 CF1501/2001

left
4. Touch “Original Stop Position”.
5. Touch “1-Sided Set”.
6. Press the C (clear) key, and then use the

keypad to enter the adjustment value.
To switch between the positive and negative
signs, press the ID key.
Higher + value: Moves the paper in direction
C
Higher – value: Moves the paper in direction
D.
7. Press the Panel Reset key to display the

Tech. Rep. Mode screen, and then touch
“Fin. Time”.
Repeat the procedure in the previous section,
“Checking the Scanning Position of a Single-
sided Document”, to recheck the scanning
position.
CF1501/2001 I-46 Rev. 1.1/01.01

right
Installation
1.2.7 Checking and adjusting the scanning position of a double-sided
document
Checking the scanning position of a double-sided document
document width scale is lower than the
surface of the original glass.

Double-Sided Original/Single-Sided Copy
settings.
3. Load one sheet of an A4-size (or Letter-size)

document crosswise into the document feed
tray.

key as soon as scanning of the second side
begins.
NOTE
6. Determine the direction (“c” or “d”) and

scale.
in direction "d" from the edge of the scale.
d c
Position of a Double-sided Document”, to
adjust it.
Rev. 1.1/01.01 I-47 CF1501/2001

left
1.2.8 Adjusting the scanning position of a double-sided document

5. Touch “2-Sided Set”.

C.
D.
“Fin. Time”.
“Checking the Scanning Position of a Double-
sided Document”, to recheck the scanning
position.
CF1501/2001 I-48 Rev. 1.1/01.01

right
Installation
1.2.9 Checking and adjusting the scanning position of a manually fed
document
Checking the scanning position of a manually fed document

document width scale is lower than the
surface of the original glass.

setting.
3. Load one sheet of an A4-size (or Letter-size)
document lengthwise into the manual
document feed slot. Make sure to feed the
document straight and aligned with the fixed
document guide.
4. Press the stop key as soon as scanning
begins after the document is automatically
fed.
NOTE
6. Determine the direction ("c" or "d") and

scale.
in direction "d" from the edge of the scale
d c
Position of a Manually Fed Document”, to
adjust it.
Rev. 1.1/01.01 I-49 CF1501/2001

left
1.2.10 Adjusting the scanning position of a manually fed document

5. Touch "Single Feed Set".

C
D.
“Fin. Time”.
“Checking the Scanning Position of a
Manually Fed Document”, to recheck the
scanning position.
CF1501/2001 I-50 Rev. 1.1/01.01

right
Installation
1.2.11 Checking and adjusting the position of the fixed document guide
Checking the position of the fixed document guide
settings.
tray.

NOTE
5. Measure the distance of the edge of the

A paper to the edge of the scale.
B 4±1mm Standard distance: 4.0 mm from the edge of
the scale
If the measured distance does not meet its
standard distance, follow the procedure in the
next section, “Adjusting the Position of the
Fixed Document Guide”, to adjust it.
Adjusting the position of the fixed document guide
1. Move the fixed document guide either toward

the back or the front of the copier so that the
edge of the paper will meet its standard
distance.
Less than 3.0 mm: Move toward the front of
the copier.
More than 5.0 mm: Move toward the back of
the copier.
Rev. 1.1/01.01 I-51 CF1501/2001

left
1.2.12 Checking and adjusting the position of the fixed document guide in
the manual document feed slot
Checking the position of the fixed document guide in the manual document feed slot
Single-Sided Original>Single-Sided Copy
settings
document lengthwise into the manual
document feed slot. Make sure to feed the
document straight and aligned with the fixed
document guide.
3. Press the stop key as soon as scanning

begins after the

NOTE
5. Measure the distance of the edge of the

A paper to the edge of the scale.
B 4±1mm Standard distance: 4.0 ± 1.0 mm from the
edge of the scale
If the measured distance does not meet its
standard distance, follow the procedure in the
next section, “Adjusting the Position of the
Fixed Document Guide in the Manual
Document Feed Slot”, to adjust it.
Adjusting the position of the fixed document guide in the manual document
feed slot
1. Move the fixed document guide either toward

the back or the front of the copier so that the
edge of the paper will meet its standard
distance.
Less than 3.0 mm: Move toward the front of
the copier.
More than 5.0 mm: Move toward the back of
the copier.
CF1501/2001 I-52 Rev. 1.1/01.01

right
Installation
1.2.13 Securing the stoppers
1. Remove the screw for each stopper, and then

screw it into the top hole.
Rev. 1.1/01.01 I-53 CF1501/2001

left
1.3 INSTALLATION SCANNER

1.3.1 Unpacking
1) Scanner power cord...............................................1
2) Interface cable .......................................................1
3) Unpacking/Setup Instructions (this manual) ..........1
4) Cable holder ..........................................................1
1 2
3 4
The cable holder will be used when setting up the printer engine; therefore, be care-
ful not to lose it.
CF1501/2001 I-54 Rev. 1.1/01.01

right
Installation
1.3.2 Unpacking the Scanner
1. Remove the plastic bag from the scanner.
2. Two people must lift the scanner as shown in

the illustration, and then, while keeping it
level, remove it from its box.
NOTE
The scanner weighs about 23.0 kg (50-3/4 lbs.).
It must be picked up by at least two people. When
lifting the scanner, be careful not to strain your
back.
3. Carefully place the scanner on a level

surface, such as a table.
NOTE
If the copier stand is not being used, be sure to
install the five rubber feet (sold separately).
1.3.3 Removing the protective tape
1. Remove the tape affixed to the outside

surface of the scanner.
2. Remove the two pieces of tape and the

protective material from the original glass
Rev. 1.1/01.01 I-55 CF1501/2001

left
1.3.4 Removing the packing materials
1. Turn the optical-unit-securing screw on the

left side of the scanner counterclockwise.
2. Remove the securing screw from the left.
3. Remove the two screws securing the right-

side cover, and then remove the cover.
4. Remove the two screws securing the glass

holders, and then remove the holde
CF1501/2001 I-56 Rev. 1.1/01.01

right
Installation
5. Remove the original glass.
NOTE
Make sure the original glass does not get dirty,
for example from fingerprints; otherwise
decreased print quality may result.
6. Remove the four pieces of packing tape from

within the optical unit.
7. Remove the packing materials from within the

optical unit
NOTE
When removing the packing material from within
the optical unit, be sure not to pull up on the
harness connected to the top of the slider.
If the harness is pulled up, push down on the area
shown in the illustration to reposition the harness.
8. Install the original glass, making sure that the

left end of the glass fits under the document
width scale.
Rev. 1.1/01.01 I-57 CF1501/2001

left
9. Using the two screws, install the glass

holders so that they secure the original glass.
NOTE
Make sure that the glass holders contact the
back of the original glass.
10. Using the two screws, install the right-side

cover.
1.3.5 If the optional copier stand is used
NOTE
If the optional copier stand is used, install the scanner as described below.
If the optional sorter or finisher is to be installed, perform the steps described in “3.
If the Optional Sorter or Finisher Is To Be Used Together With the Optional Copier
Stand” before attaching the scanner to the copier stand.
1. Two people should lift the scanner.
2. While aligning the holes in the bottom of the

scanner with the corresponding connecting
pins on the copier stand, carefully place the
scanner on top of the stand.
NOTE
Be careful that your fingers are not caught
between the copier stand and the scanner.
CF1501/2001 I-58 Rev. 1.1/01.01

right
Installation
3. Install the two pipe ends supplied with the
copier stand.
4. Use the four screws supplied with the copier

stand to secure the scanner.
5. Install the four covers supplied with the copier

stand
Rev. 1.1/01.01 I-59 CF1501/2001

left
1.3.6 If the Optional Sorter or Finisher Is To Be Used Together With the

Optional Copier Stand
NOTE
If the optional sorter or finisher is to be used together with the copier stand, set up
the copier stand as described below.
1. Remove the two screws securing the leg

extension of the copier stand.
2. Pull off the leg extension from the copier

stand.
3. Remove the adjuster from the leg extension.
4. Install the adjuster removed in step 3 onto the

copier stand as shown.
5. Attach the scanner to the copier stand as

described in “2. If the Optional Copier Stand
Is Used”.
6. After the CF1501/CF2001 printer is set up,

install the sorter or finisher.
CF1501/2001 I-60 Rev. 1.1/01.01

right
Installation
1.3.7 Connecting the Cables
1. Insert the connector on one end of the

interface cable into the interface connector on
the scanner.
NOTE
Be sure to insert the cable connector straight into
the connector on the scanner; otherwise, the
connectors may become damaged.
2. Tighten the two connector-securing screws

using your fingers, and then firmly tighten the
screws using a screwdriver.
3. Insert the plug on the power cord into the

power cord socket on the scanner.
The scanner setup is now completed.

Continue setting up the copier according to the
instructions in the Unpacking/Setup Instructions
for the CF1501/CF2001 printer.
Rev. 1.1/01.01 I-61 CF1501/2001

left
1.4 INSTALLATION COPY TABLE (CT-2)

COPY DESK(CD-2M)
1.4.1 Unpacking the Copy Table
If there are a total of four copier drawers and optional paper feed units, first install
the copy table, and then install the optional paper feed units.
1) Copy table..............................................................1
2) Stabilizers A...........................................................2
3) Stabilizer B.............................................................1
4) Stabilizers screws ..................................................3
5) Adjusters ................................................................2
6) Fixing plates...........................................................4
7) Fixing plate screws ................................................4
8) Grounding plates (inside).......................................2
9) Grounding plate (right-front) ..................................1
10) Grounding plate screws .........................................3
11) Unpacking/Setup Instructions (this manual) ..........1
1 4
2 3
5 6
11
7
8 9 10
CF1501/2001 I-62 Rev. 1.1/01.01

right
Installation
1.4.2 Unpacking the Copy Desk
1) Copy desk ........................................................................ 1
2) Stabilizers A ..................................................................... 2
3) Stabilizer B ....................................................................... 1
4) Stabilizers screws............................................................. 1
5) Adjusters .......................................................................... 2
6) Fixing plates ..................................................................... 4
7) Fixing plate screws........................................................... 4
8) Grounding plates (inside) ................................................. 2
9) Grounding plate (right-front) ............................................. 1
10) Grounding plate screws.................................................... 3
11) Unpacking/Setup Instructions (this manual)..................... 1
1 4
3
2
6 11
7
5
8 10
9
Rev. 1.1/01.01 I-63 CF1501/2001

left
1.4.3 Installing the Copy Table/Copy Desk
NOTE
Be sure to attach the stabilizers; otherwise, the
unit may become unbalanced and fall over,
causing injuries.
If the copier stand is used, do not install the
adjusters and Stabilizers A and B; only install the
grounding plates.
1. Attach the three grounding plates (two inside

and one at the right-front corner) to the copy
table/copy desk at the positions shown in the
illustrations at the left (using a grounding
plate screw for each plate).
2. Using one screw for each stabilizers, attach the two stabilizers A and stabilizer
B to the copy table or copy desk at the positions shown in the illustration below.
3. Attach the two adjusters to the copy table or copy desk at the positions shown
in the illustration at the left.
Stabilizers A
Stabilizer B
Adjusters
CF1501/2001 I-64 Rev. 1.1/01.01

right
Installation
1.4.4 Adjusting the Adjusters
1. With the wrench (1031-7809-01), adjust the

height of the adjusters (front and back) to
stabilize the unit on the floor.
The wrench is not enclosed.
CAUTION
Be sure to set the adjusters as specified. Failure
to set the adjusters correctly may cause the unit
to become unbalanced and fall, possibly resulting
in serious injuries.
1.4.5 Attaching the paper feed unit to the copy table
1. Place the paper feed unit on top of the copy

table so that the rubber feet on the paper feed
unit are correctly aligned on the copy table.
2. Using the four enclosed fixing plates and fixing plate screws, secure the paper
feed unit to the copy table as shown.
This completes the setup of the copy table.For instructions on making connections
to the copier, refer to “Connecting the Optional Paper Feed Unit to the Copier” in
the Setup Instructions for the paper feed unit.
Rev. 1.1/01.01 I-65 CF1501/2001

left
1.4.6 Attaching the paper feed unit to the copy desk
1. Place the paper feed unit on top of the copy desk so that the rubber feet on the
paper feed unit are correctly aligned on the copy desk.
2. Using the four enclosed fixing plates and fixing plate screws, secure the paper
feed unit to the copy desk as shown.
CF1501/2001 I-66 Rev. 1.1/01.01

right
Installation
1.4.7 If the Copy Desk or Copy Table Is To Be Used Together With the
Copier Stand
NOTE
Make sure that supports A and B are not installed. If supports A and B are installed,
remove them.

stand) over the printer engine (attached to the
copy table or copy desk).
(The illustration shows the copy desk used
with the copier stand.)
the copier stand align with the holes in the lower unit (copy table or copy desk).
3. Attach the lower unit (copy table or copy desk) to the copier stand using the four
screws supplied with the copier stand. Do not tighten the screws.
Screw
Rev. 1.1/01.01 I-67 CF1501/2001

left
NOTE
If the copy table is installed, insert the two spacers (supplied with the copier stand)
as shown.
* If the copy desk is installed, the spacers are not needed.
Spacer
Decorative covers
CF1501/2001 I-68 Rev. 1.1/01.01

right
Installation
1.5 INSTALLATION JS-1002
l In order to adjust the height of the copier to the height of the 10-mailbin sort-
er, the copy desk, or the copy table and additional paper feed units, or the
large-capacity cabinet must be installed.
1. Copier + Two paper feed units + Copy table
2. Copier + Large-capacity cabinet
3. Copier + Copy desk
Rev. 1.1/01.01 I-69 CF1501/2001

left
1.5.1 Unpacking the 10-Mailbin Sorter

1. Remove the 10-mailbin sorter from its box, and then check that the following
accessories are also enclosed.
1) Rail guide...............................................................1
2) Rail.........................................................................1
3) Shelves ..................................................................10
4) Stabilizing pin.........................................................1
5) Magnet...................................................................1
6) Flat-head screws ...................................................2
7) Thumbscrew ..........................................................1
8) Horizontal transport unit.........................................1
9) Setup Instructions (this manual) ............................1
1 3
2
4 5
6 7
8
9
2. Remove all tape and the packing board.
Tape
Packing board
Front Back
NOTE
Be sure to install the 10-mailbin sorter on a level surface.
After installing the 10-mailbin sorter, do not to move the copier unnecessarily.
If it is necessary to move the copier, follow the procedure described under
“Removing the Rail” on page 8.
After moving the copier, perform the operations described in “Installing the
Horizontal Transport Unit” and “Installing the Stabilizing Pin and Rail”.
CF1501/2001 I-70 Rev. 1.1/01.01

right
Installation
If the copier stand is not used

1. Fully slide the bar on the 10-mailbin sorter in the direction indicated by the
arrows, and then secure it with the enclosed thumbscrew.
2. Peel off the seal covering the area where the stabilizing pin and magnet will be
attached. Using the enclosed flat-head screws, attach the enclosed stabilizing
pin and magnet to the left side of the copier as shown.
Rev. 1.1/01.01 I-71 CF1501/2001

left
3. Attach the rail guide to the left side of the copier as shown in the illustration.
If the large-capacity cabinet, copy table or copy desk is installed, attach the rail
guide at the same location.
NOTE
Be sure to fit the correct side of the rail guide onto the copier, and make sure that it
snaps into place.
4. Insert one end of the rail into the rail guide on the copier.
NOTE
Be sure to fit the correct side of the rail guide onto the copier, and make sure that it
snaps into place.
5. Slide the other end of the rail installed in step 4 into the rail guide on the 10-
mailbin sorter.
NOTE
Insert the rail until it snaps into place. At this time, the 10-mailbin sorter should stay
attached to the copier, even if you try to pull it away.
CF1501/2001 I-72 Rev. 1.1/01.01

right
Installation
If the copier stand is used
1. Fully slide the bar on the 10-mailbin sorter in the direction indicated by the
arrows, and then secure it with the enclosed thumbscrew.
2. Remove the scanner from the copier stand.

3. Remove the pipe from the left leg of the copier stand.
NOTE
If the large-capacity cabinet, copy desk, or copy table is attached to the copier
stand, remove it from the copier stand before continuing with this procedure.
4. Attach the adjuster from the removed pipe to the shorter leg of the copier stand.
Rev. 1.1/01.01 I-73 CF1501/2001

left
6. Secure the lower unit (large-capacity cabinet, copy desk, or copy table) to the
copier stand using the four screws enclosed with the copier stand.
7. Attach the scanner to the copier stand.
Go to step 2 and continue with the installation.
1.5.3 Unpacking the Horizontal Transport Unit

Remove all packing materials and tape.
Tape
Tape
Packing materials
1.5.4 Installing the Horizontal Transport Unit
1. Place the horizontal transport unit on the paper output section of the copier, and
make sure that the plastic guide pin on the bottom of the horizontal transport unit
hooks into the bracket on the 10-mailbin sorter.
CF1501/2001 I-74 Rev. 1.1/01.01

right
Installation
2. Push the horizontal transport unit in.
NOTE
Make sure that the gears on the horizontal transport unit and on the 10-mailbin
sorter are correctly aligned.
When securing the horizontal transport unit and the 10-mailbin sorter, be sure to
place the horizontal transport unit on the paper output section of the copier before
installing it.
3. Secure the horizontal transport unit with the lock.
NOTE
Make sure that the horizontal transport unit lock is securely attached to the
horizontal transport unit, and then secure the horizontal transport unit and the 10-
mailbin sorter.
Rev. 1.1/01.01 I-75 CF1501/2001

left
1.5.5 Adjusting the Tilt of the 10-Mailbin Sorter
1. If the 10-mailbin sorter tilts toward the copier,

check the following:
Are distances a and b equal?
a If a and b are not equal, adjust the tilt as

follows:
b
2. Lift the 10-mailbin sorter’s caster covers up,

and then pull them off.
3. Loosen the thumscrews indicated in the

illustrations, and then adjust the tilt of the
adjusting bolts.
If a > b: Turn the adjusting bolts clockwise.

If a < b: Turn the adjusting bolts
counterclockwise
CF1501/2001 I-76 Rev. 1.1/01.01

right
Installation
4. After adjusting the tilt, tighten the thumb-
screws on both sides to secure the adjusting
1 bolts, and then re-install the caster covers.
1.5.6 Installing the shelves and connecting the hookup cord
1. Attach the 10 shelves to the 10-mailbin sorter

starting from the bottom.
2 1
2. Insert the connector of the top hookup cord

into the connector on the horizontal transport
unit, and then insert the connector of the
bottom hookup cord into the connector on the
copier.
1.5.7 Removing the Rail
1. Pinch together the rail stoppers on the left

side of the 10-mailbin sorter to release them.
2. Disconnect the two hookup cords.

3. Remove the horizontal transport unit from the
10-mailbin sorter, and then place it on top of
the copier.
4. Carefully pull the 10-mailbin sorter away from
the copier.
5. Slide the rail under the copier, and then
remove it from the right side of the copier.
Rev. 1.1/01.01 I-77 CF1501/2001

left
1.6 Installation AD-14

1.6.1 Unpacking the duplex unit
1. Remove the duplex unit from its box, and then check that the following
accessories are also enclosed.
1) Flat-head screws ....................................... 2
2) Wiring cover............................................... 1
3) Spring ........................................................ 1
4) Setup Instructions (this manual) ................ 1
1 2
4
2. Remove all packing material from the duplex unit.
Tape
CF1501/2001 I-78 Rev. 1.1/01.01

right
Installation
1.6.2 Preparing to install the duplex unit
1. Turn off the copier, unplug the power cord

and the interface cable from the copier.
Then, open the manual bypass tray
2. Remove the wiring cover from the copier.
NOTE
The wiring cover removed from the copier will not
be installed again; however, it should be stored in
a safe place in case it will be needed later for
transporting the copier.
3. Push up on the upper-right cover as shown in

the illustration, and then remove the cover.

and then carefully open the door completely
while making sure to support it.
NOTE
Be sure to support the door while carefully
opening it; otherwise, it may be damaged.
Rev. 1.1/01.01 I-79 CF1501/2001

left
5. Remove the two screws securing the paper

output cover, and then remove the cover.
6. Remove the spring indicated in the

illustration, and then replace it with the
enclosed spring.
NOTE
Be sure to install the spring so that it is oriented
as shown in the illustration.
The area around the fusing unit is extremely hot.
Touching any part other than those specified may
result in burns.
7. Close the upper right-side door.

8. Pull up the lock release lever to open the
right-side door.
9. Open the upper right-side door.
10. Grasp the handle at the bottom of the fusing

unit, and then pull out the fusing unit.
NOTE
Touching any part other than the specified
handle may result in burns.
11. Attach the hook at the right end of the paper

output cover onto the frame of the copier.
CF1501/2001 I-80 Rev. 1.1/01.01

right
Installation
12. Lower the left end of the paper output cover.
13. Check that the paper output cover is securely
attached to the frame of the copier
14. Using the two screws, secure the paper

output cover.
15. Re-insert the fusing unit.

16. Close the upper right-side door.
17. Close the right-side door.
1.6.3 Installing the duplex unit
1. Align the three tabs on the duplex unit with the three holes in the copier, and
then install the duplex unit.
NOTE
While supporting the duplex unit, open the door
on the right side of the copier, and make sure that
the tabs are secured within the holes in the copier
door.
Rev. 1.1/01.01 I-81 CF1501/2001

left
2. Open the duplex unit, and then secure the duplex unit to the copier with the
enclosed flat-head screws.
Firmly tighten the screws with a coin or screwdriver.
3. Plug the two connectors from the duplex unit

into the connectors on the copier.
4. Secure the cable of the duplex unit with the

cable holder as shown.
CF1501/2001 I-82 Rev. 1.1/01.01

right
Installation
5. Install the enclosed wiring cover.
1.6.4 Checking and adjusting the paper reference position
NOTE
Perform the procedure below after adjusting the paper reference positions for the
paper feed unit and the large-capacity cabinet.

2. Touch “Machine Adjust”.
3. Touch “PRT Area”.
4. Touch “Dup. Left Margin”.
Rev. 1.1/01.01 I-83 CF1501/2001

left
5. Touch “1st.”.
6. Press the Start key.

A test page is printed.
7. Measure the width of loss for the test pattern

printed on the back of the test page.
a NOTE
Do not measure from the back of the test pattern.
If the measured width of loss does not meet

its standard width, touch and in the
lower-right corner of the screen to adjust the
width.
Print another test page and check the printed
image.
8. Adjust the paper reference positions for the
2nd, 3rd and 4th drawers in the same way (by
repeating steps 5 through 7).
NOTE
The 4th drawer is only available if two optional
paper feed units are installed.
CF1501/2001 I-84 Rev. 1.1/01.01

right
Installation
1.7 INSTALLATION PF-118
1.7.1 Unpacking the paper feed unit
1. Remove the paper feed unit from its box, and then check that the following
accessories are also enclosed:
1) Fixing plates ..................................................................... 4
2) Flat-head screws .............................................................. 4
3) Bracket ............................................................................. 1
4) Round-head screws ......................................................... 2
5) Controller harness ............................................................ 1
6) Power supply harness 1 (for a 24 V connection).............. 1
7) Power supply harness 2 (for a 24 V extension)................ 1
8) Label................................................................................. 1
9) Setup Instructions (this manual) ....................................... 1
1 3
2 4 5
6 7 9
2. Remove all tape from the optional paper feed

unit.
NOTE
When using the copy table, first attach the paper
feed unit to it, and then connect the paper feed
unit to the copier.
Rev. 1.1/01.01 I-85 CF1501/2001

left
1.7.2 Connecting the Optional Paper Feed Unit to the Copier
1. Grasp the front and rear handles of the copier, and then place it on top of the
paper feed unit.
2. Slightly pull out the paper drawers of the copier’s paper feed unit and the
optional paper feed unit, and then secure the optional paper feed unit to the
copier using the enclosed fixing plates and flat-head screws.
3. Remove the connector cover from the copier.
CF1501/2001 I-86 Rev. 1.1/01.01

right
Installation
4. Remove the rear covers from the copier’s
paper feed unit and the optional paper feed
unit.
5. Remove the bracket from the copier’s paper

feed unit.
NOTE
Before removing the bracket from the copier’s
paper feed unit, unplug the white connector of the
power supply harness from the paper feed unit.
6. Plug the connector on one end of the

enclosed controller harness (A) into the
connector on the copier’s paper feed unit.
7. Plug the connector on the other end of the

enclosed controller harness into the
connector (B) on the optional paper feed unit.
If an additional optional paper feed unit is to
be installed, perform step 6, and then connect
the upper and lower units.
Rev. 1.1/01.01 I-87 CF1501/2001

left
8. With the cables moved to the left as shown below, install the brackets.
NOTE
Check that the cables are not visible through the hole (C).
If the cables are visible, remove the bracket, adjust the cables, and then reinstall
the bracket.
Make sure the bracket fits securely over the tabs.
C
OK NG
9. Plug in the white connector of the power

supply harness into the connector on the
copier’s paper feed unit as shown at the left.
CF1501/2001 I-88 Rev. 1.1/01.01

right
Installation
Power supply harness 10. Plug in the white connector of enclosed
black connector
power supply harness 1 as shown at the left.
Secure the harness with the cable holder on
the bracket.
Plug in the black connector of enclosed
power supply harness 1 as shown at the left.
Secure the harness with the cable holder on
cable holders the copier near the connector.
Power supply harness
white connector
NOTE
Be sure that power supply harness 1 passes
through the notch as shown at the left.
If there is slack in the connected power supply
harness, coil the harness, and then secure it with
the cable holders on the brackets
If only one paper unit is installed, skip to step 13.
If two paper feed units are installed
11. As explained in step 10, plug the white

connector of enclosed power supply harness
1 into the connector on the other paper feed
unit.
12. Plug the connector on one end of enclosed
power supply harness 2 into the black
connector of power supply harness 1, and
then plug the other connector of power supply
harness 2 into the connector on the copier.
NOTE
Check that the connection between power supply
harnesses 1 and 2 passes between the two cable
holders on the topmost paper feed unit.
If there is too much slack in the connected
harnesses, remove the slack in the harnesses,
for example, by winding the harnesses around
the cable holders.
13. Reinstall the rear cover of each unit.
Rev. 1.1/01.01 I-89 CF1501/2001

left
14. Reinstall the connector cover of the copier.
1.7.3 Loading Paper into the Paper Feed Unit

1. Pull out the paper drawer of the optional paper feed unit, and then press down
on the paper-lifting plate until it locks into place.
2. Adjust the front/rear edge-guide-plates and the trailing-edge guide plate to the
size of the paper that will be loaded.
2
1
CF1501/2001 I-90 Rev. 1.1/01.01

right
Installation
3. Load the paper.
NOTE
stack is higher than the mark.
take-up rollers. If they have been touched, wipe
them with a soft, dry cloth.
Be sure the paper is not curled when it is loaded.
4. Slide the front/rear edge-guide-plates against

the edges of the paper.
1.7.4 Affixing the Labels
Affix the enclosed label for the paper size at the

position shown.
1.7.5 Checking the Paper Reference Position
1. Load A4-size paper into the paper drawer of

the optional paper feed unit.
Rev. 1.1/01.01 I-91 CF1501/2001

left
5. Touch “Left Margin”
6. Touch the key for the paper drawer that is to

be adjusted, and then press the Start key.
A test page is printed.
7. Measure margin a from the edge of the paper

to the pattern printed in the test page, and
then check that the width of the measured
a margin meets its standard width.
Standard width of the margin: 3.0 mm ± 1.0

mm
If the width of the measured margin does not
meet its standard width, follow the procedure
in the next section, “Adjusting the Paper
Reference Position”, to adjust it.
CF1501/2001 I-92 Rev. 1.1/01.01

right
Installation
1.7.6 Adjusting the Paper Reference Position
4. Touch “Left Margin”.
5. Select the paper drawer that you wish to

adjust, and then touch the up and down
arrows in the lower-right corner of the screen
to enter the difference between the measured
width and the standard width.
6. Print a test page and check the paper
reference position.
If the width of the measure margin does not
meet its standard width, follow the
instructions described below.
7. Open the paper drawer for the cassette that
needs to be adjusted, and then remove all of
the paper.
Rev. 1.1/01.01 I-93 CF1501/2001

left
8. Loosen the two screws on the guide plate at

the bottom of the paper drawer.
9. Adjust the guide plate to the appropriate

position on the scale inside the paper drawer.
10. Tighten the two screws loosened in step 8.
11. Repeat the procedure in the previous section,

“Checking the Paper Reference Position”.
CF1501/2001 I-94 Rev. 1.1/01.01

right
Installation
1.8 INSTALLATION PF-117
1.8.1 Unpacking the large capacity cabinet
1. Remove the large-capacity cabinet from its box, and then check that the
following accessories are also enclosed.
1) Fixing plates.................................... 4
2) Flat-head screws ............................ 4
3) L-shaped stopper ............................ 1
4) Stoppers ......................................... 4
5) Stopper covers................................ 2
6) Thumbscrews (short) ...................... 4
7) Thumbscrews (long) ....................... 2
8) Power supply harness .................... 1
9) Setup Instructions (this manual) ..... 1
1 2 3
4 5 6
8 9
7
2. Remove all protective tape from the large-capacity cabinet.
Rev. 1.1/01.01 I-95 CF1501/2001

left
3. Pull out the paper drawer of the large-capacity cabinet, and remove the packing
material.
CF1501/2001 I-96 Rev. 1.1/01.01

right
Installation
1.8.2 Installing the stoppers
NOTE
If the copier stand is used, do not install the stoppers or the L-shaped stopper.
1. Using the thumbscrews (short), attach the four enclosed stoppers at the
locations shown in the illustration.
2. Attach the stopper covers to the two stoppers

installed at the front of the large-capacity
cabinet.
3. Using the two thumbscrews (long), attach the

enclosed L-shaped stopper to the right-rear
corner of the large-capacity cabinet.
1.8.3 Adjusting the Adjusters

To stabilize the large-capacity cabinet, adjust the
height of the two adjusters at the front of the
cabinet.
Rev. 1.1/01.01 I-97 CF1501/2001

left
1.8.4 Installing the Large Capacity Cabinet
1. Before installing the large-capacity cabinet, make sure that the harness is
secured with the harness clamp on the cabinet as shown in the illustration.
2. Grasp the handles of the copier, and then place it on top of the large-capacity
cabinet so that the rubber feet on the copier align with the positioning pins of the
cabinet.
3. Pull out the paper drawers of the copier’s paper feed unit and the large-capacity
cabinet, and then secure the large-capacity cabinet to the copier with the
enclosed fixing plates and flat-head screws.
CF1501/2001 I-98 Rev. 1.1/01.01

right
Installation
4. Remove the connector cover from the copier.
5. Remove the rear cover and bracket from the paper feed unit.
NOTE
Before removing the bracket from the copier’s paper feed unit, unplug the power
supply harness (white connector) on the paper feed unit.
6. Plug the connector on the large-capacity

cabinet’s controller harness into the
connector on the copier’s paper feed unit as
shown.
Rev. 1.1/01.01 I-99 CF1501/2001

left
7. With the cables moved to the left as shown below, install the bracket.
NOTE
Check that the cables are not visible through the hole (C).
If the cables are visible, remove the bracket, adjust the cables, and then reinstall
the bracket.
Make sure the bracket fits securely over the tabs.
C
OK NG
8. Plug the white connector of the power supply

harness from the paper feed unit into the
connector shown in the illustration.
9. Plug the connector on the power supply

harness from the large-capacity cabinet into
the connector on the copier as shown in the
illustration.
Secure the harnesses with the cable holders
on the brackets.
10. Reinstall the rear cover of the paper feed unit.
11. Reinstall the connector cover of the copier.
Cable holders
CF1501/2001 I-100 Rev. 1.1/01.01

right
Installation
1.8.5 If the Large Capacity Cabinet Is to be used together with the Copier
Stand
NOTE
Make sure that the stoppers and the L-shaped stopper are not installed. If they are
installed, remove them.

stand) over the printer engine (attached to the
large-capacity cabinet)
the copier stand align with the holes in the large-capacity cabinet.
3. Attach the large-capacity cabinet to the copier stand using the four screws
supplied with the copier stand. Do not tighten the screws. Then, insert the two
spacers (supplied with the copier stand) as shown.
Rev. 1.1/01.01 I-101 CF1501/2001

left
1.8.6 Specifying the Paper Size

(Except U.S.A. and Canada) The default paper size setting is “A4C”.
1. Remove the screw on the left side guide and

the screw on the right side guide, and then
remove the two side guides.
2. Install the side guides while adjusting them to

the desired paper size, and then secure the
guides with the screws.
3. Move the slides at the bottom of the cabinet

fully in the direction of the arrows.
CF1501/2001 I-102 Rev. 1.1/01.01

right
Installation
4. Remove the screw on the front guide plate and the screw on the rear guide
plate, and then lift up the two guide plates.
5. Insert the tabs on the bottom of the front and rear guide plates into the slots for
the desired paper size.
6. Insert the tabs on the top of the front and rear guide plates into the slots for the
desired paper size.
NOTE
Make sure that all tabs on both the front and rear guide plates are inserted into the
slots for the same paper size.
A4
LT 5
R
A B4
LT
R
B5
A
LT
4
R
B5
7. Check that the tabs on the front and rear

guide plates are securely inserted into the
paper size slots, and then secure the two
guide plates with the screws.
8. Move the slides at the bottom of the cabinet
(moved in step 3) fully in the direction of the
arrows until they contact the front and rear
guide plates.
9. Remove the rear cover from the large-

capacity cabinet.
Rev. 1.1/01.01 I-103 CF1501/2001

left
10. Set the dip switches to select the desired

ON
paper size.
* Adjust the dip switches according to the
1 2 3 4
following chart.
SW 1 2 3 4
A4Y ON OFF OFF OFF
B5T OFF ON OFF OFF
11. Reinstall the rear cover of the large-capacity

cabinet.
1.8.7 Checking and Adjusting the Paper Reference Position
1. Load A4-size (or Letter-size) paper into the

paper drawer of the large-capacity cabinet.

4. Touch “PRT Area”
5. Touch “Left Margin”.
CF1501/2001 I-104 Rev. 1.1/01.01

right
Installation
6. Touch the key for the third paper drawer, and
then press the Start key
7. Measure the margin from the edge of the

paper to the pattern printed in the top-right
corner of the test page.
a
Standard width (a):
3.0 mm ±1.0 mm
Touch the up and down arrows in the lower-

right corner of the screen to enter the
difference (in millimeters) between the
measured width and the standard width.
8. Print another test page and check the paper
reference position.
Rev. 1.1/01.01 I-105 CF1501/2001

left
1.9 INSTALLATION FN-107 / 108

1.9.1 Before Setting Up the Finisher
In order to adjust the height of the copier to the height of the finisher, the copy desk,
or the copy table and additional paper feed units, or the large-capacity cabinet must
be installed.
1. Copier + Two paper feed units + Copy table
2. Copier + Large-capacity cabinet
3. Copier + Copy desk
CF1501/2001 I-106 Rev. 1.1/01.01

right
Installation
1.9.2 Unpacking the Finisher
1. Remove the finisher from its box, and then check that the following accessories
are also enclosed.
1) Rail guide .............................................................. 1
2) Rail ........................................................................ 1
3) Stabilizing pin ........................................................ 1
4) Magnet .................................................................. 1
5) Horizontal transport unit ........................................ 1
6) Tray ....................................................................... 1
7) Protective guide..................................................... 1
8) Labels.................................................................... 2
9) Screws................................................................... 3
10) Setup Instructions (this manual)............................ 1
3
2 4
1
5
6
8
7 9
10
Rev. 1.1/01.01 I-107 CF1501/2001

left
2. Remove all tape and packing brackets.

On the FN-107
Tape
NOTE: Do not remoce this parts

Packing bracket
NOTE
Be sure to install the finisher on a level surface.
After installing the finisher, do not to move the copier unnecessarily.
If it is necessary to move the copier, follow the procedure described under
“Removing the rail” on page 9.
After moving the copier, perform the operations described in “Installing the
Horizontal Transport Unit” and “Installing the Stabilizing Pin and Rail”.
CF1501/2001 I-108 Rev. 1.1/01.01

right
Installation
1.9.3 Installing the accessories
if the copier stand is not used
1. Peel off the seal covering the area where the

stabilizing pin and magnet will be attached.
2. Attach the enclosed stabilizing pin and
magnet with the enclosed flat-head screws to
the left side of the copier as shown.
3. Attach the rail guide to the left side of the

copier as shown in the illustration.
If the large-capacity cabinet, copy table or
copy desk is installed, attach the rail guide at
the same location.
NOTE
Be sure to fit the correct side of the rail guide onto
the copier, and make sure that it snaps into place.
4. Insert one end of the rail into the rail guide on

the copier.
NOTE
Insert the rail until imt snaps into place.
Rev. 1.1/01.01 I-109 CF1501/2001

left
5. Slide the other end of the rail installed in step 3 into the rail guide on the finisher.
NOTE
Insert the rail until it snaps into place.
At this time, the finisher should stay attached to the copier, even if you try to pull it
away.

If the copier stand is used
1. Remove the scanner from the copier stand.

2. Remove the pipe from the left leg of the copier stand.
NOTE
If the large-capacity cabinet, copy desk, or copy table is attached to the copier
stand, remove it from the copier stand before continuing with this procedure.
CF1501/2001 I-110 Rev. 1.1/01.01

right
Installation
3. Attach the adjuster from the removed pipe to the shorter leg of the copier stand.
5. Secure the lower unit (large-capacity cabinet, copy desk, or copy table) to the
copier stand using the four screws enclosed with the copier stand.
6. Attach the scanner to the copier stand.
Go to step 1 on page 3 and continue with the installation.
Rev. 1.1/01.01 I-111 CF1501/2001

left
1.9.5 Unpacking the horizontal transport unit
Remove all packing materials and tape.

Tape
Packing material
1.9.6 Installing the horizontal transport unit
1. Place the horizontal transport unit on the paper output section of the copier, and
make sure that the plastic guide pin on the bottom of the horizontal transport unit
hooks into the bracket on the finisher.
2. Push the horizontal transport unit in.
NOTE
Make sure that the gears on the horizontal
transport unit and on the finisher are correctly
aligned.
When securing the horizontal transport unit and
the finisher, be sure to place the horizontal
transport unit on the paper output section of the
copier before installing it
CF1501/2001 I-112 Rev. 1.1/01.01

right
Installation
3. Secure the horizontal transport unit with the
lock.
NOTE
Make sure that the horizontal transport unit lock
is securely attached to the horizontal transport
unit, and then secure the horizontal transport unit
and the finisher.
1.9.7 Adjusting the height and tilt of the finisher
1. If the finisher gradually tilts toward the copier,

check the following:
Are the stabilizing pin and the hole in the
finisher at the same height?
Is the horizontal transport unit not extremely
tilted?
If the finisher is not at the same height as the

copier, adjust the copier as follows.
2. Slide the finisher away from the copier, and

then remove the lower-front cover (two
screws) of the finisher.
3. Lift the finisher’s two caster covers up, and

then pull them off.
Rev. 1.1/01.01 I-113 CF1501/2001

left
Securing bolt 4. Without turning the adjusting bolt (lower bolt)

on the caster, loosen the securing bolt (upper
Adjusting bolt bolt), and then turn the adjusting bolt (lower
bolt) as indicated below to adjust the height of
the finisher.
The two rear and front casters

If the stabilizing pin is too high:
Turn the bolt clockwise
If the magnet is too low:

Turn the bolt counterclockwise
5. If the finisher tilts toward the copier, check the

following:
a Are distances a and b equal?
b If a and b are not equal, refer to step 4 above

and turn the adjusting bolt (lower bolt) as
indicated to adjust the tilt of the finisher.
6. After the adjustment is finished, without

Securing bolt
turning any of the adjusting bolts (lower
Adjusting bolt
bolts), tighten the four securing bolts (upper
bolts).
7. Re-install the caster covers and the lower-

front cover (two screws).
1.9.8 Connecting the Hookup Cord
Insert the connector on one end of the hookup

cord into the connector on the horizontal trans-
port unit, and then insert the connector on the
other end of the hookup cord into the connector
on the copier.
CF1501/2001 I-114 Rev. 1.1/01.01

right
Installation
1.9.9 Affixing the Labels
Affix the enclosed operation labels.
Label
for FN-107 for FN-108
Label
for FN-107 for FN-108
1.9.10 Installing the Tray and Protective Guide
Install the enclosed tray and protective guide at

the positions shown in the illustrations.
Rev. 1.1/01.01 I-115 CF1501/2001

left
1.9.11 Checking the Hole-Punching Positions (FN-107 only)
NOTE
If the Fiery is installed, check and, if necessary,
adjust the punched hole positions.
1. Unplug the power cord, and then turn off the

copier.
2. Load A4-size paper (in landscape orientation)
into tray 1.
5. Touch “Hole Punch”.
7. Fold the paper that is fed out in half, and
check that the punched holes are aligned.
Standard position: ±2mm

NOTE
If the punched holes are not at their standard
positions, adjust the hole-punching position.
1.9.12 Adjusting the Hole-Punching Positions (FN-107 only)
1. Open the upper cover, and then loosen the

hole-punching guide securing screw.
Move the green slider to adjust the hole-
punching position.
2. Tighten the securing screw.
3. Close the upper cover.
4. Make another test print, and then check that

the punched holes are aligned.
NOTE
If the punched holes are not at their standard
positions, adjust the hole-punching position.
CF1501/2001 I-116 Rev. 1.1/01.01

right
Installation
1.9.13 Removing the Rail
1. Pinch together the rail stoppers on the left

side of the finisher to release them.
2. Disconnect the two hookup cords.

3. Remove the horizontal transport unit from the
finisher, and then place it on top of the copier.
4. Carefully pull the finisher away from the
copier.
5. Slide the rail under the copier, and then
remove it from the right side of the copier.
Rev. 1.1/01.01 I-117 CF1501/2001

left
1.10 INSTALLATION INTERFACE KIT-E
WARNING
Before setting up this unit, be sure to unplug the power cord of the copier.
Keep all packing materials out of the reach of children.
1.10.1 UNPACKING
Check that the following are enclosed.
1) Circuit board assembly ................... 1
2) Setup Instructions (this manual) ..... 1
1
2
1.10.2 Installing the Circuit Board Assembly
1. Remove the five screws of the copier

controller circuit board cover, then remove
the cover.
2. Insert the circuit board assembly at the

location of the controller circuit board cover
removed in step 1, and then secure it with the
screws used to secure the controller circuit
board cover.
CF1501/2001 I-118 Rev. 1.1/01.01

right
Installation
1.11 INSTALLATION INTERFACE KIT-I
If Fiery X3e is installed, install I/F kit I
Circuit board assy
1.11.1 UNPACKING
Check that the following are enclosed.
1) Control panel for the internal controller ......1
2) Cooling-air duct ..........................................1
3) Screws........................................................2
4) Setup Instructions (this manual) .................1
1 2
3 4
1.11.2 Installing the Cooling-Air Duct

Using the two screws, attach the cooling-air duct to the circuit board assembly as
shown:
Rev. 1.1/01.01 I-119 CF1501/2001

left
1.11.3 Installing the Circuit Board Assembly
1. Remove the five screws of the copier controller circuit board cover, and then
remove the cover. (The screws will be needed later, so be sure to keep them in
a safe place.) Check that the hookup cord is visible at the side of the copier:
Hookup cord
Controller circuit board cover
2. As shown, partly insert the circuit board

assembly at the location of the controller
circuit board cover removed in step 1.
3. Connect the hookup cord from the side of the

copier to the cooling-air duct harness.
4. While holding the harness pushed down so

that it will not be pinched, slowly insert the
circuit board assembly.
NOTE
If the cooling-air duct harness is too long, secure
it with a cable holder so that the harness will not
be caught on anything.
CF1501/2001 I-120 Rev. 1.1/01.01

right
Installation
5. Secure the circuit board assembly with the
screws used to secure the controller circuit
board cover.
1.11.4 Install the Control Panel for the Internal Controller
1. Open the front door and the toner hopper

door.
2. Remove the screw and the cover shown in

the illustration.
3. Pull out the connector shown in the

illustration.
NOTE
Be careful not to disconnect other connectors
accidentally.
Rev. 1.1/01.01 I-121 CF1501/2001

left
4. Insert the connector mentioned in step 3 into

the connector on the back of the control panel
for the internal controller.
5. Install the control panel for the internal

controller in place of the cover removed in
step 2.
6. Secure the control panel for the internal

controller with the screw used to secure the
cover.
7. Close the front door and the toner hopper

door.
CF1501/2001 I-122 Rev. 1.1/01.01

right
Installation
1.12 INSTALLATION M128-2 (DIMM)
1.12.1 Unpacking the Expansion Memory (DIMM)
1. Check that the following are enclosed.

(1) Expansion memory.......................................... 1
(2) Unpacking/Setup Instructions (this manual) .... 1
2
1
2. Remove the packing materials.
NOTE
The expansion memory (DIMM) is easily damaged by static electricity. Before
touching the expansion memory (DIMM), be sure to touch a metal object to
discharge any static electricity from your body and clothes.
Be sure to only hold the expansion memory (DIMM) by its edges when removing it
from the insulated bag. Do not touch any terminals or any other parts of the circuit
board.
1.12.2 Installing the Expansion Memory
NOTE
Always install the expansion memory (DIMM) as a set of two.
1. Turn off the copier, and then unplug both the

power cord and interface cable from it.
2. Remove the seven screws securing the rear

cover to the back of the copier, and then
remove the rear cover.
Rev. 1.1/01.01 I-123 CF1501/2001

left
3. Remove the six screws securing the circuit

board cover, and then remove the circuit
board cover.
4. Align the notches in the expansion memory

(DIMM) with the ribs in the sockets, and then
insert the expansion memory into the socket.
Fully insert the expansion memory (DIMM)
into the socket until the tabs, one on each end
of the socket, lock to secure the expansion
memory.
NOTE
Check that the expansion memory (DIMM) is well
secured by the tabs on both ends of it.
5. Insert the other expansion memory (DIMM)

into the other socket in the same way.
6. Reattach the circuit board cover, then the rear

cover.
CF1501/2001 I-124 Rev. 1.1/01.01

right
Installation
1.13 INSTALLING THE MECHANICAL COUNTER
WARNING
Before setting up this unit, be sure to unplug the power cord of the copier.
Keep all packing materials out of the reach of children.
Check that the following are enclosed:

1) Mechanical counter .............................. 1
2) Screw ................................................... 1
3) Setup Instructions (this manual)........... 1
1 2
1. Turn off the copier, and then unplug its power

cord from the electrical outlet.
2. Disconnect the ground wire.
NOTE
Be sure to unplug the power cord before
disconnecting the ground wire.
3. Open the front door and the toner hopper

door.
Rev. 1.1/01.01 I-125 CF1501/2001

left
4. Remove the screw and the cover shown in

the illustration.
5. Open the right-side door.
6. Remove the screw and the handle cover

shown in the illustration.
CF1501/2001 I-126 Rev. 1.1/01.01

right
Installation
7. Break out the section shown from the cover
removed in step 6.
8. Remove the cover shown in the illustration.
9. Using the enclosed screw, install the

mechanical counter at the position shown.
10. Insert the connector on the hookup cord into

the connector on the mechanical counter.
11. Install any removed covers, and close any

opened doors.
Rev. 1.1/01.01 I-127 CF1501/2001

left
CF1501/2001 I-128 Rev. 1.1/01.01

FrameMaker Ver.5.5E(PC) CF1501/CF2001 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
00.12.25
DIS/REASSEMBLY,
ADJUSTMENT
18605
00.12.25
CONTENTS
1. SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS ............................................................................. D-1
1-1. IDENTIFICATION OF FUSES ................................................................. D-1
1-2. PARTS WHICH MUST NOT BE TOUCHED ........................................... D-2
(1) Red Painted Screws ........................................................................ D-2
(2) Variable Resistors on Board ............................................................ D-2
2. DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY ...................................................................... D-3
2-1. DOORS, COVERS, AND EXTERIOR PARTS:
IDENTIFICATION AND REMOVAL PROCEDURES ............................... D-3
2-2. REMOVAL OF CIRCUIT BOARDS AND OTHER
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ................................................................ D-5
(1) Removal of the CCD Unit ................................................................ D-6
(2) Removal of the Image Processing Board ........................................ D-6
(3) Removal of the IR PRIF Board ........................................................ D-9
(4) Removal of the Scanner Motor Drive Board .................................... D-10
(5) Removal of the Flat Cable ............................................................... D-10
(6) Removal of DC Power Supply 2 ...................................................... D-11
(7) Removal of the Paper Size Detecting Board ................................... D-13
(8) Removal of the LED Board and ATDC Sensors Y, M, and C .......... D-13
2-3. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE .................................................................. D-16
2-4. Guidelines for Life Specifications Values by Unit .................................... D-18
2-5. Removal of Units ..................................................................................... D-20
(1) Removal of the Toner Hopper Unit .................................................. D-21
(2) Removal of the LED Unit ................................................................. D-22
2-6. Cleaning and Disassembly of the IR Unit ................................................ D-25
(1) Cleaning of the Scanner Rails ......................................................... D-25
(2) Cleaning of the Mirrors (1st/2nd/3rd) ............................................... D-25
(3) Cleaning of the Lens ........................................................................ D-25
(4) Cleaning of the Original Glass ......................................................... D-26
(5) Removal of the Original Glass Cooling Fan Motor .......................... D-26
(6) Removal of the Scanner Motor ........................................................ D-26
(7) Removal of IR Cooling Fan Motor 2 ................................................ D-27
(8) Removal of IR Cooling Fan Motor 1 ................................................ D-28
(9) Removal of the Scanner Home Sensor ........................................... D-28
(10) Removal of the Original Cover Detecting Sensor ............................ D-29
(11) Removal of Original Size Detecting Sensors FD1 and FD2 ............ D-29
(12) Removal of Original Size Detecting Sensor CD1 ............................ D-30
(13) Removal of the Size Reset Switch .................................................. D-30
(14) Removal of the Scanner Assy ......................................................... D-30
(15) Removal of the Exposure Lamp ...................................................... D-31
(16) Removal of the Temperature Fuse .................................................. D-31
(17) Removal of the Scanner Drive Cables ............................................ D-32
(18) Winding of the Scanner Drive Cables .............................................. D-33
2-7. CLEANING AND DISASSEMBLY OF THE ENGINE PARTS ................. D-38
(1) Cleaning of the Paper Take-Up Roll ................................................ D-38
(2) Cleaning of the Paper Separator Roll .............................................. D-38
(3) Cleaning of the Synchronizing Rollers ............................................. D-38
i
00.12.25
(4) Cleaning of the Paper Dust Remover .............................................. D-39

(5) Cleaning of the Transfer Belt Unit ................................................... D-39
(6) Cleaning of the LED ........................................................................ D-40
(7) Cleaning of the Area around the Waste Toner Collecting Port ........ D-40
(8) Cleaning of the Fusing Entrance Guide Plate ................................. D-41
(9) Removal of the Imaging Unit Motor C/M/Y/Bk ................................. D-41
(10) Removal of the Main Motor ............................................................. D-43
(11) Removal of the Ozone Ventilation Fan Motor .................................. D-43
(12) Removal of the Fusing Drive Motor ................................................. D-43
(13) Removal of the Fusing Pressure/Retraction Motor .......................... D-44
(14) Removal of the 1st Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Motor ...... D-45
(15) Removal of Toner Replenishing Motor C/Bk ................................... D-46
(16) Removal of Toner Replenishing Motor Y/M ..................................... D-46
(17) Removal of the Cleaning Web Drive Motor ..................................... D-46
(18) Removal of the Power Supply Cooling Fan Motor ........................... D-47
(19) Removal of Fusing Cooling Fan Motor 2 ......................................... D-48
(20) Removal of Fusing Cooling Fan Motor 1 ......................................... D-48
(21) Removal of the 2nd Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Clutch .... D-50
(22) Removal of the Synchronizing Roller Clutch ................................... D-50
(23) Removal of the Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Clutch ...................... D-51
(24) Removal of the Paper Take-Up Clutch ............................................ D-52
(25) Removal of AIDC/Registration Sensor 1/2 ...................................... D-53
(26) Removal of the Temperature/Humidity Sensor ............................... D-54
(27) Removal of the Toner Supply Door Sensor ..................................... D-54
(28) Removal of the Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Sensor ..................... D-54
(29) Removal of the 1st Image Transfer Retraction Position Sensor ...... D-55
(30) Removal of the Double Feed Sensor .............................................. D-55
(31) Removal of the Drawer Set Sensor and Drawer Paper
Near-Empty Sensor ......................................................................... D-56
(32) Removal of the Left Door Switch ..................................................... D-57
(33) Removal of the Right Door Switch ................................................... D-57
(34) Removal of the Front Door Switch ................................................... D-58
(35) Removal of the Fusing Roller Rotation Detecting Sensor ............... D-58
(36) Removal of the Fusing Retraction Position Sensor ......................... D-58
(37) Removal of the Exit Sensor ............................................................. D-58
(38) Removal of the 2nd Image Transfer Pressure Position Sensor ...... D-59
(39) Removal of the Synchronizing Roller Sensor .................................. D-59
(40) Removal of the OHP Detecting Sensor ........................................... D-59
(41) Removal of the CD Paper Size Detecting Sensor Assy .................. D-60
(42) Removal of the Paper Take-Up Roll ................................................ D-60
(43) Removal of the Paper Separator Roll .............................................. D-61
(44) Removal of High Voltage Unit 1 ...................................................... D-61
(45) Removal of High Voltage Unit 2/3 ................................................... D-61
(46) Removal of DC Power Supply 1 ...................................................... D-61
(47) Removal of the Charge Neutralizing Relay ..................................... D-62
(48) Removal of the Waste Toner Full Detecting Sensor ....................... D-62
(49) Removal of the Waste Toner Bottle Set Sensor .............................. D-62
ii
00.12.25
(50) Removal of the Toner Empty Switch (Y/M/C/Bk) ............................. D-63

3. ADJUSTMENTS .............................................................................................. D-64
3-1. ADJUSTMENT JIGS AND TOOLS USED ............................................... D-64
3-2. ADJUSTMENT REQUIREMENTS LIST .................................................. D-65
3-3. ADJUSTMENT OF SWITCHES ............................................................... D-66
(1) Microswitches .................................................................................. D-66
3-4. ADJUSTMENT OF BELT TENSION ........................................................ D-67
(1) Adjustment of the Scanner Motor Timing Belt ................................. D-67
3-5. ELECTRICAL/IMAGE ADJUSTMENT ..................................................... D-68
(1) Accessing the Tech. Rep. Mode ...................................................... D-68
(2) Producing a Test Print ..................................................................... D-68
(3) Touch Panel Adj. ............................................................................. D-69
(4) Top Margin ...................................................................................... D-70
(5) Left Margin ....................................................................................... D-72
(6) Dup. Left Margin .............................................................................. D-73
(7) Paper Loop ...................................................................................... D-74
(8) Color Shift Correction ...................................................................... D-75
(9) Fuser Nip ......................................................................................... D-78
(10) Fuser Temp. .................................................................................... D-80
(11) Fuser Speed .................................................................................... D-81
(12) Left Image ........................................................................................ D-82
(13) Top Image ....................................................................................... D-83
(14) CD-Mag. .......................................................................................... D-84
(15) FD-Mag. ........................................................................................... D-85
(16) Org. Detect Sensor .......................................................................... D-86
(17) Gradation Adjust .............................................................................. D-87
(18) PRT Max Density ............................................................................. D-88
(19) PRT Highlight .................................................................................. D-88
(20) Background Voltage Margin ............................................................ D-89
4. OTHER ADJUSTMENTS ................................................................................. D-90
4-1. Adjustment of the Position of the Scanner and 2nd/3rd
Mirrors Carriage ....................................................................................... D-90
(1) Adjustment of the 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage Assy for Parallel
Alignment ......................................................................................... D-91
5. MISCELLANEOUS .......................................................................................... D-93
5-1. INSTALLATION OF THE MECHANICAL COUNTER (OPTION) ............ D-93
5-2. MOUNTING OF THE ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTING SENSORS
(OPTION) ................................................................................................. D-94
5-3. FLASH MEMORY .................................................................................... D-95
5-4. REMOUNTING RAM IC (IC5) .................................................................. D-97
iii
00.12.25
1. SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS
1-1. IDENTIFICATION OF FUSES
DC Power Supply 2 PU2

250 V 3 A (F1)
4004D100AB
DC Power Supply 1 PU1

125 V 15 A (F1)
120 V 10 A (F2) 4004D101AB
125 V 15 A (F3)
125 V 15 A (F4)
D-1
00.12.25
1-2. PARTS WHICH MUST NOT BE TOUCHED

(1) Red Painted Screws
Purpose of Application of Red Paint

• Red painted screws show that the assembly or unit secured can only be adjusted or set
at the factory and should not be adjusted, set, or removed in the field.
• Note that when two or more screws are used on the part in questions, only one represen-
tative screw may be marked with red paint.
(2) Variable Resistors on Board
Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions are given in
ADJUSTMENT.
D-2
00.12.25
2. DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY
2-1. DOORS, COVERS, AND EXTERIOR PARTS:
IDENTIFICATION AND REMOVAL PROCEDURES
IR 1
2 3
4004D102AA
4
8 5 6
4004D103AA
Printer
2
4
1
6
7
4004D104AA
5
10
9
4004D105AA
D-3
00.12.25
IR
No. Name Removal Procedure

1 Original Glass Remove the IR Right Cover. → Remove the IR Rear Cover. →
Remove one screw and the Original Glass fixing brackets (front and
rear). → Remove the Original Glass.
2 IR Right Cover Remove two screws and the IR Right Cover.
3 Control Panel Remove two covers below the Control Panel. → Remove two
screws, unplug one connector, and remove the Control Panel.
4 IR Front Cover Remove the Control Panel. → Remove one screw and two Control
Panel fixing brackets. → Remove one screw and the Scanner Home
Sensor Assy. → Remove the two upper joints from the Copier Stand.
→ Loosen two screws and remove the IR Front Cover. → Loosen
two lower screws and remove two upper screws and the IR Front
Cover.
5 IR Lower Front Remove the Control Panel. → Demount the IR Unit from the Copier
Cover Stand. → Remove two screws and the IR Lower Front Cover.
6 IR Rear Upper Remove the Original Cover. → Remove three screws and the Rear
Cover Upper Cover.
7 IR Rear Cover Disconnect the power cable and IR hookup cable. → Remove four
screws and the IR Rear Cover.
8 IR Left Cover Remove the IR Front Cover. → Remove the IR Rear Upper Cover. →
Remove three screws and the IR Left Cover.
Printer
No. Name Removal Procedure

1 Rear Left Open the Left Door. → Remove the Waste Toner Bottle. → Remove
Cover the Ozone Filter. → Remove two screws and the Rear Left Cover.
2 Hopper Door Open the Right Door. → Open the Upper Right Door. → Remove the
actuator of the Toner Supply Door Sensor. → Snap off one retaining
ring E type from the left hinge of the Hopper Door and slide the Hop-
per Door in closed position to the right to take it off.
3 Panel Door Open the Front Door. → Open the Hopper Door. → Remove one
screw and the Panel Door.
4 Front Door Open the Front Door. → Lift the Front Door off the copier.
5 Hopper Left Open the Front Door. → Open the Hopper Door. → Remove one
Cover screw and lift the Hopper Left Cover upward to take it off.
6 Paper Output Open the Right Door. → Open the Upper Right Door. → Remove two
Cover screws and the Paper Output Cover.
7 Rear Upper Remove the Paper Output Cover. → Remove the Rear Cover. →
Cover Remove three screws and the Rear Upper Cover.
8 Rear Cover Remove seven screws and the Rear Cover.
9 Rear Right Open the Right Door. → Remove one screw and the Rear Right
Cover Cover.
10 Front Right Remove the Panel Door. → Remove one screw and the Front Right
Cover Cover.
D-4
00.12.25
2-2. REMOVAL OF CIRCUIT BOARDS AND OTHER

ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
• When removing a circuit board or other electrical component, refer to “Handling of
PWBs” and follow the corresponding removal procedures.
• The removal procedures given in the following omit the removal of connectors and
screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board.
• Where it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components on the
board, be sure to ground your body.
IR
PWB-IC PU2
PWB-A
PWB-Z PWB-C
PWB-D
4004D106AC
Symbol Name Removal Procedures

PWB-A CCD Sensor Board ☞ D-6
Image Processing
PWB-C ☞ D-6
Board
PWB-D IR PRIF Board ☞ D-9
Scanner Motor Drive
PWB-IC ☞ D-10
Board
PWB-Z Flat Cable ☞ D-10
PU2 DC Power Supply 2 ☞ D-11
D-5
00.12.25
(1) Removal of the CCD Unit
1. Remove the IR Right Cover and Original Glass.

2. Remove eight screws and the optical cover.
4004D001AC
3. Remove three screws and the imaging process-

ing lid on the right inside the IR.
4004D002AB
4. Unplug three connectors.

5. Remove three screws and the CCD Unit.
4004D003AA
(2) Removal of the Image Processing Board
1. Remove the IR Right Cover, IR Front Cover, IR

Lower Front Cover, and IR Rear Upper Cover.
2. Remove the Original Glass.
4004D001AC
4. Remove three screws and the imaging process-

ing lid on the right inside the IR.
4004D002AB
D-6
00.12.25
5. Remove four screws and the metal bracket on

the upper right of the IR.
4004D004AA
6. Unplug eight connectors on the Image Process-

ing Board.
4004D005AA
7. Remove three screws that secure the Image Pro-

cessing Unit on the right.
4004D006AA
8. Remove two screws and the image processing lid

on the left inside the IR.
4004D007AA
9. Unplug four connectors on the Image Processing

Board.
4004D008AA
D-7
00.12.25
10. Remove two screws that secure the Image Pro-

cessing Unit on the left.
4004D009AA
11. Remove the IR hookup cable.
4004D010AA
Precautions for Removal/Reinstallation of the IR Hookup Cable

• Be sure to hold onto the connector of the cable when removing or reinstalling the cable.
NEVER pull on the cable.
• At reinstallation, make sure that the connector is not tilt.
• When securing the connector, use a flat-blade screwdriver and tighten the connector
firmly.
12. Remove two screws and two washers.
4004D011AA
13. Remove nine screws and the Image Processing

Unit protective guide.
4004D012AC
D-8
00.12.25
14. Pull out the Image Processing Unit.
4004D013AA
15. Remove 11 screws and the Image Processing

Board.
4004D014AA
NOTE
• At reinstallation, make sure that the Image Pro-
cessing Board is properly connected to the IR
PRIF Board.
4004D194AA
(3) Removal of the IR PRIF Board
1. Pull out the Image Processing Board Unit.

☞ D-6 (steps 1 through 14)
2. Remove five screws and the IR PRIF Board.
4004D195AA
NOTE
• At reinstallation, make sure that the IR PRIF Board
is properly connected to the Image Processing
Board.
4004D196AA
D-9
00.12.25
(4) Removal of the Scanner Motor Drive Board
1. Remove the IR Right Cover, IR Rear Right

Cover, IR Rear Upper Cover, and IR Rear Cover.
2. Remove two screws and the reinforcement
frame.
4004D015AA

4. Remove one screw. Then, remove the Scanner
Motor Drive Board from the PWB support.
4004D016AB
(5) Removal of the Flat Cable

1. Remove the IR Rear Upper Cover and IR Rear Cover.
3. Remove the Scanner Assy.
4. Remove two screws, unplug one connector, and

remove the Scanner Assy Flat Cable.
4004D025AA
5. Unplug one connector and remove the harness

from one wiring saddle.
6. Remove two screws and the Original Glass Cool-
ing Fan Motor.
4004D018AB
D-10
00.12.25
7. Remove one screw, unplug one connector, and

remove the Flat Cable.
4004D019AA
(6) Removal of DC Power Supply 2
1. Remove the IR Rear Cover.

2. Remove two screws that secure the IR power
receptacle.
4004D020AB
3. Remove six screws, two harness holders, and

the DC Power Supply 2 cover.
4004D021AA
4. Remove one screw that secures DC Power Sup-

ply 2 in position.
4004D022AA
5. Unplug six connectors.

6. Take off DC Power Supply 2 by sliding it to the
right.
4004D023AA
D-11
00.12.25
Printer
PWB-I
PWB-T
PWB-PIC
PWB-H
PWB-I1
PWB-LK
PWB-S
PU1
PWB-N3
PWB-N2
4004D183AA
PWB-N1
Symbol Name Removal Procedures

PWB-H MSC Board Remove the Rear Cover. → Remove the Rear Left Cover.
→ Remove the PWB Shield Cover. → Unplug two connec-
tors and remove four screws and the MSC Board.
PWB-I Master Board Remove the Paper Output Cover. → Unplug 21 connectors
and remove six screws and the Master Board.
PWB-I1 Paper Size Detecting
☞ D-13
Board
PWB-LK LED Board
PWB-N1 ATDC Sensor Y
☞ D-13
PWB-N2 ATDC Sensor M
PWB-N3 ATDC Sensor C
PWB-PIC PIC Board Remove the Rear Cover. → Remove the Rear Left Cover.
→ Remove the PWB Shield Cover. → Remove the MSC
Board. → Unplug two connectors and remove 12 screws
and the PIC Board.
PWB-S Paper Type Detection Open the Front Door. → Remove one screw and the Paper
Board Type Detection Board cover. → Unplug one connector and
remove one screw and the Paper Type Detection Board.
PWB-T Tech. Rep. Setting Open the Front Door. → Remove the Right Front Cover. →
Switches Board Unplug one connector and remove one screw and the
Tech. Rep. Setting Switches Board.
D-12
00.12.25
(7) Removal of the Paper Size Detecting Board
1. Remove High Voltage Unit 1 and 2.

remove the Paper Size Detecting Board.
4004D184AB
(8) Removal of the LED Board and ATDC Sensors Y, M, and C
NOTE
• Whenever the Imaging Unit has been slid out of the copier, be sure to cover it with the
light blocking bag (black) or light blocking cloth for packing purposes and place it in a
dark place. Avoid leaving it to stand for a long time.
1. Remove the LED Unit.

☞ D-22
✽ Removal of the LED Assy Bk
2. Remove two screws and the Right Guide.
4004D108AA
3. Remove two screws and the Right Guide for C.
4004D110AA
4. Remove two screws and the Left Guide.
4004D109AA
D-13
00.12.25
NOTE
• At reinstallation, ensure that the front hook makes
positive engagement.
4004D197AA
5. Remove one screw and the holder.
4004D113AA
6. Remove four screws, unplug two connectors, and

remove the LED Assy Bk.
4004D114AB
✽ Removal of the LED Assy C

remove the ATDC Sensor C.
NOTE
• When the ATDC Sensor is replaced, the Imaging
Unit should also be replaced.
4004D115AA
8. Remove two screws and the Left Guide.
4004D117AA
D-14
00.12.25
NOTE
• At reinstallation, ensure that the front hook makes
positive engagement.
4004D197AA
9. Remove one screw and the holder.
4004D118AA
10. Remove four screws, unplug two connectors, and

remove LED Assy C.
11. Following the same procedure as when removing
LED Assy C, remove LED Assemblies M and Y.
4004D119AB
12. Remove 23 screws and the LED Board Cover.
NOTE
• The illustration shows only the representative
screw. Remove all (23 in total) LED Board Cover
mounting screws.
4004D120AB
13. Unplug two connectors.

14. Remove nine screws and the LED Board.
4004D121AB
D-15
00.12.25
2-3. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

• To ensure that the copier produces good copies and to extend its service life, it is recom-
mended that the maintenance jobs described in this schedule be carried out as
instructed.
Maintenance Cycle Ref. Page

Ref. Page in in Unit
PM Parts Parts No. Qty
Clean Replace This Manual Replacement
Manual
☞ D-38
Paper Take-Up Section
When
4004-3002-01
Paper Take-Up Roll malfunction 200 K 1 —
occurs
4658-3027-01 ☞ D-60
When ☞ D-38
Separator Roll Assy malfunction 200 K 4658-0151-01 1 —
occurs ☞ D-61
When
Scanner Rail malfunction — — — ☞ D-25 —
occurs
When
IR Section
Mirrors (1st, 2nd, and 3rd) malfunction — — — ☞ D-25 —

occurs
When
Lens malfunction — — — ☞ D-25 —
occurs
Original Glass Upon call — — — ☞ D-26 —
When
Transfer Belt Unit (✽1) malfunction 121 K 4697-161 1 — ☞ P-26
Image Transfer Section
occurs
Transfer Roller Unit (✽1) — 121 K 4697-171 1 — ☞ P-26

Synchronizing Roller 60 K — — — ☞ D-38 —
Paper Dust Remover (✽1) 60 K 121 K 4004-0156-02 1 ☞ D-39 ☞ P-26

Waste Toner Bottle — (✽2) 4697-101 1 — ☞ P-19
Around waste toner
collecting port
Upon call — — — ☞ D-40 —
1
Imaging Unit C/M/Y — 4562 M —
each
— ☞ P-11
Developing Section
Imaging Unit Bk — 7204 M — 1 — ☞ P-21

Each time
each Imaging
LED
Unit is
— — — ☞ D-40 —
replaced
Ozone Filter (✽1) — 121 K 4004-0347-01 1 — ☞ P-26
4697-111 (100 V)
Fusing Unit — 102 (✽3) 4697-121 (120 V) 1 — ☞ P-22
4697-131 (230 V)
Fusing Section
Fusing Web Unit — (✽4) 4697-141 1 — ☞ P-2

34 K or
Oil Coating Unit — 325,000 4697-151 1 — ☞ P-6
sec
When
Fusing Entrance Guide
Plate
malfunction — — — ☞ D-41 —
occurs
D-16
00.12.25
✽ 1: Replace the Transfer Belt Unit, Transfer Roller Unit, Paper Dust Remover, and Ozone
Filter at the same time.
✽ 2: About 4.5 K after a waste toner near full condition has been detected.
✽ 3: Forced to a stop when 110 K is reached.
✽ 4: About 1 K after 17 K has been reached or a web near empty condition has been
detected.
NOTES
• K = 1,000 copies
• The contents of the above maintenance schedule are subject to change without notice.
D-17
00.12.25
2-4. Guidelines for Life Specifications Values by Unit
NOTES
• The life specifications values represent the number of copies made or figures equivalent
to it when given conditions are met. They can be more or less depending on the copier
operating conditions of each individual user.
• The initiation of a new copy cycle is inhibited upon 1 K after a near life condition has
been detected for all units (except the Toner Bottle and Waste Toner Bottle).
Life
Copying Near Life
Unit Spec. Description Life Value
Condition Value
Value
An approximate life value is 10 K
Toner Bottle — B/E — 10 K
under the specified conditions.
A waste toner full condition is
Waste Toner detected when about 4.5 K copies
40 K B/C/D/E/F — 40 K
Bottle are made after a waste toner near-
full condition has been detected.
The life specifications value is
based on A4C or Letter C. A near
life condition is detected when a
Fusing Web
17 K B/C/D/F web empty condition is detected or 16 K 17 K
Unit
a predetermined number of copies
are made, whichever arrives ear-
lier.
20-cpm copier The life specifications value is
Oil Coating 33 K based on A4C or Letter C. A near 33 K 34 K
Unit life condition or a life condition is
detected when the Oil Coating
A/B/C/D/F
15-cpm copier Roller has turned a predetermined
Oil Coating 26 K period of time or a predetermined 26 K 27 K
Unit number of copies are made, which-
ever arrives earlier.
The life specifications value is
Fusing Unit 101 K B/C/D/F 101 K ✽1 102 K
based on A4C or Letter C.
✽2 ✽2
Transfer Belt The life specifications value is
120 K A/B/C/D/F 120 K 121 K
Unit based on A4C or Letter C.
(17400 M) (17545 M)
20-cpm copier ✽3 ✽3
Imaging Unit 30 K 4415 M 4562 M
(C, M, and Y) (30 K) (31 K)
15-cpm copier The near life and life time values ✽3 ✽3
Imaging Unit 27 K are detected when the PC Drum 4415 M 4562 M
(C, M, and Y) has turned or the Developing Unit (27 K) (28 K)
A/B/C/D/F
20-cpm copier has been energized for a predeter- ✽3 ✽3
Imaging Unit 50 K mined period of time, whichever 6972 M 7122 M
(Bk) arrives earlier. (50 K) (51 K)
15-cpm copier ✽3 ✽3
Imaging Unit 47 K 6972 M 7122 M
(Bk) (47 K) (48 K)
M: minutes
D-18
00.12.25
✽ 1: As a rule, the Fusing Unit is to be replaced at the same time that the Fusing Web Unit
is replaced a sixth time (17 K × 6 = 102 K). If the Fusing Web Unit is replaced before
17 K is reached, there will be a discrepancy in the replacement cycle, resulting in a
near life and life value ranging between 90 K and 110 K.
✽ 2: The life of the Transfer Belt Unit is controlled based on the number of copies made.
The life counter gives a time value display.
✽ 3: The life of the Imaging Unit is controlled based on a time value. The life counter gives
a time value display.
• Conditions for Life Specifications Values
Copying Conditions 20-cpm Copier 15-cpm Copier

Job Type A Making two copies per job
Paper Size B A4 or Letter
Color Ratio C C (color) to Bk (black) = 5 to 1 C (color) to Bk (black) = 2.5 to 1
CV/M D 6K 3.5 K
Original Density E B/W = 5 % for each color
No. of Operating
F 20 days (Power Switch turned ON and OFF 20 times per month)
Days per Month
D-19
00.12.25
2-5. Removal of Units

• Note that replacement of a unit may call for recheck and readjustments of some items.
Oil Cleaning Unit

Transfer Belt Unit Fusing Web Unit
Fusing Unit
Imaging Unit
LED Unit
Hopper Unit
4004D182AA
NOTE
• For the removal of the Imaging Unit, Transfer Belt Unit, Fusing Unit, Fusing Web Unit,
and Oil Coating Unit, see the Unit Replacement Manual.
D-20
00.12.25
(1) Removal of the Toner Hopper Unit
NOTE
1. Remove the Paper Output Cover.

2. Open the Front Door.
3. Remove the Toner Supply Door.
4. Remove the Hopper Left Cover.
5. Slide out the Imaging Unit (C/M/Y/Bk).
☞ Unit Replacement Manual
NOTES
• After the Imaging Unit has been pulled out, place the Imaging Unit lock lever back into
• When sliding the Imaging Unit back in, make sure that the shutter is opened if the Imag-
ing Unit Lower Cover is not to be used.
6. Remove two screws and the Right Front Cover.
4004D043AA
7. Remove two screws and the Front Door Switch

Cover.
4004D044AA
8. Disconnect three terminals.

✽ Terminals: Blue, white, and green from top down
4004D045AA
D-21
00.12.25

10. Remove five screws and the Toner Hopper Unit.
4004D046AB
(2) Removal of the LED Unit
NOTE

2. Slide out the Imaging Unit (C/M/Y/Bk).
NOTES
• After the Imaging Unit has been pulled out, place the Imaging Unit lock lever back into
• When sliding the Imaging Unit back in, make sure that the shutter is opened if the Imag-
ing Unit Lower Cover is not to be used.
3. Open the Right Door and Rear Left Cover.

4. Remove the Ozone Filter, Waste Toner Bottle, and Transfer Belt Unit.
5. Remove the Rear Cover and Rear Left Cover.
6. Remove five screws and the cover.
4004D229AA
7. Remove one screw and unplug one connector on

the PIC Board.
4004D047AA
D-22
00.12.25
8. Unplug five connectors.
4004D048AB
A NOTE
• When unplugging the connector, make sure that
connector A (on the copier side) is disconnected.
Connector B (on the LED Unit side) should not be
disconnected.
B 4004D232AA
9. Lock the Imaging Unit (C/M/Y/Bk) drive hub.
NOTES
• During the locking procedure, use care not to
touch the LED surface.
• Should the LED surface be touched, clean it with
the LED Cleaning Jig.
☞ D-40
4004D024AA
NOTE
• Make sure that all four hubs are locked in position.
4004D049AA
D-23
00.12.25
10. Remove two screws and slide out the LED Unit.
4004D050AA
Precaution for Reinstalling the LED Unit

• The lever of the LED Unit must be fit into the space between the metal bracket in the
rear of the copier and another lever as illustrated below.
LED Unit Lever 4004D051AA
Precaution for Replacement of the LED Unit

• When the LED Unit is to be replaced, remove the ATDC Sensor from the old LED Unit
and remount it on the new one.
This step is not, however, necessary if the Imaging Unit is replaced at the same time.
D-24
00.12.25
2-6. Cleaning and Disassembly of the IR Unit

(1) Cleaning of the Scanner Rails

2. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe
the Scanner Rails clean of dirt.
NOTE
• Apply lubricant after cleaning.
4004D198AA
(2) Cleaning of the Mirrors (1st/2nd/3rd)

mirrors clean of dirt.
4004D199AA
(3) Cleaning of the Lens

4004D001AC

the Lens clean of dirt.
4004D200AB
D-25
00.12.25
(4) Cleaning of the Original Glass

the Lens clean of dirt.
4004D201AA
(5) Removal of the Original Glass Cooling Fan Motor
1. Remove the IR Rear Upper Cover and IR Rear

Cover.
2. Unplug one connector and remove the harness
from one wiring saddle.
3. Remove two screws and the Original Glass Cool-
ing Fan Motor.
4004D018AB
(6) Removal of the Scanner Motor
1. Remove the IR Rear Upper Cover, IR Rear

Cover, and IR Rear Right Cover.
2. Remove the Original Glass Cooling Fan Motor.
3. Remove two screws and the reinforcement
frame.
4004D015AA
4. Remove four screws and the hinge support in the

rear of the IR.
4004D027AA
D-26
00.12.25
5. Remove the tension spring for the Scanner Motor

timing belt.
4004D028AA
6. Remove the harness from one cord clamp and

one edge cover.
7. Remove three screws and the Scanner Motor
Assy.
4004D029AD
8. Remove two screws and the Scanner Motor.
4004D030AA
(7) Removal of IR Cooling Fan Motor 2

1. Remove the IR Right Cover.
3. Remove the Control Panel.
4. Remove the IR Lower Front Cover, IR Front Cover, and IR Rear Upper Cover.
5. Remove the optical cover.
6. Remove three screws and the Imaging Process-

ing Lid on the right inside the IR.
4004D002AB
D-27
00.12.25
7. Remove four screws and the IR upper right metal

bracket.
4004D004AA
8. Unplug one connector.

9. Remove two screws and IR Cooling Fan Motor 2.
4004D032AD
(8) Removal of IR Cooling Fan Motor 1

3. Remove two screws and IR Cooling Fan Motor 1.
4004D034AB
(9) Removal of the Scanner Home Sensor

3. Remove one screw and the Scanner Home Sen-
sor Assy.
4004D035AB
4. Remove one screw and the Scanner Home Sen-

sor.
4004D036AB
D-28
00.12.25
(10) Removal of the Original Cover Detecting Sensor
1. Remove the IR Rear Upper Cover and IR Rear

Cover.
3. Remove one screw and the Original Cover
Detecting Sensor Assy.
4004D037AA
4. Remove the sensor fixing bracket and the Origi-

nal Cover Detecting Sensor.
4004D038AA
(11) Removal of Original Size Detecting Sensors FD1 and FD2

3. Remove one screw and Original Size Detecting
Sensor FD1.
4004D123AA

Sensor FD2.
4004D122AA
D-29
00.12.25
(12) Removal of Original Size Detecting Sensor CD1

Sensor CD1.
4004D124AA
(13) Removal of the Size Reset Switch
1. Remove the Control Panel and IR Front Cover.

3. Remove one screw and Size Reset Switch.
4004D039AB
(14) Removal of the Scanner Assy

2. Move the Scanner Assy to the location shown
and remove one mounting screw each at the
front and rear end.
4004D202AA
Scanner mounting Screws

NOTE
• Do not remove the Scanner Positioning Screw.
Scanner
positioning Screws 4004D203AA
D-30
00.12.25
3. Take out the Scanner Assy by turning it in the

direction of the arrow shown.
NOTE
• The Scanner Assy cannot be completely taken off
the copier as a Flat Cable is still connected to it at
this time.
4004D017AB

remove the Scanner Assy Flat Cable.
4004D025AA
(15) Removal of the Exposure Lamp

☞ D-30
3. Remove the Exposure Lamp from the Lamp Ter-

minals.
4. Remove the Exposure Lamp.
4004D040AB
(16) Removal of the Temperature Fuse

☞ D-30
3. Remove one screw and the fuse cover.
4004D041AA
D-31
00.12.25
4. Remove two screws and the Temperature Fuse.
4004D042AB
(17) Removal of the Scanner Drive Cables

2. Remove the IR Right Cover, IR Lower Front Cover, IR Rear Upper Cover, and IR Rear
Cover.
5. Remove the Scanner Assy and Flat Cable.
☞ D-30, D-10
6. Unhook the springs of the Scanner Drive Cables

on the hook side, one each at the front and in the
rear.
7. Remove the front and rear Scanner Drive Cables.
4002D110AB
8. Remove the Scanner Motor Assy.

9. Remove one screw and then slide the front pulley
and bushing toward the rear.
4002D112AA
10. Remove one screw and then slide the rear pulley
and bushing toward the front.
4002D113AA
D-32
00.12.25
11. Remove the Scanner Drive Gear, pulleys and

bushings at the front and rear, and the shaft.
4002D114AD
(18) Winding of the Scanner Drive Cables
Pulley C
Pulley E Pulley F
Pulley B
Pulley D
Pulley A
4002D001AA
Front
1. Position the round bead of the Scanner Drive
Cable in the pulley as shown.
NOTE
• Make sure that the bead snugly rests in the slit in
the pulley.
4002D002AA
2. Wind the fixed bead end of the cable around the

pulley five turns clockwise, from the rear toward
the front side.
4002D003AA
D-33
00.12.25
3. Wind the hook end of the cable around the pulley

five turns counterclockwise, from the front toward
the rear side.
NOTE
• Make sure that no part of the cable rides on the
other.
4002D004AA
4. Slip the Cable Holding Jig onto the pulley to

secure the cable in position.
4002D501AA
Rear
5. Position the round bead of the Scanner Drive

Cable in the pulley as shown.
NOTE
• Make sure that the bead snugly rests in the slit in
the pulley.
4002D002AA
6. Wind the fixed bead end of the cable around the

pulley five turns clockwise, from the front toward
the rear side.
4002D006AA
7. Wind the hook end of the cable around the pulley

five turns counterclockwise, from the rear toward
the front side.
NOTE
• Make sure that no part of the cable rides on the
other.
4002D004AA
D-34
00.12.25
8. Slip the Cable Holding Jig onto the pulley to

secure the cable in position.
4002D502AA
9. Mount the front and rear pulleys and bushings on

the shaft and install the shaft to the Scanner Unit.
10. Mount the Scanner Drive Gear on the shaft and
secure it in position with one screw.
4002D115AD
11. Install an Allen wrench into the holes in the shaft

and the IR Base Plate.
4002D116AD
12. Slide the front pulley and bushing to the front and
install one mounting screw.
4002D117AC
13. Slide the rear pulley and bushing to the rear and
install one mounting screw.
4002D118AD
D-35
00.12.25
Front
14. Wind the bead end of the cable around pulley C

and pulley B, then hook the bead onto the Adjust-
able Anchor.
Pulley C
Pulley B
4002D008AA
15. Wind the hook end of the cable around pulley A

Pulley B
and pulley B.
Pulley A 4002D009AA
16. Fit the hook end of the cable into the groove in
the Cable Guide and hook the spring.
4002D119AB
Rear
17. Wind the bead end of the cable around pulley F

and pulley E, then hook the bead onto the Adjust-
Pulley F able Anchor.
Pulley E
4002D010AA
18. Wind the hook end of the cable around pulley D

Pulley E
and pulley E.
Pulley D
4002D011AA
D-36
00.12.25
19. Fit the hook end of the cable into the groove in
the Cable Guide and hook the spring.
4002D120AB
20. Mount the Scanner Motor Assy.

21. Remove the Cable Holding Jigs from the front and rear pulleys.
22. Remove the Allen wrench.
23. Mount the Scanner Assy and Flat Cable.
24. Reinstall the optical cover.
25. Reinstall the Original Glass.
26. Reinstall the IR Right Cover, IR Lower Front Cover, IR Front Cover, IR Rear Upper
Cover, and IR Rear Cover.
27. Reinstall the Control Panel.
28. Adjust the position of the Scanner and 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage.
☞ D-90
NOTE
• Whenever the Scanner Drive Cables have been removed, be sure to carry out the “FD-
Mag” adjustment procedure.
☞ D-85
D-37
00.12.25
2-7. CLEANING AND DISASSEMBLY OF THE ENGINE PARTS

(1) Cleaning of the Paper Take-Up Roll
1. Slide out the drawer.

the Paper Take-Up Roll clean of dirt.
4658D005AA
(2) Cleaning of the Paper Separator Roll
1. Remove the Paper Separator Roll Mounting

Assy.
☞ D-61
the Paper Separator Roll clean of dirt.
4658D006AA
(3) Cleaning of the Synchronizing Rollers
1. Open the Right Door.

2. Remove two screws and the guide.
4004D204AB

the Synchronizing Rollers clean of dirt.
4004D205AC
D-38
00.12.25
(4) Cleaning of the Paper Dust Remover

2. Remove the Paper Dust Remover.
4004D206AB
3. Using a brush, whisk dust off the Paper Dust

Remover.
4004D207AA
(5) Cleaning of the Transfer Belt Unit
NOTES
• If any solvent is to be used, select one from among the following:
IPA, ethyl alcohol, PPC Cleaner, and Solmix AP-7.
• When the solvent has been used for cleaning, make 28 or more copies using A3 blank
sheets of paper to remove image noise.
1. Remove the Transfer Belt Unit.

2. Wipe the surface of the Transfer Belt with a dry
cloth.
NOTES
• If the dry cloth is not effective in removing dirt,
dampen it with alcohol.
4004D228AA
• Do not use a cloth wet with water.
D-39
00.12.25
(6) Cleaning of the LED
NOTE

2. Remove the Imaging Unit (C/M/Y/Bk).
3. Wipe the LED of the LED Assy with the LED Cleaning Jig clean by moving the jig three
reciprocating cycles.
NOTE
• Use the specified LED Cleaning Jig only.
4004D223AB
(7) Cleaning of the Area around the Waste Toner Collecting Port
1. Open the Rear Left Cover.

2. Remove the Waste Toner Bottle.
4004D221AA
D-40
00.12.25
3. Wipe the areas around the Waste Toner Collect-

ing Port clean of spilled toner and dirt using a soft
cloth dampened with water or alcohol.
4004D222AB
(8) Cleaning of the Fusing Entrance Guide Plate
1. Remove the Fusing Unit.

2. Wipe the Fusing Entrance Guide Plate clean of
dirt using a waste cloth dampened with alcohol.
4004D208AA
(9) Removal of the Imaging Unit Motor C/M/Y/Bk
NOTE
1. Remove the Rear Cover.

2. Open the Upper Right Door.
3. Remove the Rear Upper Cover.
5. Remove the Rear Right Cover.
6. Remove the Ozone Filter.
7. Open the Left Door.
9. Remove the Rear Left Cover.
10. Remove six screws and the MSC Cover.
4004D052AB
D-41
00.12.25
11. Remove two screws and the mounting bracket.
4004D053AA
12. Unplug two connectors of the 2nd Drawer.
4004D054AA
13. Remove two screws and the power line mounting

bracket for the 2nd Drawer.
14. Remove the harness from two wiring saddles.
4004D055AA
15. Unplug eight connectors.

16. Remove 11 screws and the MSC/PIC Board Box.
4004D056AB

☞ D-22
19. Remove four screws and Imaging Unit Motor Y.
4004D057AB
D-42
00.12.25
20. Remove the harness from the wiring saddle.

✽ Wiring saddle: Two for M/C; one for Bk
21. Unplug two connectors each.
22. Remove four screws each and Imaging Unit
Motor M/C/Bk.
4004D058AB
(10) Removal of the Main Motor
1. Remove the MSC/PIC Board Box.

3. Remove four screws and the Main Motor.
4004D060AA
(11) Removal of the Ozone Ventilation Fan Motor

3. Remove four screws and the Ozone Ventilation
Fan Motor.
4004D061AC
(12) Removal of the Fusing Drive Motor

3. Remove four screws and the Fusing Drive Motor.
4004D062AB
D-43
00.12.25
(13) Removal of the Fusing Pressure/Retraction Motor

2. Remove the Fusing Drive Motor.
3. Remove two screws and the harness holder.
4004D063AA

5. Remove three screws and the Fusing Pressure/
Retraction Motor Assy.
4004D064AA
6. Snap off one E-ring and remove the gear and pin.
NOTE
• Use care not to lose the pin.
7. Snap off one E-ring and remove the bushing.

8. Remove two screws and the Fusing Retraction
Position Sensor mounting bracket.
4004D125AA
9. Remove the gear (black).
4004D209AA
10. Remove two screws and the Fusing Pressure/

Retraction Motor.
4004D126AB
D-44
00.12.25
Precaution for Reinstallation

• When reinstalling the harness holder,
make sure that the protrusion on the
backside of the holder fits into the
hole in the metal bracket.
4004D065AB
(14) Removal of the 1st Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Motor

2. Unplug three connectors and remove two termi-
nals.
3. Remove six screws and High Voltage Unit 2.
4004D066AA

5. Remove three screws and the Fusing Cooling
Fan Motor 2 Unit.
4004D067AB
6. Remove four screws and, sliding the board

holder to the left, take it off.
4004D068AA

8. Remove two screws and the 1st Image Transfer
Pressure/Retraction Motor.
4004D069AA
D-45
00.12.25
(15) Removal of Toner Replenishing Motor C/Bk

2. Remove the Right Front Cover.
4. Remove four screws and the Toner Replenishing
Motor C/Bk Assy.
4004D071AB
(16) Removal of Toner Replenishing Motor Y/M
1. Remove the Toner Hopper.

☞ D-21
2. Remove two screws and the Front Door Switch
Assy.
4004D072AA

4. Remove four screws and the Toner Replenishing
Motor Y/M Assy.
4004D073AE
(17) Removal of the Cleaning Web Drive Motor

☞ D-21
2. Remove the Upper Right Front Cover.
3. Open the Right Door and Upper Right Door.
4. Slid out the Fusing Unit.
5. Remove three screws and the Upper Right Front

Cover Guide.
4004D127AA
D-46
00.12.25

7. Remove two screws and the Cleaning Web Drive
Motor Assy.
4004D128AB
8. Remove two screws and the Cleaning Web Drive

Motor.
4004D129AA
Gear Assy Construction
4004D130AA
(18) Removal of the Power Supply Cooling Fan Motor
1. Remove the Paper Output Cover, Rear Cover,

and Rear Upper Cover.
2. Remove six screws and the DC Power Supply 1
Cover.
4004D074AA
D-47
00.12.25
3. Unplug 15 connectors and remove

the harness from 13 cord clamps
and five wiring saddles.
4. Remove nine screws and DC
Power Supply 1.
4004D075AB
5. Remove two screws and the Power Supply Cool-

ing Fan Motor.
4004D076AA
(19) Removal of Fusing Cooling Fan Motor 2
1. Remove the Paper Output Cover, Rear Cover,

and Rear Upper Cover.
3. Remove two screws and Fusing Cooling Fan
Motor 2.
4004D077AC
(20) Removal of Fusing Cooling Fan Motor 1

2. Open the cover.
4004D078AA
D-48
00.12.25
4. Disengage the lock at the front.

Lock
4004D079AB
5. Disengage the lock in the rear and remove the

2nd Image Transfer Roller.
Lock
4004D080AB
6. Remove ten screws and the Right Door reinforce-

ment frame.
4004D081AB
7. Remove two screws and the support.

8. Remove four screws and the fan motor duct.
4004D082AC
9. Remove two screws and Fusing Cooling Fan

Motor 1.
4004D083AA
D-49
00.12.25
(21) Removal of the 2nd Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Clutch

3. Snap off one C-clip and remove the 2nd Image
Transfer Pressure/Retraction Clutch.
4004D084AA
NOTE
• When reinstalling the 2nd Image Transfer Pres-
sure/Retraction Clutch, make sure that it is
installed correctly as shown.
4004D210AA
(22) Removal of the Synchronizing Roller Clutch

2. Remove the 2nd Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Clutch.
3. Remove the 2nd Image Transfer Roller.
4. Unplug one connector of the Synchronizing

Roller Clutch.
4004D085AA
5. Snap off one C-clip and remove the Synchroniz-

ing Roller Clutch.
4004D086AC
D-50
00.12.25
NOTE
• When reinstalling the Synchronizing Roller Clutch,
make sure that it is installed correctly as shown.
4004D211AA
(23) Removal of the Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Clutch

3. Remove four screws and the Manual Bypass
Unit.
4004D087AB
4. Remove one screw and the ground plate.
4004D088AB

6. Snap off one C-clip and remove the Manual Feed
Paper Take-Up Clutch.
4004D089AA
NOTE
• When reinstalling the Manual Feed Paper Take-Up
Clutch, make sure that it is installed correctly as
shown.
4004D212AB
D-51
00.12.25
(24) Removal of the Paper Take-Up Clutch

1. Remove the Rear Cover and Rear Right Cover.
3. Remove the Main Motor.
4. Unplug two connectors, disconnect three ground

connections, and remove the harness from the
wiring saddle.
5. Remove two screws and the hookup connector
metal bracket.
4004D090AC
6. Remove two screws and the harness guide.

7. Remove the harness from one edge cover.
4004D091AB
8. Remove one bearing.

9. Snap off three E-rings and remove three bush-
ings.
10. Remove nine screws and the Gear Assy Guide.
4004D092AB
11. Remove one gear.

12. Snap off one E-ring and remove the Paper Take-
Up Clutch.
4004D093AC
D-52
00.12.25
NOTE
• When reinstalling the Paper Take-Up Clutch, make
sure that it is installed correctly as shown.
4004D213AA
(25) Removal of AIDC/Registration Sensor 1/2

2. Remove four screws and the Synchronizing
Roller entrance guide.
4004D094AA
3. Remove four screws and the cover.
4004D230AA

remove AIDC/Registration Sensor 1.
4004D095AA

remove AIDC/Registration Sensor 2.
4004D096AA
D-53
00.12.25
(26) Removal of the Temperature/Humidity Sensor
1. Remove the Synchronizing Roller entrance

guide.
☞ D-53 (steps 1 and 2)
2. Remove one screw, two washers, and the cover.
4004D097AA
3. Remove one screw, unplug one connector, and

remove the Temperature/Humidity Sensor.
4004D098AB
(27) Removal of the Toner Supply Door Sensor

☞ D-21
3. Remove the sensor fixing bracket and Toner
Supply Door Sensor.
4004D131AB
(28) Removal of the Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Sensor

2. Remove the Manual Bypass Unit.
☞ D-51
3. Remove the ground plate.
☞ D-50

5. Remove the sensor fixing bracket and Manual
Feed Paper Take-Up Sensor.
4004D132AA
D-54
00.12.25
(29) Removal of the 1st Image Transfer Retraction Position Sensor
1. Remove the 1st Image Transfer Pressure/Retrac-

tion Motor.
☞ D-43
2. Remove four screws and the 1st Image Transfer
Retraction Position Sensor Assy.
4004D133AA

4. Remove the sensor fixing bracket and 1st Image
Transfer Retraction Position Sensor.
4004D134AA
(30) Removal of the Double Feed Sensor
1. Pressing the tabs of the right and left rails, slide

out the drawer.
4004D135AA
4004D136AA

3. Remove one screw and the Double Feed Sensor.
4004D137AB
D-55
00.12.25
(31) Removal of the Drawer Set Sensor and Drawer Paper Near-Empty Sensor
2. Remove the Rear Upper Cover, Rear Right Cover, Rear Left Cover, and Rear Cover.
4. Remove four terminals.

✽ Terminal colors: White, blue, red, and orange from
top down
5. Remove two screws and the terminal harness
guide.
4004D138AB
6. Remove two screws and High Voltage Unit 1.

8. Remove the harness from one cord clamp and
one edge cover.
4004D140AB

10. Remove the harness from one edge cover.
11. Remove two screws and High Voltage Unit 1.
4004D139AA
12. Remove one screw and the sensor assy.

13. Remove the harness from one edge cover and
unplug two connectors.
4004D141AB
D-56
00.12.25
14. Remove the sensor fixing bracket and take off

the Drawer Set Sensor and Drawer Paper Near-
Empty Sensor.
4004D142AA
(32) Removal of the Left Door Switch
1. Remove the power supply box.

2. Remove two terminals.
3. Remove one screw and the Left Door Switch.
4004D099AB
(33) Removal of the Right Door Switch

3. Remove one screw and the Right Door Switch
Assy.
4004D143AB
4. Remove one screw and the Right Door Switch.
4004D144AB
D-57
00.12.25
(34) Removal of the Front Door Switch

2. Open the Toner Supply Door.
3. Remove the Hopper Left Cover.

5. Remove two screws and the Front Door Switch.
4004D145AA
(35) Removal of the Fusing Roller Rotation Detecting Sensor

1. Open the Right Door and Upper Right Door.
2. Slide out the Fusing Unit.

4. Remove two screws and the Fusing Roller Rota-
tion Detecting Sensor.
4004D146AA
(36) Removal of the Fusing Retraction Position Sensor
1. Remove the Fusing Pressure/Retraction Motor

Assy.
2. Remove the sensor fixing bracket and Fusing
Retraction Position Sensor.
4004D147AA
(37) Removal of the Exit Sensor
1. Open the Upper Right Door.

3. Remove the sensor fixing bracket and Exit Sen-
sor.
4004D148AB
D-58
00.12.25
(38) Removal of the 2nd Image Transfer Pressure Position Sensor


4. Remove one screw and the 2nd Image Transfer
Pressure Position Sensor.
4004D151AA
(39) Removal of the Synchronizing Roller Sensor


4. Remove two screws and the Synchronizing
Roller Sensor.
4004D152AA
(40) Removal of the OHP Detecting Sensor

2. Remove the Paper Dust Remover Unit.
4004D153AA

5. Remove the sensor fixing bracket and OHP
Detecting Sensor.
4004D154AA
D-59
00.12.25
(41) Removal of the CD Paper Size Detecting Sensor Assy
Where Sensor
Assy is Installed
Rear
Front
4004D156AA

☞ D-22
☞ D-55 (step 1)
3. Pressing the portion indicated by the arrow of the

CD Paper Size Detecting Sensor Assy, slide the
assy to the right and take it off.
4004D506AB
4004D155AB
(42) Removal of the Paper Take-Up Roll

2. Lock the Paper Lifting Plate into position.
3. Snap off one C-clip from the Paper Take-Up Roll
Assy.
4. Slide the Paper Take-Up Roll Assy to the rear
and take its shaft off the front bushing.
4658D008AA
D-60
00.12.25
5. Snap off one C-clip and remove the Paper Take-

Up Roll.
4658D009AA
(43) Removal of the Paper Separator Roll

2. Remove two screws and the Paper Separator
Roll mounting bracket assy.
4658D002AA
3. Take off the rubber stopper, shaft, spring, and

guide plate to remove the Paper Separator Roll
fixing bracket assy.
NOTE
• At reinstallation, make sure that the rubber stopper
is on the rear side of the copier.
4658D003AA
4. Snap off one E-ring and the Paper Separator Roll

Assy.
4658D004AA
(44) Removal of High Voltage Unit 1

(45) Removal of High Voltage Unit 2/3

(46) Removal of DC Power Supply 1

D-61
00.12.25
(47) Removal of the Charge Neutralizing Relay

2. Remove four terminals.
3. Remove one screw and the Charge Neutralizing
Relay.
4004D160AB
(48) Removal of the Waste Toner Full Detecting Sensor

☞ D-22
2. Remove one screw and the Waste Toner Full
Detecting Sensor Cover.
4004D161AA
3. Unplug one connector and remove the Waste

Toner Full Detecting Sensor.
4004D162AB
(49) Removal of the Waste Toner Bottle Set Sensor

☞ D-22
2. Disengage two locking tabs and remove the
Waste Toner Bottle Set Sensor Assy.
4004D163AA
D-62
00.12.25

4. Remove one screw and the Waste Toner Bottle
Set Sensor.
4004D164AA
(50) Removal of the Toner Empty Switch (Y/M/C/Bk)

2. Remove six screws and the Toner Empty Switch
Cover.
4004D111AB
3. Unplug one connector each and remove the

Toner Empty Switch.
4004D112AB
D-63
00.12.25
3. ADJUSTMENTS
• The adjustment procedures must be carried out in the order of printer and IR.
3-1. ADJUSTMENT JIGS AND TOOLS USED
4004D510AA 4002D503AA
Scanner Positioning Jigs Scanner Drive Cable

Holding Jig
4004D185AA 4004D186AA
Imaging Unit Pull-out Jig LED Cleaning Jig
4004D187AA
LED Cleaning Jig Pad
D-64
00.12.25
3-2. ADJUSTMENT REQUIREMENTS LIST
Adjustment Item Requirements Ref. Page

Touch Panel Adj. Automatically adjusted ☞ D-69
Top Margin 5.0 ± 1.0 mm ☞ D-70
Left Margin 3.0 ± 1.0 mm ☞ D-72
Dup. Left Margin 3.0 ± 1.0 mm ☞ D-73
Paper Loop Test print tilts ± 0. ☞ D-74
FD, CD, and tilt ± 0 with
Color Shift Correction ☞ D-75
Printer
reference to Bk.
Fuser Nip 7 ± 0.5 mm ☞ D-78
Fuser Temp. — ☞ D-80
Fuser Speed — ☞ D-81
Gradation Adjust — ☞ D-87
PRT Max Density — ☞ D-88
PRT Highlight — ☞ D-88
Background Voltage Margin — ☞ D-89
Left Image 0 ± 1.0 mm ☞ D-82
Top Image 10 ± 1.0 mm ☞ D-83
200 ± 1.0 mm ☞ D-84
IR
CD-Mag.
FD-Mag. 300 ± 1.5 mm ☞ D-85
Org. Detect Sensor Automatically adjusted ☞ D-86
D-65
00.12.25
3-3. ADJUSTMENT OF SWITCHES

(1) Microswitches
The following microswitches are used in various parts of this copier.
Yellow Blue
(NO) (NC)
Red
Red (COM)
(COM)
1136D007AA 1136D008AA
Wiring for the NO Type Wiring for the NC Type
NC (Normally-Closed) : Current flows between NC and COM when the actuator is open.
NO (Normally-Open) : Current flows between NO and COM when the actuator is
closed.
COM (Common) : Common contact for NC and NO.
Requirement
The gap between the switch and actuator should be

Actuator 0.1 to 0.5 mm when the actuator is closed.
COM
NC
0.1 mm to NO
0.5 mm
1074D040AA
Out-of-Adjustment (When the actuator is closed)

• If the gap between the switch and actuator is too big, current dose not at times flow to NC
or NO.
• If there is no gap between the switch and actuator, the actuator is bent or the switch can
be broken.
D-66
00.12.25
3-4. ADJUSTMENT OF BELT TENSION
Checks after Adjustment

• Turn the timing belt and check that all the pulleys and grooves of the belt fit securely.
• Each belt should flex a little when the belt is lightly pressed with a finger.
Reference
• Since a given tension is applied by a tension spring to the Tension Lever that maintains
the tension of each timing belt, adjustment is completed by re-tightening the mounting
screw after it has been loosened.
(1) Adjustment of the Scanner Motor Timing Belt

1. Remove the Original Glass Cooling Fan Motor.
☞ D-26
2. Loosen the three screws that secure the Scanner

Motor mounting bracket.
4004D188AC
3. With the Scanner Drive Gear mounting screw

positioned on the motor side, move the Scanner
Motor to the right and left three times.
4. Tighten the three screws that secure the Scanner
Motor mounting bracket.
4004D231AB
D-67
00.12.25
3-5. ELECTRICAL/IMAGE ADJUSTMENT

(1) Accessing the Tech. Rep. Mode
1. Press the Utility key.
2. Touch [Meter Count].
3. Press the following keys in this order:
Stop → 0 → 0 → Stop → 0 → 1
(2) Producing a Test Print

1. Call the Tech. Rep. Mode to the screen.
2. Touch [Test Print].
3. Select the desired test pattern type.
4. Make the necessary settings.
✽ Press the Stop key to terminate the Test Print function.
D-68
00.12.25
(3) Touch Panel Adj.
NOTE
• Make this adjustment if the Touch Panel is slow to respond to a pressing action.
1. Press the following keys:

Stop → 0 → Stop → 3
2. Using the tip of a pen or similar object, touch the

four crosses (+) on the screen in sequence.
NOTES
• These crosses may be touched in any order; but
be sure to touch the center of each cross.
• Use care not to damage the screen surface with
the tip of the pen.
1155D191CA
3. The cross touched changes into a grid marker

that consists of a square with a cross superim-
posed.
4. Touch [END].
1155D192CA
D-69
00.12.25
(4) Top Margin

Requirement
Width A on the test pattern produced should fall

within the following range.
Width
A
4004D511AA
Specifications Adjustment Mode Setting Range

5.0 or 7.0 ± 1.0 mm Top Margin -2.0 mm to +2.0 mm
✽ The leading edge erase width is set to 5 mm or 7 mm by “Erase” under “Administrator

Mode.”
This adjustment must be made in any of the following cases:

• The LED Unit has been replaced.
• The paper type has been changed.
• The image on the copy deviates in the FD direction.
• A faint image occurs on the leading edge of the image.
• A misfeed occurs at the 2nd image transfer section.
Adjustment Procedure
2. Touch these keys in this order: “Machine Adjust” → “PRT Area” → “Top Margin.”
3. Load the 1st Drawer with A3 plain paper.
4. Select plain paper on the Paper Type Setting Dial.
5. Press the Start key to let the copier produce a test pattern.
6. Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern.
✽ If width A is outside the specified range:

7. Touch “Paper Send Position” and then change the setting using the Up/Down key.
Adjustment Instructions
If width A is longer than the specifications, make the setting value smaller than the current
one.
If width A is shorter than the specifications, make the setting value greater than the current
one.
10. If width A is outside the specified range, change the setting again and make a check
again.
11. If width A falls within the specified range, touch “MENU.”
12. Following the same procedure, adjust for thick paper and OHP.
13. Go back to the initial Tech. Rep. Mode screen.
14. Touch “Test Print.”
15. Select “Halftone Pattern.”
D-70
00.12.25
16. Select “Cyan,” “SINGLE,” and “HYPER.”

17. Press the Clear key to clear the density setting.
18. Enter “255” from the 10-Key Pad.
20. Check to see if the image on the leading and trailing edges of the test pattern is faint.
✽ If the image is faint:

21. Touch these keys in this order: “Machine Adjust” → “PRT Area” → “Top Margin.”
22. Touch “2nd Transfer Timing” and then use the Down key to decrease the setting.
NOTE
• Decreasing the setting makes transfer timing faster. An abnormally low setting could,
however, result in a paper misfeed.
23. Touch “MENU.”

24. Produce a halftone test pattern again.
25. Check the image on the leading and trailing edges of the test pattern.
26. If the image on the leading and trailing edges of the test pattern is faint, change the set-
ting and make a check again.
D-71
00.12.25
(5) Left Margin

Requirement
Width A Width A on the test pattern produced should fall

4004D512AA

3.0 ± 1.0 mm Left Margin -3.0 mm to +3.0 mm

• The LED Unit has been replaced.
• A paper feed unit has been added.
• The image on the copy deviates in the CD direction.
2. Touch these keys in this order: “Machine Adjust” → “PRT Area” → “Left Margin.”
5. Select the 1st Drawer.

8. Touch “1st” and then change the setting using the Up/Down key.
one.
one.
again.
13. Following the same procedure, adjust for all other paper sources.
D-72
00.12.25
(6) Dup. Left Margin

Requirement
Width A Width A on the test pattern produced should fall

NOTE
• Make this check with the backside of the test pat-
tern produced.
4004D512AA

3.0 ± 1.0 mm Dup. Left Margin -3.0 mm to +3.0 mm

• The Duplex Unit has been set up.
• The image on the backside of the 2-sided copy deviates in the CD direction.
2. Touch these keys in this order: “Machine Adjust” → “PRT Area” → “Dup. Left Margin.”
5. Select the 1st Drawer.

8. Touch “1st” and then change the setting using the Up/Down key.
one.
one.
again.
13. Following the same procedure, adjust for all other paper sources.
D-73
00.12.25
(7) Paper Loop

Requirement
The test pattern produced should not deviate in the

direction of either A or B.
A B
4004D520AA
Adjustment Mode Setting Range

Paper Loop -5 to +5

• The void image along the leading edge varies from one copy to another.
• Paper skew occurs.
• Paper is folded.
• Paper misfeed occurs.
1. Select the paper source, for which the adjustment is to be made.
3. Touch “Test Print.”
4. Touch “Halftone Pattern.”
5. Press the Start key and then immediately press the Stop key to let the copier produce
the test pattern.
6. Fold the test pattern in half lengthwise to check for deviation in the pattern.
✽ If there is any deviation in the pattern:

7. Go back to the Tech. Rep. Mode initial screen.
8. Touch “Machine Adjust.”
9. Touch “Paper Loop.”
10. Select the paper and paper source to be adjusted.
11. Press the Clear key to clear the current setting.
12. Enter the setting from the 10-Key Pad.
✽ Use the Access key to select the sign of + or -.
Setting Instructions
If the test pattern deviates in the direction of A, decrease the setting.
If the test pattern deviates in the direction of B, increase the setting.

14. Let the copier produce a test pattern again.
15. Check the test pattern for deviation.
16. If there is any deviation, change the setting for Paper Loop and make a check again.
17. If there is no deviation, use the same procedure to adjust for all other paper types and
sources.
D-74
00.12.25
(8) Color Shift Correction
This adjustment must be made in the following case:

• Color shift occurs.
1. Make the “Paper Loop” adjustment.
☞ D-74
2. Go back to the Tech. Rep. Mode initial screen.
3. Touch these keys in this order: “Machine Adjust” → “Color Shift Correction.”
4. Touch “Color Shift Correction (Bk).”
6. Fold the test pattern in half lengthwise.
7. Check to see if the black cross at the location shown below deviates or not.
8. If it deviates, change the setting using the Up/Down key.
If it does not deviate, go to step 12.
If the cross deviates in the direction of

A, decrease the setting.
B, increase the setting.
A B
Check Position 4004D509AB
10. Check to see if the cross on the test pattern deviates.
11. If it deviates, change the setting and then make a check again.
If it does not deviate, go to step 12.
13. Touch “Color Shift Correction (C).”
15. Check to see if any of the cyan, magenta, and yellow crosses deviates with reference to
the black cross.
D-75
00.12.25
✽ If any of the crosses deviates:

16. Touch the color of the deviated cross.
17. Change the settings for X and Y using the Up/Down key.
For X direction:
A B
For Y direction:
B
D-76
00.12.25
18. Fold the test pattern in half lengthwise.

the black cross.
✽ If any of the crosses deviates:

20. Touch the color of the deviated cross.
21. Change the setting for skew using the Up/Down key.

A B
Check Position 4004D521AA
the black cross.
24. If any of the crosses deviates, change the setting and make a check again.
D-77
00.12.25
(9) Fuser Nip

Requirement
Nip Width The nip width on the test pattern produced should fall
4004D513AA

7.0 ± 0.5 mm Fuser Nip —

• Fusing performance is poor.
• A misfeed occurs at the fusing section.
• Gloss failure occurs.
• Image problems relating to copies made on OHP transparencies occur.
2. Touch these keys in this order: “Machine Adjust” → “Fuse Nip.”
3. Load the 1st Drawer with A4 crosswise paper.
6. Check the nip width on the test pattern.
✽ If the nip width is outside the specified range:

7. Slide out the Fusing Unit.
8. Remove the front and rear covers from the Fusing Unit.
9. Turn the adjusting screws at the front and rear to

adjust the nip width.
4004D217AB
D-78
00.12.25
If the nip width on the test pattern is longer than the specifications, loosen the adjusting
screws.
If the nip width on the test pattern is shorter than the specifications, tighten the adjusting
screws.
10. Reinstall the front and rear covers and the Fusing Unit in position.
11. Close the Right Door and Upper Right Door.
12. Produce a test pattern again.
13. Check the nip width on the test pattern.
14. If the nip width does not fall within the specifications, turn the adjusting screws as nec-
essary and then make a check again.
D-79
00.12.25
(10) Fuser Temp.

• Fusing performance is poor or offset occurs when the paper type or environmental condi-
tions are changed.
As a general rule, the following settings should not be changed:

• Plain (Lower)
• OHP Film (Lower)
• Thick 1 (Lower)
• Thick 2 (Lower)
2. Touch these keys in this order: “Machine Adjust” → “Fuse Temp.”
3. Select the paper type.
5. Enter the new setting from the 10-Key Pad.
If fusing performance is poor, increase the setting.
If offset occurs, decrease the setting.
✽ The temperature does not change immediately when the setting is change. Wait a while
before performing the subsequent steps.
7. Go back to the Basic screen.
8. Make an ordinary copy using the paper type selected in step 3.
9. Check the image on the copy to ensure that there are no image problems evident.
10. If fusing performance is still poor or offset is evident, change the setting and make a
check again.
D-80
00.12.25
(11) Fuser Speed

• Brush effect or blurred image is evident as a result of changes in environmental condi-
tions or degraded durability.
2. Touch these keys in this order: “Machine Adjust” → “Fuse Speed.”
3. Select the paper type.
If brush effect is evident, decrease the setting.
If a blurred image occurs, increase the setting.
7. Go back to the Basic screen.
8. Make an ordinary copy using the paper type selected in step 3.
9. Check the image on the copy to ensure that there are no image problems evident.
10. If brush effect or blurred image is still evident, change the setting and make a check
again.
D-81
00.12.25
(12) Left Image

Requirement
Scale 0-mm The position of 0 mm of the scale on the sample copy

Position produced should fall within the following range.
4004D514AA

0 ± 1.0 mm Left Image -10.0 to +10.0

• The Original Glass has been replaced.
• The Scanner Home Sensor has been replaced.
2. Touch these keys in this order: “Machine Adjust” → “IR Area.”
3. Touch “Left Image.”
4. Place a scale on the Original Glass so that it runs parallel with the Original Width Scale
and its leading edge is aligned with the Original Length Scale.
5. Press the Start key to make a copy.
6. Check the image on the copy produced.
✽ If the image does not meet the specifications:

7. Change the setting using the Up/Down key.
If the 0-mm position on the sample copy is on the right side of the correct 0-mm position
perpendicularly to the feeding direction (less than -1 mm), decrease the setting.
If the 0-mm position on the sample copy is on the left side of the correct 0-mm position per-
pendicularly to the feeding direction (exceeding 1 mm), increase the setting.

9. Check the image on the copy to see if the specifications are met.
10. If it fails to meet the specifications, change the setting and make a check again.
11. If it meets the specifications, touch “MENU.”
D-82
00.12.25
(13) Top Image

Requirement
Scale 10-mm Position The position of 10 mm of the scale on the sample

copy produced should fall within the following range.
4004D515AA

10.0 ± 1.0 mm Top Image -5.0 to +5.0

• The CCD Unit has been replaced.
• The Original Glass has been replaced.
• The Original Scale has been replaced.
3. Touch “Top Image.”
4. Place a scale on the Original Glass so that it runs parallel with the Original Length
Scale and its leading edge is aligned with the Original Width Scale.

If the 10-mm position on the sample copy is on the right side of the correct 10-mm position
parallel to the feeding direction (less than 9 mm), decrease the setting.
If the 10-mm position on the sample copy is on the left side of the correct 10-mm position
parallel to the feeding direction (exceeding 11 mm), increase the setting.

D-83
00.12.25
(14) CD-Mag.
Requirement
200 mm The 200-mm width of the scale on the sample copy

produced should fall within the following range.
4004D516AB

200 ± 1.0 mm CD-Mag. 0.990 to 1.010

• The CCD Unit has been replaced.
• The lens has been replaced.
3. Touch “CD-Mag.”
4. Place a scale on the Original Glass so that it runs parallel with the Original Width Scale
and its leading edge is aligned with the Original Length Scale.

If the specified width on the copy is less than 199 mm, increase the setting.
If the specified width on the copy exceeds 201 mm, decrease the setting.

D-84
00.12.25
(15) FD-Mag.
Requirement
300 mm The 300-mm width of the scale on the sample copy

produced should fall within the following range.
4004D517AB

300 ± 1.5 mm FD-Mag. 0.990 to 1.010

• The Scanner Assy has been replaced.
• The Scanner Motor has been replaced.
• The Scanner Drive Cables have been replaced.
3. Touch “FD-Mag.”
4. Place a scale on the Original Glass so that it runs parallel with the Original Length
Scale and its leading edge is aligned with the Original Width Scale.

If the specified width on the copy is less than 298.5 mm, increase the setting.
If the specified width on the copy exceeds 301.5 mm, decrease the setting.

D-85
00.12.25
(16) Org. Detect Sensor

• The Original Size Detecting Sensor has been replaced.
• The optional Original Size Detecting Sensors have been added.
• The copier fails to detect the size of the original correctly.
1. Place a blank sheet of A3 paper on the Original Glass and lower the Original Cover.
3. Touch these keys in this order: “Machine Adjust” → “Org. Detect Sensor.”
If the adjustment has been successfully made, it completes the adjustment procedure.
If the adjustment has turned out to be unsuccessful, check the optional Original Size
Detecting Sensors for correct installation and change the defective sensor or harness.
D-86
00.12.25
(17) Gradation Adjust

• Color reproduction performance becomes poor.
2. Touch “Gradation Adjust.”
4. Place the test pattern produced on the Original Glass.
5. Place ten blank sheets of A3 paper on the test pattern and then lower the Original
Cover.
6. Press the Start key (to let the copier start scanning the original).
✽ When the copier completes scanning the data on the original, the “Tech. Rep. Mode” ini-
tial screen reappears.
7. Repeat steps from 2 to 6 twice (a total of three cycles).

8. Touch “Gradation Adjust” and check the Conv. Value on the screen.
Results:
If Max. falls within 0 ± 100 and Highlight within 0 ± 60, then it completes the adjustment
procedure.
If neither Max. nor Highlight falls outside the specified range, perform steps from 2 to 6.
If the specifications are not met after another cycle of steps 2 to 6, make a copy and check
the image.
9. For any image quality problem, take action by referring to TROUBLESHOOTING.
D-87
00.12.25
(18) PRT Max Density

• An image quality problem is not corrected even after Gradation Adjust has been run.
2. Touch these keys in this order: “Image Adjust” → “PRT Max Density.”
3. Select the color to be adjusted.
6. When the adjustment has been made, touch “MENU” to go back to the “Image Adjust”
menu screen.
7. Touch “Stabilizer.”
8. Select “Stabilizer Mode.”
9. Press the Start key to validate the adjustment value.
(19) PRT Highlight

• An image quality problem is not corrected even after Gradation Adjust has been run.
2. Touch these keys in this order: “Image Adjust” → “PRT Highlight.”
menu screen.
D-88
00.12.25
(20) Background Voltage Margin

• Foggy background occurs.
2. Touch these keys in this order: “Image Adjust” → “Background Voltage Margin.”
menu screen.
D-89
00.12.25
4. OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
4-1. Adjustment of the Position of the Scanner and 2nd/3rd
Mirrors Carriage
Requirement
• With the Scanner Assy fixed to the Scanner Drive Cables, there should be no gap
between the Scanner/Mirrors Carriage Positioning Jig and the Scanner and also
between the Scanner/Mirrors Carriage Positioning Jig and the 2nd/3rd Mirror Carriage.

• The Scanner Drive Cable has been replaced.
• The Scanner Fixing Bracket has been removed from the Scanner Drive Cable.
• The Scanner Drive Cable comes unwound.
1. Remove the IR Rear Upper Cover, IR Front

Cover, IR Right Cover, and Original Glass.
2. Move the Scanner Assy so that the Scanner
Positioning Screw is aligned with the hole in the
upper frame.
3. Insert a screwdriver into the hole in the upper
frame and loosen the Scanner Positioning Screw.
4004D218AA
NOTE
• Do not remove the Scanner Positioning Screw.
Scanner
positioning Screws 4004D203AA
4. Install the Scanner Positioning Jigs between the

Scanner Assy and the 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage
Assy.
4004D219AA
D-90
00.12.25
NOTE
• When installing the Scanner Positioning Jigs, be
sure to fit the tabs on the jigs into the holes at the
front and rear ends of the frame.
4004D220AC
5. Press the Scanner Assy and 2nd/3rd Mirrors Car-

riage Assy tightly up against the Scanner Posi-
tioning Jigs.
4004D522AA
6. Tighten the two Scanner Positioning Screws.
4004D224AA
(1) Adjustment of the 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage Assy for Parallel Alignment

2. Loosen one screw that secures the adjusting
plate.
4002D235AB
3. Turn the adjusting screw as necessary.

a b
Adjusting Screw 4002D236AA
D-91
00.12.25
If there is a gap between the 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage Assy and the Scanner Positioning
Jig at the front, turn the adjusting screw clockwise.
If there is a gap between the 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage Assy and the Scanner Positioning
Jig in the rear, turn the adjusting screw counterclockwise.
4. Lightly press the 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage Assy up against the Scanner Positioning Jigs
and make sure there is no gap.
5. Tighten one screw to secure the adjusting plate in position.
D-92
00.12.25
5. MISCELLANEOUS
5-1. INSTALLATION OF THE MECHANICAL COUNTER (OPTION)
2. Open the Toner Supply Door.
3. Remove the Panel Cover.
5. Remove the Front Right Cover.
6. Cut out the knockout in the Front Right Cover.
C4004U267AA
7. Remove two screws and the Right Front Cover.
C4004U268AA
8. Secure the mechanical counter with one screw.
C4004U269AA
9. Connect one connector.
C4004U270AA
D-93
00.12.25
5-2. MOUNTING OF THE ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTING SENSORS

(OPTION)
NOTE
• When an Original Size Detecting Sensor has been added, select “SET” in “Org. Detect
Option Sensor” of “System Input” available from the “Tech. Rep. Mode” and run “Org.
Detect Sensor” of “Machine Adjust.”
☞ D-86

3. Install the harness.
4. Mount the Original Size Detecting Sensor (option).
FD1 FD3
Optional for the U.S.A. Optional for the Europe, U.S.A., Taiwan.
CD2
Optional for the G
Europe, U.S.A., Taiwan. 4004D523CA
How the Harness should be Placed
4004D524CA
D-94
00.12.25
5-3. FLASH MEMORY

Software has conventionally been upgraded by replacing ROM on each board.
This copier employs flash memory for the system control IC mounted on the MSC Board.
Its contents are reprogrammed easily by performing the following steps using the IC card
(memory card), into which data has been previously downloaded.
NOTE
• NEVER remove or insert the memory card with the copier power turned ON.
1. With the Power Switch in the OFF position, unplug the power cord from the power out-
let.
2. Remove the Ozone Filter.
5. Remove the Rear Left Cover.
6. Insert the memory card into the slot.
4004D191AA
7. Plug the power cord into the power outlet and turn ON the Power Switch.
✽ Four different types of F/W appear on the Touch Panel.
8. Select the particular type of F/W to be updated.
4004D519AB

✽ This starts the data rewriting sequence. (At this time, the Start key starts blinking red.)
Time Required for Rewriting

Four types at once: Approx. 13 min.
Individual: MSC (approx. 1 min. 30 sec.), PRT (approx. 6 min.), IR (approx. 7 min.),
PIC (approx. 6 min.)
10. Check that the Touch Panel shows the message indicating that the data has been
rewritten correctly (“Downloading Completed”). Check also the Check Sum value
(“Check Sum XXXX”) shown on the Touch Panel. (The Start key blinks green.)
D-95
00.12.25
11. Unplug the power cord from the power outlet.
NOTE
• Do not turn OFF the Power Switch.
12. Remove the memory card from the slot and turn OFF the Power Switch.
13. Check that the “ROM Version” of “Tech. Rep. Mode” matches the version marked on
the memory card.
✽ Action When Data Transfer Fails

If “NG” appears on the Touch Panel, indicating that rewriting has been unsuccessful (in
which case the Start key lights up red), take the following steps.
14. Perform the data rewriting procedure again.

15. If the procedure is abnormally terminated, change the memory card for a new one and
try another rewriting sequence.
16. If the procedure is still abnormally terminated, change the board that has caused “NG”
and carry out data rewriting procedure.
D-96
00.12.25
5-4. REMOUNTING RAM IC (IC5)
NOTE
• If the MSC Board has replaced, be sure to remount RAM IC from the old to new board.
• If the MSC Board has been replaced and RAM IC is not to be remounted, be sure to
record all data of User’s Choice and Tech. Rep. Choice functions and make entries again
of these numeric values. Note that the RAM IC contains no data in this case.
1. Remove the MSC Board.

2. Remove RAM IC from the new MSC Board.
3. Remove RAM IC from the old MSC Board and remount it onto the new MSC Board.
4002D225AA
A
NOTE
• Note the alignment notch (A) on RAM IC when
mounting it.
4002D255AB
D-97
FrameMaker Ver5.5E(PC) CF1501/CF2001 SWITCHES ON PWBs/TECH. REP. SETTINGS
00.11.30
SWITCHES ON PWBs,
TECH. REP. SETTINGS
17196
00.11.30
CONTENTS
1. CONTROL PANEL KEYS AND TOUCH PANEL ............................................. S-1
1-1. Control Panel Keys .................................................................................. S-1
1-2. Explanation of the Touch Panel ............................................................... S-3
(1) Basic Screen ................................................................................... S-3
(2) Warning Screens ............................................................................. S-4
2. FUNCTION OF SWITCHES AND OTHER PARTS ON PWBs ........................ S-6
2-1. PWB Location .......................................................................................... S-6
2-2. PWB-H (MSC Board) ............................................................................... S-6
2-3. PWB-T (Tech. Rep. Setting Switches Board) .......................................... S-7
(1) Clearing Procedures ........................................................................ S-7
(2) Data/Conditions Cleared by Reset Switches/Pins ........................... S-8
3. UTILITY MODE ................................................................................................ S-9
3-1. Utility Mode Selection Screen .................................................................. S-9
3-2. Utility Mode Function Tree ....................................................................... S-9
3-3. Settings in the Utility Mode ...................................................................... S-10
(1) User’s choice mode ......................................................................... S-10
(2) Administrator Mode ......................................................................... S-13
4. Tech. Rep. Mode ............................................................................................. S-17
4-1. Tech. Rep. Mode Menu Screen ............................................................... S-17
4-2. Tech. Rep. Mode Function Setting Procedure ......................................... S-17
4-3. Tech. Rep. Mode Menu Function Tree .................................................... S-18
4-4. Setting in the Tech. Rep. Mode ............................................................... S-20
(1) Machine Adjust ................................................................................ S-20
(2) Image Adjust .................................................................................... S-22
(3) System Input .................................................................................... S-23
(4) Counter ............................................................................................ S-25
(5) State Confirm ................................................................................... S-28
(6) ADF Check ...................................................................................... S-30
(7) ROM Version ................................................................................... S-30
(8) RD Mode ......................................................................................... S-31
(9) Administrator # Input ....................................................................... S-33
(10) List Output ....................................................................................... S-33
(11) Test Print ......................................................................................... S-35
(12) Gradation Adjust .............................................................................. S-35
5. TOUCH PANEL CORRECTION MODE .......................................................... S-36
5-1. Touch Panel Correction Mode Screen ..................................................... S-36
5-2. Touch Panel Correction Mode Setting Procedures ................................. S-36
6. SECURITY MODE ........................................................................................... S-37
6-1. Security Mode Screen ............................................................................. S-37
6-2. Security Mode Setting Procedures .......................................................... S-37
6-3. Settings in the Security Mode .................................................................. S-38
7. DATE/TIME INPUT MODE .............................................................................. S-39
7-1. Date/Time Input mode Screen ................................................................. S-39
7-2. Date/Time Input Mode Setting Procedure ............................................... S-39
i
00.11.30
1. CONTROL PANEL KEYS AND TOUCH PANEL

1-1. Control Panel Keys
1 En e rg y Save r 2 3 4
Co py
Panel Reset
I n t e rr u p t
14
Acce ss
Sca n
5
Stop
6
13
C
3
9
2
7
Star t
1
F u ll C o lo r
Au t o C o lo r
Black
9
Job Recall
Contrast
Utility
4004P008AA
12 11 10
S-1
00.11.30
1. Access Mode Key 9. Touch Panel

• Press to enter the access number when • Shows various screens and message.
Copy Track of the Administrator mode 10. Job Recall Key
available. Press the access Key. • Press to display the Job Recall screen.
2. Energy Saver Key 11. Utility Key
• Press to set machine into the Energy • Press to show the Utility Mode menu.
saver mode. 12. Display Contrast Control Knob
3. Interrupt Key • Use to adjust the brightness of the Touch
• Press to select the Interrupt mode. Panel.
4. Panel Reset Key 13. 10-Key Pad
• Press to set the machine into the initial • The number of copies to be made.
mode, clearing all settings made on the • The various numeric values.
control panel. 14. Copy Key/Scan Key
5. Clear Key • Press to select the Scanner mode and the
• Clear the various numeric values. Copy mode.
6. Stop Key ✽ The Scan mode is enabled when a printer
• Stop a scanning cycle. controller is mounted on the copier.
7. Start Key
• Start a print cycle.
8. Auto Color/Full Color/Black Keys
• Auto Color Key: Press to make copies
according to the type of the original being
used.
• Full Color Key: Press to make full color
copies.
• Black Key: Press to make black-and-
white copies.
S-2
00.11.30
1-2. Explanation of the Touch Panel

(1) Basic Screen
The Basic screen is the initial screen that appears when the copier is turned ON.
4 4004P022CB
1. Supplementary Function Keys

• Select the Auxiliary, Finishing, Orig. Copy, or Basics function.
2. Message Display
• Shows the current copier status, operating instructions and precautions, and other data
including the number of copies selected.
3. Basic Display
• Select the Text & Photo, Zoom, or Paper function.
4. Set Function Display

• Shows graphic representations of the copying functions currently set for use.
S-3
00.11.30
(2) Warning Screens

The Warning screen may be a malfunction display, error display, warning display, or a cau-
tion display.
<Malfunction Display> <Error Display>

Given when a malfunction occurs. Given when an error occurs.
E.g.: Malfunctions that can be identified E.g.: Paper misfeed, door open, etc.
with a specific code.
4004P023CB 4004P024CA
<Warning Display> <Caution Display>

Given when only a defective copy will be Given when, though further copier opera-
produced because of erroneous or illegal tion will be possible, it could eventually
panel settings. result in a malfunction.
E.g.: Unmatched paper size in Auto Paper. E.g.: Toner near empty, etc.
4004P025CB 4004P026CB
S-4
00.11.30
<Engine / IR Warning>
When the engine or IR develops a faulty condition, a mark appears at the lower left
corner of the Basic screen. Touch this mark, and the display shows the details of the fault.
NOTE
• For details, see TROUBLE SHOOTING.
4004P027CB 4004P028CA
S-5
00.11.30
2. FUNCTION OF SWITCHES AND OTHER PARTS ON

PWBs
2-1. PWB Location
PWB-H PWB-T
4004S002AA
2-2. PWB-H (MSC Board)
PWB-H
1 2
PJ6
INI
TP3 TP2 TP1
COM TOTAL MEMORY
4004S001AB
Symbol Name Description

PJ2 Initialize Switch Resets a misfeed, malfunction, and erratic display.
TP1 Memory Clear Test Point Clears choice-related data.
NOTE
• It does not, however, clear data of Electronic
Counters, Administrator, RD mode, Scanner Addr.
Input, and IR backup data.
TP3 COM Test Point Ground used for memory clear.
S-6
00.11.30
2-3. PWB-T (Tech. Rep. Setting Switches Board)
PWB-T
SW1
PJ1
1
2
4004S003AB
Symbol Name Description

SW1 Trouble Reset Switch Resets the malfunction display.
(1) Clearing Procedures

Initialize
1. Turn ON the Power Switch.
2. With the circuit across pins of PJ2 closed, turn OFF then ON the Power Switch.
3. Open the circuit in about 5 seconds.
4. Check that the message “Initialize Completed” is displayed on the Touch Panel and
then touch the “Enter” key.
Memory Clear
1. Turn ON the Power Switch.
2. With the circuit across TP1 and TP3 closed, turn OFF then ON the Power Switch.
3. Open the circuit in about 5 seconds.
4. Check that the message “Memory Clear Completed” is displayed on the Touch Panel
and then touch the “Enter” key.
NOTES
• If the copier exhibits an erratic display or operation, reset and clear in the following order:
Initialize → Memory Clear.
• If Memory Clear has been performed, make settings of various functions once again.
S-7
00.11.30
(2) Data/Conditions Cleared by Reset Switches/Pins
Clearing Method Trouble Reset

Front Door Initialize Memory Clear
Switch
Open/Close PJ6 TP1
Data Cleared SW1
Misfeed display ❍ – ❍ –
Fusing/
Optical
Malfunction Scanner – ❍ ❍ –
display ROM
faults
Others ❍ ❍ ❍ –
Erratic operation/display – ❍ ❍ ❍
Job/Image – – – ❍
User’s Choice – – – ❍
Tech. Rep. Mode – – – ❍
Security Mode – – – ❍
Touch Panel Correction
– – – ❍
Mode
❍: Cleared –: Not cleared
S-8
00.11.30
3. UTILITY MODE
• Utility Mode is used to make various settings according to the user’s need.
3-1. Utility Mode Selection Screen

• Press the Utility key on the control panel
4004P044CB
3-2. Utility Mode Function Tree
Default Settings
Meter Count
Job Memory Input
Administrator Mode 1/2

Utility User’s Choice

Administrator Mode
✽ Scanner Addr. Input
✽ Displayed when “Mode 2, 3 or 4” is selected for “Peripheral Mode” available from the
Service mode.
S-9
00.11.30
3-3. Settings in the Utility Mode
Touch Panel
Setting
Display
Default Settings Select the copying function settings established when the Power
Switch is turned ON or the Panel Reset key is pressed.
NOTE
• To designate the “Current Settings,” first make the necessary set-
tings on the control panel, then touch “Current Settings.”
Current Settings Factory Settings
Meter Count Displays the counts of various counters. Pressing the Start key will let
the copier produce a printed page of the counts of various counters.
Job Memory Input Permits programming of various functions, including copying jobs.
User’s Choice User’s Choice is used to make various settings according to the
user’s need.
Administrator The entry of the “Administrator #” set using the Tech. Rep. mode per-
Mode mits the settings of the following functions.
Scanner Addr. Program the one-touch address for the Scanner mode.
Input
(1) User’s choice mode

• User’s Choice is used to make various settings according to the user’s need.
1. User’s Choice Function Setting Procedure

<Procedure>
2. Touch the “User’s Choice” key.
3. Select the appropriate screen from the menu.
4. Select the appropriate function.
5. After the settings are complete, touch the “OK” key to validate the settings.
<Exiting the Mode>

• Press the “OK” key.
S-10
00.11.30
2. User’s Choice Mode Function Tree
Language selected
2in1 copy zoom
Intelligent sorting
User’s Choice 1/2
ACS Determination level Adjust
Confirmation Beep
Mail Bin Assignment
User’s Choice
Auto Panel Reset

Energy Save Mode
User’s Choice 2/2
Sleep Mode
1st Drawer Paper Select
3. Settings in the User’s Choice Mode
Touch Panel
Setting (The default is Highlighted ).
Display
Language Select the language of the Touch Panel messages.
Metric Areas Inch Areas
ENGLISH GERMAN FRENCH ENGLISH FRENCH SPANISH
DUTCH ITALIAN SPANISH JAPANESE
PORTUGUESE DANISH NORWEGIAN
SWEDISH FINISH JAPANESE
2in1 copy zoom Select whether or not to set the default zoom ratio, ×0.647 for the inch
areas and ×0.707 for the metric areas, when 2in1 is selected.
ON OFF
Intelligent Sort Select whether to enable or disable the function that automatically
switches between Sort and Non-Sort according to the number of orig-
inals and the number of copy sets to be made.
Applicable when the system is equipped with a finishing option and
using an ADF.
Auto Select Non-Auto
ACS Set the mode evaluation level for the Auto Color mode.
Determination std
level Adjust
Black 1 2 3 4 5 Full Color
Confirmation Beep Select whether to enable or disable the beep that sounds each time a
key on the control panel is pressed or a function on the Touch Panel
touched.
ON OFF
S-11
00.11.30
Touch Panel
Display
Mail Bin Select whether or not to designate specific bin or bins for the output
Assignment via the PC when a Mailbin Finisher is mounted.
2-10 Bin OFF
NOTE
• When a specific bin is designated, that bin and subsequent bins are
assigned for the output via the PC.
• Example: If the 7th Bin is designated
The 7th to 10th Bins will be assigned for the output via the PC and
the 1st to 6th Bins usable only for copy bins.
Auto Panel Reset Select the time it takes the Auto Panel Reset function, which resets
the panel settings when the set period of time elapses after a copy
cycle has been completed or the last key operated, to be activated.
Use the 10-Key Pad to set the time.
OFF 1 to 9 ( 5 min. )
Energy Save Select the time it takes the copier to enter the Energy Saver mode
Mode after a copy cycle has been completed or the last key operated.
Use the 10-Key Pad to set the time.
1 to 240 ( 15 min. )
Sleep Mode Select the time it takes the Sleep function, which shuts down the
copier when the set period of time elapses after a copy cycle has
been completed or the last key operated, to be activated.
NOTE
• The option of “OFF” becomes available on the screen if “Yes” is
selected for “Disable Sleep” of the “Administrator Mode” function.
15 to 240 ( 15min. ) OFF
1st Drawer Paper Select the paper size setting method for the 1st Drawer.
Select
Auto Detect Input Size
S-12
00.11.30
(2) Administrator Mode

• The entry on the “Administrator #” set using the Tech. Rep. mode permits the settings of
the following functions.
1. Administrator Mode Function Setting Procedure

<Procedure>
2. Touch the “Administrator Mode” key.
3. Enter the Administrator number from the 10-Key pad.
4. Select the appropriate function.
5. After the settings are complete, touch the “Enter” key to validate the settings.
<Exiting the Mode>

• Press the “OK” key.
2. Administrator Mode Function Tree
Access # Input
Counter Check
Copy Track Counter Reset
Permission Level
Account Copy Limit set
Gradation Adjust
Administrator
Mode 1/2
Disable Sleep Mode
User Send
Administrator
Mode
Erase Thick Paper and OHP Film

Image Density
Color Shift Correction (C)
Expt. User’s
Administrator Color Shift Correction (M)
Mode 1/2
Mode 2/2 Color Shift Correction (Y)
Color Shift Correction (Bk)
Stabilizer
Expt. User’s
Mode
PRT Area (Top Margin)

Expt. User’s PRT Area (Left Margin)
Mode 2/2 PRT Area (Dup. Left Margin)
Thin Orig.
✽ Available on the screen when the settings are made for “Mainte. Center” when a Data
Terminal is mounted.
S-13
00.11.30
3. Settings in the Administrator Mode
Touch Panel
Display
Administrator The entry on the “Administrator #” set using the Tech. Rep. mode per-
Mode mits the settings of the following functions.
Administrator Displays the various setting screens including Copy Track and Grada-
Mode 1/2 tion Adjust.
Copy Track Select the number of accounts to be controlled.
Functions
ON OFF
Access # Input From the 10-Key Pad, enter the access number (ID), which can range
0001 to 9999.
Use ▼ or ▲ key to select the account number, for
Account #
which an access number is to be programmed.
Access # Enter a 4-digit access number from the 10-Key Pad.
Counter Check Check the counter value for the account.

<Procedure>
1. Place the required number of sheets of A4L or Letter L paper on
the 1st Drawer.
2. Press the Start key to let the copier print the counter list.
Counter Reset Reset the counter value for the account.
<Procedure>
1. Using the ▼ or ▲ key, select the account number, for which the
counter is to be reset. Touch “All Accts” to reset the counters of all
accounts.
2. Touch the “Cancel” key.
3. Touch the “YES” key.
4. Touch “OK” to reset the counter.
Permission Level Select whether to enable (“Permit”) or disable (“Prohibit”) copying
according to the color or black mode for each account.
<Procedure>
1. Using the ▼ or ▲ key, select the account number for which Per-
mission Level is to be set.
2. Select either Permit or Prohibit copying according to the color or
black mode.
Account Copy Set the maximum number of copies to be made at one time for each
Limit set account and copying mode using the 10-Key Pad.
Common Copy limit is not set for each copying mode.
Individual Copy limit is set for each copying mode.
<Procedure>
1. Using the ▼ or ▲ key, select the account number for which Copy
Limit is to be set.
2. Select either Common or Individual.
3. Select whether to turn ON or OFF Copy Limit and then enter the
maximum number of copies to be made from the 10-Key Pad.
S-14
00.11.30
Touch Panel
Display
Gradation Adjust When an image failure occurs, run this function to automatically cor-
rect the gamma curve.
✽ For details, see DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT.
Disable Sleep Select whether to enable or disable the setting of the “Sleep” function
Mode available from User’s Choice.
No Not displayed.
Yes Displayed.
Data Send Transmits various data to the Center when a Data Terminal is
mounted.
Administrator Displays the various setting screens for Erase and Expert User’s
Mode 2/2 Mode.
Erase Select the leading edge erase.
5 mm 7 mm
Expert. User’s Allows the image-related and paper passage-related functions to be

Mode set.
Expert. User’s Displays the image-related function adjustment screens.
Mode 1/2
Thick Paper and Correct the image density for copying on thick paper and OHP trans-
OHP Film Image parencies for each color.
Density Lighter Darker
Color Shift Correct (fine-adjust) color shift of the cyan image in each of X, Y, and
Correction (C) θ directions.
Color Shift Correct (fine-adjust) color shift of the magenta image in each of X, Y,
Correction (M) and θ directions.
Color Shift Correct (fine-adjust) color shift of the yellow image in each of X, Y,
Correction (Y) and θ directions.
Color Shift Correct (fine-adjust) color shift of the black image in the θ direction.
Correction (Bk) ✽ For details, see DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT.
Stabilizer If an image failure is not rectified even with Gradation Adjust, select
“Reset and Stabilizer Mode.”
Reset and Stabilizer Mode Stabilizer Mode

✽ If “Reset and Stabilizer Mode” is run, run “Gradation Adjust” after
the sequence has been completed.
S-15
00.11.30
Touch Panel
Display
Expert. User’s Displays the paper passage-related function adjustment screens.
Mode 2/2
PRT Area Adjust the image position for each paper source by varying the print
(Top Margin) start position of the printer in the sub scanning direction.
Setting -2 mm ............................ 0 ........................... +2 mm
PRT Area Adjust the image position for each paper source by varying the print
(Left Margin) start position of the printer in the main scanning direction.
Setting -3 mm ............................ 0 ........................... +3 mm
PRT Area Adjust the image position for each paper source in the 2-Sided Mode
(Dup. Left Margin) by varying the print start of the printer in the main scanning direction.
Setting -3 mm ............................ 0 ........................... +3 mm
Thin Orig. Select whether or not to make the “Thin Orig.” option available in the
Orig. Copy type selection screen.
ON OFF
S-16
00.11.30
4. Tech. Rep. Mode

• This mode is used by the Tech. Rep. to check, set, adjust, and/or program various ser-
vice functions.
4-1. Tech. Rep. Mode Menu Screen
4004P030CB
4-2. Tech. Rep. Mode Function Setting Procedure

<Procedure>
2. Press the Meter Count key.
Stop → 0 → 0 → Stop → 0 → 1
4. Select the desired Service Mode function.
<Exiting the Mode>

• Press the “Fine. Time” key.
S-17
00.11.30
4-3. Tech. Rep. Mode Menu Function Tree
Fuser Nip
Fuser Temp.
Fuser Speed
Orig. Detect Sensor
Machine Adjust PRT Area
IR Area
Loop Adjust
Color Shift Correction
LPH Rank
Staple/Hole-Punch
PRT Max Density

PRT Highlight
Background Voltage
Image Adjust ATDC Level Setting
AE Adjust
Stabilizer
ATDC Toner Supply
Marketing Area
Orig. Detect Option Sensor
Serial # Input
Tel. # Input
Tech. Rep. Mode System Input
FLS Paper
Book Erase (Center)
Peripheral Mode
Unit Change
Life
Jam
Counter Trouble
Warning
Maintenance
I/O Check
Table #
Level History 1
Level History 2
Temp. & Humidity
State Confirm
CCD Check
Paper Passage
Option Memory
Color Shift
IU Lot No.
~
S-18
00.11.30
Tech. Rep. Choice

ADF Check I/O Check
Paper Passage
ROM Version
RD Mode
Administrator #
Service Mode
Input
Image Processing
List Output
Counter
Gradation Pattern
Halftone
Lattice Pattern
Test Print Solid Pattern
Color Sample
IR Test Pattern
8 Color Solid Pattern
Gradation Adjust
S-19
00.11.30
4-4. Setting in the Tech. Rep. Mode

(1) Machine Adjust
• These functions are used to make the various mechanical adjustments of the copier.
NOTE
• For details, see DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT or Option service manual.
Touch Panel
Setting
Display
Fuser Nip Produces a sample copy for the check of the Fusing Roller nip width.
Fuser Temp. Set the temperature for fusing temperature control according to the
operating environment and the type of paper used.
Fuser Speed Adjust the fusing speed.
Org. Detect Automatically adjusts the threshold level of the Original Size Detect-
Sensor ing Sensor.
PRT Area Displays the print area adjustment screen.
Top Margin Paper Send Position
Vary the paper sending timing to adjust the image position in the sub-
scanning direction.
2nd Transfer Timing
Vary the second transfer timing to adjust the image transfer timing in
the sub-scanning direction.
Left Margin Adjust the image position for each paper source by varying the print
start position of the printer in the main scanning direction.
Dup. Left Margin Adjust the image position for each paper source in the 2-Sided Mode
by varying the print start of the printer in the main scanning direction.
IR Area Left Image
Adjust the image position by varying the image reading position of the
IR in the main scanning direction.
Top Image
Adjust the image position by varying the image reading position of the
IR in the sub scanning direction.
CD-Mag.
Adjust the zoom ratio in the crosswise direction by varying the num-
ber of pixels to be read by the CCD.
FD-Mag.
Adjust the zoom ratio in the lengthwise direction by varying the scan
speed of the Scanner.
Paper Loop Set the length of the loop to be formed in paper before the Synchro-
nizing Rollers.
S-20
00.11.30
Touch Panel
Setting
Display
Color Shift Color Shift Correction (C)
Correction Correct (fine-adjust) color shift of the cyan image in each of X, Y, and
θ directions.
Color Shift Correction (M)
Correct (fine-adjust) color shift of the magenta image in each of X, Y,
and θ directions.
Color Shift Correction (Y)
Correct (fine-adjust) color shift of the yellow image in each of X, Y,
and θ directions.
Color Shift Correction (Bk)
Correct (fine-adjust) color shift of the black image in the θ direction.
LPH Rank This mode is for factory adjustment only and should NOT be used.
It is confirmed that the numerical value is “0”.
Staple/Hole-Punch The staple position or the punch hole position is confirmed.
✽ The content changes by the installed exit option.
S-21
00.11.30
(2) Image Adjust

• These functions are used to make image adjustments.
NOTE
• For details, see TROUBLE SHOOTING.
Touch Panel
Display
PRT Max Density Adjust the image density by varying the maximum amount of toner
sticking to paper.
Setting -10 ................................. 0 ................................ +10
Description Lighter Darker
PRT Highlight Adjust the image density of the highlighted area.

Setting -10 ................................. 0 ................................ +10
Background Adjust the fog level on the background.

Voltage Margin
Setting -5 ................................... 0 .................................. +5
Foggier Less
Description
Foggy
ATDC Level Select the ATDC control level with the corresponding T/C ratio.
Setting
Setting -2 -1 0 +1 +2
AE Adjust Adjust the AE Reference.

Setting 0 1 2 3 4
Description Foggy Less Foggier
Stabilizer If an image failure is not rectified even with Gradation Adjust, select
“Reset and Stabilizer Mode.”
Reset And Stabilizer Mode Stabilizer Mode
✽ If “Reset and Stabilizer Mode” is run, run “Gradation Adjust” after
the sequence has been completed.
ATDC Toner If T/C is lower than the specifications:
Supply Only toner replenishing sequence is run.
If T/C is higher than the specifications:
Only developer agitation sequence is run (with no toner supplied).
NOTE
• If the image density has been adjusted in “PRT Max Density,” “PRT Highlight,” or “Back-
ground Voltage Margin,” select “Stabilizer Mode” in “Stabilizer” to run Stabilizer after the
adjustment has been made. Or, turn OFF and ON the Power Switch.
S-22
00.11.30
(3) System Input

• The function allows the Tech. Rep. to define the marketing area, and make settings.
Touch Panel
Display
Marketing Area Set the marketing area.
MSJ MC ME
Org. Detect Option Select “ON” when the optional Original Size Detecting Sensor is
Sensor mounted.
Set Unset
✽ After “Set” has been selected, run “Orig. Detect Option Sensor.”
Serial # Input Enter the serial number of each system component including options
from the 10-Key Pad.
NOTE
• This procedure must be performed to allow the adjustment data on
the IR side to be transmitted to the copier.
• When the “END” key is touched after the IR serial number has been
input, data is transmitted to the copier.
Tel. # Input Enter the telephone number that will appear on the Touch Panel
when a malfunction occurs in the copier.
<Procedure>
1. Enter the phone number from the 10-Key Pad. Use the Interrupt
key to enter a hyphen “-.”
2. Touch “END” to validate the phone number setting.
FLS Paper Set the size for FLS.
F: 330.2 mm F: 330 mm F: 330.2 mm F: 330 mm
C: 203.2 mm C: 210 mm C: 215.9 mm C: 220 mm
Book Erase Adjust the center erase width in Book copying.

(Center)
Setting +2 ................................. 15 ................................ +30
Description Smaller Greater
Peripheral Mode Select the type of the external I/F operation when a printer controller
is mounted.
Mode 1 External I/F operation mode 1
S-23
00.11.30
Touch Panel
Display
Unit Change Select who is to replace a unit when its replacement time arrives,
either “User” or “Service.”
Set the type of “Warning” message displayed on the Touch Panel
when the replacement time arrives depending on the setting.
Unit To be replaced by
Toner User Service
Waste Toner Bottle User Service
Fusing Web Unit User Service
Oil Coating Unit User Service
Fusing Unit User Service
Transfer Belt Unit User Service
Imaging Unit User Service
Example: Toner
To be replaced by “User”:
A message that prompts the user to change the Toner Bottle appears.
To be replaced by “Service”:
A message that tells the user to call the Tech. Rep. appears.
S-24
00.11.30
(4) Counter
• Shows the number of copies made on each paper size or type.
<Clearing a Count>
1. Open the counter menu screen.
2. Select the counter to be cleared.
3. Press the Clear key.
Press the Stop key to undo the clearing operation, restoring the original count.
4. Touch “END”.
Touch Panel
Setting
Display
Life Counts the frequency of use of each of the different parts of the
copier.
Display Description
✽ Fusing Unit No. of times a sheet of paper is fed through
✽ Fusing Web Unit No. of times a sheet of paper is fed through
✽ Oil Coating Unit No. of times a sheet of paper is fed through
1st. No. of sheets of paper fed from the 1st Drawer
2nd. No. of sheets of paper fed from the 2nd Drawer
3rd. No. of sheets of paper fed from the 3rd Drawer
4th. No. of sheets of paper fed from the 4th Drawer
Display Description
ADF Feed No. of sheets of paper fed through the ADF take-up
section
ADF Rev. No. of sheets of paper fed through the turnover unit of
the ADF
Sorter/Finisher No. of sheets of paper fed out of the Sorter
Staple No. of stapling sequences performed
Punch No. of holes made
LCC Parts1 No. of sheets of paper fed from the LCC
LCC Parts2 No. of sheets of paper fed from the LCC
Display Description
✽ Cyan IU Period of time over which the Cyan Developing Unit
has been used.
✽ Magenta IU Period of time over which the Magenta Developing
Unit has been used.
✽ Yellow IU Period of time over which the Yellow Developing Unit
has been used.
✽ Black IU Period of time over which the Black Developing Unit
has been used.
Transfer Belt Period of time over which the Transfer Belt Unit has
Unit been used.
LPH(C) Period of time over which the Cyan LPH has been
used.
LPH(M) Period of time over which the Magenta LPH has been
used.
✽ : It is not possible to clear the Life counter. It is automatically reset

when a new unit has been installed.
For “Fusing Web Unit,” however, it is possible to reset the counter
and enter a count from the 10-Key Pad.
S-25
00.11.30
Touch Panel
Setting
Display
Life
Display Description
LPH (Y) Period of time over which the Yellow LPH has been
used.
LPH (Bk) Period of time over which the Black LPH has been
used.
Jam Counts the number of misfeeds that have occurred at different loca-
tions in the copier.
Display Display
1st. Fusing Unit
2nd. Exit
3rd. LCC Feed
4th. LCC Movement
Manual Duplex Transport
Vertical Transport Duplex
Secondary Transfer Horizontal Transport
Display
Sorter/Finisher Trans.
Sorter/Finisher Exit
Staple
ADF
Trouble Counts the number of malfunctions that have occurred at different

parts of the copier.
Display Description
C0000/1 Trans. Motor
C0010/1 Cyan PC Motor
C0012/3 Magenta PC Motor
C0014/5 Yellow PC Motor
C0016/7 Black PC Motor
C0040 Suction Fan
C0046 Fuser Cooling Fan
C004C Exhaust Fan
Display Description
C004E Cooling Fan
C0060/1 Fuser Motor
C0094 2nd Transfer Separation
C0096 Transfer Belt Separation
C0098 Fuser Separation
C0200 Cyan PC Charge
C0202 Magenta PC Charge
C0204 Yellow PC Charge
S-26
00.11.30
Touch Panel
Setting
Display
Trouble
Display Description
C0206 Black PC Charge
C0400 Exposure Lamp off
C0410 Exposure Lamp On
C0500 Fuser (Upper)
C0501 Fuser (Lower)
C0510 Abnormal Low Temp. (Upper)
C0511 Abnormal Low Temp. (Lower)
C0520 Abnormal High Temp. (Upper)
Display Description
C0521 Abnormal High Temp. (Lower)
C0650 Home Sensor
C0660 Over Run
C099X LCC
C0B0X Finisher/Sorter Trans.
C0B2X Staple Unit. (CD direction)
C0B3X Finisher Alignment
C0B48X Finisher Staple Transport (Exit)
Display Description
C0B4A Finisher Staple Transport (Receipt)
C0B5 Staple Unit (Rotation)
C0B7 Punch
C0B8 Shift
C0BAXX Finisher Elevator Tray
C0F30/1/A Cyan ATDC Sensor
C0F32/3/B Magenta ATDC Sensor
C0F34/5/C Yellow ATDC Sensor
Display Description
C0F36/7/D Black ATDC Sensor
C13C8 New Transfer Belt Unit
C13CA New Fusing Unit
C13CB New Fusing Web Unit
C13CC New Oil Coating Unit
C13D1 EEPROM Access (C)
C13D2 EEPROM Access (M)
C13D3 EEPROM Access (Y)
Display Description
C13D4 EEPROM Access (Bk)
C3310 CCD Gain
C37X0 Scanner Cooling Fan
C3A00 PIC I/F
C3A01 PIC
S-27
00.11.30
Touch Panel
Setting
Display
Warning Displays the number of warnings issued for different parts.
Display Display
AIDC Sensor (Front) CCD Gain
AIDC Sensor (Back) Exp. Lamp Adjust
Cyan IU Color Shift Test Pattern
Magenta IU Color Shift Adjust
Yellow IU ATVC (C)
Black IU ATVC (M)
S/P ATVC (Y)
Display
ATVC (Bk)
ATVC (2nd)
Maintenance Set different count values for the Maintenance Counter.

When the preset count is reached, the maintenance call reminder
message appear on the Touch Panel.
<Procedure>
1. Touch “Maint. Set”.
2. Press the Clear key to clear the current value.
Press the Interrupt key to undo the clearing operation, restoring
the original value.
3. Enter the value from the 10-Key Pad.
4. Touch “END”.
(5) State Confirm

• These functions are used to confirm machine state.
Touch Panel
Setting
Display
I/O Check • The following functions are used to locate the faulty spot.
• Shows the states of the I/O ports when the copier is in the standby
state.
✽ For details, see TROUBLESHOOTING.
Table # Use this function to show the output values of the developing bias and
grid voltage.
Developing Bias Grid Voltage
Vb-C Vg-C
Vb-M Vg-M
Vb-Y Vg-Y
Vb-Bk Vg-Bk
S-28
00.11.30
Touch Panel
Setting
Display
Level History 1 Displays ATDC, AIDC, and fusing temperatures.
Display Description
ATDC-C ATDC Sensor, cyan ratio (%)
ATDC-M ATDC Sensor, magenta ratio (%)
ATDC-Y ATDC Sensor, yellow ratio (%)
ATDC-Bk ATDC Sensor, black ratio (%)
AIDC1 AIDC Sensor output value 1 (V)
AIDC2 AIDC Sensor output value 2 (V)
Temp-Upr. Upper Fusing Roller temperature (°C)
Temp-Lwr. Lower Fusing Roller temperature (°C)
Level History 2 Displays the AIDC adjustment values.

Display Description
AIDC Sensor Intensity adjustment value of AIDC background
Adjust Value 1 level (UN20)
AIDC Sensor Intensity adjustment value of AIDC background
Adjust Value 2 level (UN21)
Temp. & Humidity Use this function to show the temperature and humidity inside the
copier.
CCD Check Use this function to show the CCD data.
RO RE GO GE BO BE
CLAMP
D/A values of clamp R, G, and B
RO RE GO GE BO BE
GAIN
D/A values of gain R, G, and B
Lamp Adjust Value
Paper Passage A check is made for paper passage performance.

<Procedure>
1. Select the paper source.
2. Press the Start key to start the paper passage cycle.
3. Press the Stop key to stop the paper passage cycle.
Optical Memory Displays the mounting of optional memories.
Color Shift Displays the amount of correction for color shift.
IU Lot No. Displays the lot number for each of C, M, Y, and Bk IUs.
S-29
00.11.30
(6) ADF Check

• Allows the Tech. Rep. to make the various functional tests and adjustments of the (ADF).
✽ For details, see Option service manual.
Touch Panel
Setting
Display
Tech. Rep. Choice Displays the screens used to adjust.
Original Stop Adjust the document stop position in each of the ADF modes.
Position
Registration Loop Set the length of the loop to be formed in paper before the Registra-
tion Rollers.
I/O Check The following functions are used to locate the faulty spot.
Shows the states of the I/O ports when the copier is in the standby
state.
Paper Passage Makes a paper passage check through the ADF.
(7) ROM Version

• Shows the ROM versions.
S-30
00.11.30
(8) RD Mode
• Make the initial settings of the copier for the Data Terminal.
1. RD Mode Menu Function Tree
e-mail
System Set
Modem
CT-ID
DT-ID
TEL. No.
DT Setting
(Setting Modem)
Initial Mail Address
Billing Center Transmission (Setting e-mail)
(Setting Modem)
YES
Billing
RAM Clear
NO
CT-ID
ID Code DT-ID
TEL. No.
DT Setting
(Setting Modem)
Initial
Mail Address
RD Mode Mainte.Center Transmission
(Setting e-mail)
(Setting Modem)
Call
Completion
YES
Mainte.
RAM Clear
NO
Date/Time
Tone
Dial Mode
Pulse
Common DT
(Setting Modem)
YES
Auto Receive
NO
S-31
00.11.30
2. Setting in the RD Mode
Touch Panel
Display
System Set Set the control system.
e-mail Modem
Billing Center Displays the various setting screens.

DT Setting Displays the setting screens for CT-ID, DT-ID, and telephone number.
The mail address is also displayed if “e-mail” is set for System Set.
CT-ID Enter the ID number of the Center PC from the 10-Key Pad.
DT-ID Enter the ID number of the Data Terminal from the 10-Key Pad.
TEL No. Enter the telephone number of the modem connected to the Center
PC.
Initial Performs the initial transmission from the PPC to the Center to check
Transmission for correct communication after the Data Terminal has been set up.
Billing RAM Clear Initializes the Data Terminal settings.
YES NO
Mainte. Center Displays the various setting screens.

ID Code Enter the ID code.
<Procedure>
1. Touch the ID Code key.
2. Enter the ID code from the 10-Key Pad.
3. Touch the ID Code key. (This executes the transmission of
MAINT. START to the Center.)
DT Setting Displays the setting screens for CT-ID, DT-ID, and telephone number.
The mail address is also displayed if “e-mail” is set for System Set.
CT-ID Enter the ID number of the Center PC from the 10-Key Pad.
DT-ID Enter the ID number of the Data Terminal from the 10-Key Pad.
TEL No. Enter the telephone number of the modem connected to the Center
PC.
Initial Performs the initial transmission from the PPC to the Center to check
Transmission for correct communication after the Data Terminal has been set up.
Call Completion Transmits the signal of notifying the completion of service job to the
Center.
Mainte. RAM Initializes the Data Terminal settings.
Clear
YES NO
S-32
00.11.30
Touch Panel
Display
Date/Time Set Set the date and time-of-day for Date Printing.
Common DT Displays the screens for communications settings.
Dial Mode Sets the type of telephone line of the user.
Tone Pulse
Auto Receive Sets the auto reception function.
YES NO
(9) Administrator # Input

• Set an ID number for opening the “Admin. Mode” screen of Utility Mode from the 10-Key
Pad.
(10) List Output

• This function produces a list of the various Service mode data.
<Procedure>
1. Check that A4L or Letter L paper is loaded.
2. Select the desired function.
Touch Panel
Setting
Display
Image Processing Produces a list of image-related data.
Produces a list of counter-related data.
Counter Produces a list of counter-related data.
S-33
00.11.30
Details of List Output
Image Counter
Date/Time IR Area
OHP Speed ADF Original Position
Transfer Table Count Up Select
PC Action ATDC Sensor Volume
Fuser Action AIDC Level
PC PAT. PRT max Density
Paper Size PRT Highlight
Marketing Area Background Voltage
Serial # ATDC Level Setting
Fuser Oil Choice VB Shift
Fuser Oil Change AE Adjust
Fuser Speed Table #
AIDC Offset PC dev. Status
Transfer Output Bk Toner Sup. Status
Feed Motor Speed Temp & Humidity
PRT Area Top-Margin CCD Check
PRT Area Left-Margin ROM Version
PRT Area Dup. Left-Margin Gradation Adjust
Transfer Timing Stabilizer Trouble
Loop Adjust
Counter
Date/Time Jam Counter
Life Counter Warning Counter
Trouble Counter Meter Count
S-34
00.11.30
(11) Test Print

• Output the test pattern.
<Procedure>
1. Select the test pattern type.
2. Make the necessary settings according to the specific Test Print function (Color mode,
density, etc.).
3. Press the Start key to start the output sequence.
✽ The test print is produced on paper of the maximum size among those loaded in the
drawers.
Touch Panel
Setting
Display
Gradation Pattern Use to output a gradation pattern.
Used to check for gradation reproduction on the engine side.
Halftone Use to output a halftone pattern.
Used to check for uneven density, uneven pitch, and image noise on
the engine side.
Lattice Pattern Use to output a lattice pattern.
Used to check for fine line reproduction and toner scattering on the
engine side.
Solid Pattern Use to output a solid pattern.
Used to check for image density reproduction on the engine side.
Color Sample Use to output a color sample pattern.
Used to check for reproduction of each color on the engine side.
IR Test Pattern Use to output a IR test pattern.
Used to determine whether the engine or the IR is responsible for an
image failure that has occurred.
8 Color Solid Use to output a 8 color solid pattern.
Pattern Used to check for reproduction and uneven density of each color on
the engine side.
(12) Gradation Adjust

• Displays the Adj. Value and Conv. Value of Max. and Highlight for each color.
• If an image failure occurs, this function can be run to let the copier automatically correct
the gamma curve.
S-35
00.11.30
5. TOUCH PANEL CORRECTION MODE

• Corrects deviation in the sensitive area of the Touch Panel.
5-1. Touch Panel Correction Mode Screen
4004P031CA
5-2. Touch Panel Correction Mode Setting Procedures

<Procedure>
1. Press the following keys in this order.
Stop → 0 → Stop → 3
2. Sequentially touch the four points marked with + on the screen.
NOTE
• Lightly touch the one dot portion at the exact center of the “+” marking using the tip of a
pen or similar object.
S-36
00.11.30
6. SECURITY MODE
• Allows the Tech. Rep. to set the various counters.
6-1. Security Mode Screen
4004P032CA
6-2. Security Mode Setting Procedures

<Procedure>
1. Show the Tech. Rep. mode menu screen.
Stop → 9
3. Select the particular function.
<Exiting the Mode>

• Press the “Menu” key.
S-37
00.11.30
6-3. Settings in the Security Mode
Touch Panel
Display
Size Counter Select the size of the paper to be counted by the Size Counter.
No Count A3/11×17
A3/B4/11×17/Legal A3/B4/FLS/11×17/Legal
Total Counter Select the condition by which the Counter count is increased.
Mode 1 1 Copy per 1 copy cycle

Multiple count-up according to paper size 1/2-sided
Mode 2
copying
<Count-up Table>
Copying 1-Sided 2-Sided
Sizes Sizes
Other Set Other Set
Size
than sizes than sizes
those set those set
Mode Mode Mode Mode
Total
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
Total Counter 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 4
Size Counter 0 0 1 1 0 0 2 2
2-sided Total Counter 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
0: No count 1: 1 count 2: 2 counts 4: 4 counts
Vender Mode Set the initial screen according to the type of vender mounted on the
copier.
Set Coin Card
Unset
S-38
00.11.30
7. DATE/TIME INPUT MODE

• This mode is used to set time-of-day and date.
7-1. Date/Time Input mode Screen
4004P033CA
7-2. Date/Time Input Mode Setting Procedure

<Procedure>
1. Press the following keys in this order.
Stop → 1 → 1 → 4 → 4 Clear
2. Enter year, month, day, hour, and minute, in that order, from 10-key Pad.
3. Make sure that correct figures have been entered and then touch “OK.”
NOTE
• When setting the month, day, hour, or minute, enter “0” first if the data one digit.
S-39
FrameMaker Ver5.5E(PC) COVER [FIELD SERVICE] FOR CF1501/CF2001 FrameMaker Ver5.5E(PC) COVER [FIELD SERVICE] FOR CF1501/CF2001
00.12.25 00.12.25
CF1501/CF2001
CF1501/CF2001 SERVICE MANUAL [FIELD SERVICE]

SERVICE MANUAL
[FIELD SERVICE]
Copyright
2001 MINOLTA Co., Ltd.
Printed in Japan
Use of this manual should

be strictly supervised to
avoid disclosure of
confidential information.
MINOLTA Co., Ltd. 4004-7991-11 01011200

FrameMaker Ver5.5E(PC) COVER [TROUBLESHOOTING] FOR CF1501/CF2001 FrameMaker Ver5.5E(PC) COVER [TROUBLESHOOTING] FOR CF1501/CF2001
00.12.20 00.12.20
CF1501/CF2001
CF1501/CF2001 SERVICE MANUAL [TROUBLESHOOTING]

SERVICE MANUAL
[TROUBLESHOOTING]
Copyright
Printed in Japan

avoid disclosure of
MINOLTA Co., Ltd. 4004-7998-11 01011200

FrameMaker Ver.5.5(PC) CF1501/CF2001 TROUBLESHOOTING
00.12.20
INDEX (TROUBLESHOOTING)
TROUBLESHOOTING
UNIT REPLACEMENT
MANUAL
00.09.13
Safety Precautions for Inspection and Service

prevent accidents and ensure utmost safety.
Different markings are used to denote specific meanings as detailed below.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided,

WARNING could result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided,

CAUTION may result in minor or moderate injury. It may also be used to
alert against unsafe practices.
The following graphic symbols are used to give instructions that need to be observed.
Used to call the service technician’s attention to what is graphically represented

inside the marking (including a warning).
Used to prohibit the service technician’s from doing what is graphically repre-
sented inside the marking.
Used to instruct the service technician’s to do what is graphically represented

inside the marking.
WARNING
1. Always observe precautions.
• Parts requiring special attention in this product will include a label containing the
mark shown on the left plus precautionary notes. Be sure to observe the precau-
tions.
• Be sure to observe the “Safety Information” given in the Operator’s Manual.
2. Before starting the procedures, be sure to unplug the power cord.

• This product contains a high-voltage unit and a circuit with a large current
capacity that may cause an electric shock or burn.
• The product also contains parts that can jerk suddenly and cause injury.
• If this product uses a laser, laser beam leakage may cause eye damage or
blindness.
3. Use the specified parts.

• For replacement parts, always use the genuine parts specified in the manufac-
turer’s parts manual. Installing a wrong or unauthorized part could cause dielec-
tric breakdown, overload, or undermine safety devices resulting in possible
electric shock or fire.
• Replace a blown electrical fuse or thermal fuse with its corresponding genuine
part specified in the manufacturer’s parts manual. Installing a fuse of a different
make or rating could lead to a possible fire. If a thermal fuse blows frequently,
the temperature control system may have a problem and action must be taken
to eliminate the cause of the problem.
P-1
00.09.13
4. Handle the power cord with care and never use a multiple outlet.
• Do not break, crush or otherwise damage the power cord. Placing a heavy
object on the power cord, or pulling or bending it may damage it, resulting in a
possible fire or electric shock.
• Do not use a multiple outlet to which any other appliance or machine is con-
nected.
• Be sure the power outlet meets or exceeds the specified capacity.
5. Be careful with the high-voltage parts.

• A part marked with the symbol shown on the left carries a high voltage. Touch-
ing it could result in an electric shock or burn. Be sure to unplug the power cord
before servicing this part or the parts near it.
6. Do not work with wet hands.

• Do not unplug or plug in the power cord, or perform any kind of service or
inspection with wet hands. Doing so could result in an electric shock.
7. Do not touch a high-temperature part.

• A part marked with the symbol shown on the left and other parts such as the
exposure lamp and fusing roller can be very hot while the machine is energized.
Touching them may result in a burn.
• Wait until these parts have cooled down before replacing them or any surround-
ing parts.
8. Maintain a grounded connection at all times. (This item may not apply in the USA.)
• Be sure to connect the ground wire to the ground terminal even when perform-
ing an inspection or repair. Without proper grounding, electrical leakage could
result in an electric shock or fire.
• Never connect the ground wire to a gas pipe, water pipe, telephone ground wire,
or a lightning conductor.
9. Do not remodel the product.

• Modifying this product in a manner not authorized by the manufacturer may
result in a fire or electric shock. If this product uses a laser, laser beam leakage
may cause eye damage or blindness.
10. Restore all parts and harnesses to their original positions.

• To promote safety and prevent product damage, make sure the harnesses are
returned to their original positions and properly secured in their clamps and sad-
dles in order to avoid hot parts, high-voltage parts, sharp edges, or being
crushed.
• To promote safety, make sure that all tubing and other insulating materials are
returned to their original positions. Make sure that floating components mounted
on the circuit boards are at their correct distance and position off the boards.
P-2
00.09.13
CAUTION
1. Precautions for Service Jobs
• A toothed washer and spring washer, if used originally, must be reinstalled.
Omitting them may result in contact failure which could cause an electric shock
or fire.
• When reassembling parts, make sure that the correct screws (size, type) are
used in the correct places. Using the wrong screw could lead to stripped
threads, poorly secured parts, poor insulating or grounding, and result in a mal-
function, electric shock or injury.
• Take great care to avoid personal injury from possible burrs and sharp edges on
the parts, frames and chassis of the product.
• When moving the product or removing an option, use care not to injure your
back or allow your hands to be caught in mechanisms.
2. Precautions for Servicing with Covers and Parts Removed

• Wherever feasible, keep all parts and covers mounted when energizing the
product.
• If energizing the product with a cover removed is absolutely unavoidable, do not
touch any exposed live parts and use care not to allow your clothing to be
caught in the moving parts. Never leave a product in this condition unattended.
• Never place disassembled parts or a container of liquid on the product. Parts
falling into, or the liquid spilling inside, the mechanism could result in an electric
shock or fire.
• Never use a flammable spray near the product. This could result in a fire.
• Make sure the power cord is unplugged before removing or installing circuit
boards or plugging in or unplugging connectors.
• Always use the interlock switch actuating jig to actuate an interlock switch when
a cover is opened or removed. The use of folded paper or some other object
may damage the interlock switch mechanism, possibly resulting in an electric
shock, injury or blindness.
3. Precautions for the Working Environment

• The product must be placed on a flat, level surface that is stable and secure.
• Never place this product or its parts on an unsteady or tilting workbench when
servicing.
• Provide good ventilation at regular intervals if a service job must be done in a
confined space for a long period of time.
• Avoid dusty locations and places exposed to oil or steam.
• Avoid working positions that may block the ventilation ports of the product.
4. Precautions for Handling Batteries (Lithium, Nickel-Cadmium, etc.)

• Replace a rundown battery with the same type as specified in the manufac-
turer’s parts manual.
• Before installing a new battery, make sure of the correct polarity of the installa-
tion or the battery could burst.
• Dispose of used batteries according to the local regulations. Never dispose of
them at the user’s premises or attempt to try to discharge one.
P-3
00.09.13
5. Precautions for the Laser Beam (Only for Products Employing a Laser)
• Removing the cover marked with the following caution label could lead to possi-
ble exposure to the laser beam, resulting in eye damage or blindness. Be sure
to unplug the power cord before removing this cover.
• If removing this cover while the power is ON is unavoidable, be sure to wear
protective laser goggles that meet specifications.
• Make sure that no one enters the room when the machine is in this condition.
• When handling the laser unit, observe the “Precautions for Handling Laser
Equipment.”
1167P001AA
ANGR
Invisible laser radiation when open.
AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE
TO BEAM
0947-7127-01
1144D270AA
Other Precautions
• When handling circuit boards, observe the “HANDLING of PWBs”.
• The PC Drum is a very delicate component. Observe the precautions given in “HAN-
DLING OF THE PC DRUM” because mishandling may result in serious image problems.
• Note that replacement of a circuit board may call for readjustments or resetting of partic-
ular items, or software installation.
P-4
00.09.13
Used Batteries Precautions

ALL Areas
CAUTION
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
Germany
VORSICHT!
Explosionsgefahr bei unsachgemäßem Austausch der Batterie.
Ersatz nur durch denselben oder einen vom Hersteller empfohlenen ähnlichen Typ.
Entsorgung gebrauchter batterien nach Angaben des Herstellers.
France
ATTENTION
Ily a danger d’explosion s’ily a remplacement incorrec de la batterie.
Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du meme type ou d’un type équivalent recom-
mande par le constructueur.
Mettre au rebut les batteries usageés conformément aux instructions du fabricant.
Denmark
ADVARSEL!
Lithiumbatteri - Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering Udskiftning må kun ske med bat-
teri af samme fabrikat og type.
Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandøren.
Norway
ADVARSEL
Eksplosjonsfare ved feilaktig skifte av batteri.
Benytt samme batteritype eller en tilsvarende type anbefalt av apparatfabrikanten.
Brukte batterier kasseres i henhold til fabrikantens instruksjoner.
Sweden
VARNING
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.
Använd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparat-
tillverkaren.
Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion.
Finland
VAROlTUS
Paristo voi räjähtää, los se on virheellisesti asennettu.
Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin. Hävitä Käytetty paristo
valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti.
P-5
00.09.13

prevent mishandling of the machine and its parts.
Precautions Before Service

• When the user is using a word processor or personal computer from a wall outlet of the
same line, take necessary steps to prevent the circuit breaker from opening due to over-
loads.
• Never disturb the LAN by breaking or making a network connection, altering termination,
installing or removing networking hardware or software, or shutting down networked
devices without the knowledge and express permission of the network administrator or
the shop supervisor.
How to Use this Book

1. DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
• To reassemble the product, reverse the order of disassembly unless otherwise specified.
2. TROUBLESHOOTING
• If a component on a PWB or any other functional unit including a motor is defective, the
text only instructs you to replace the whole PWB or functional unit and does not give
troubleshooting procedures applicable within the defective unit.
• All troubleshooting procedures contained herein assume that there are no breaks in the
harnesses and cords and all connectors are plugged into the right positions.
• The procedures preclude possible malfunctions due to noise and other external causes.

• Check the area surrounding the service site for any signs of damage, wear or need of
repair.
• Keep all disassembled parts in good order and keep tools under control so that none will
be lost or damaged.
• After completing a service job, perform a safety check. Make sure that all parts, wiring
and screws are returned to their original positions.
• Do not pull out the toner hopper while the toner bottle is turning. This could result in a
damaged motor or locking mechanism.
• If the product is to be run with the front door open, make sure that the toner hopper is in
• Do not use an air gun or vacuum cleaner for cleaning the ATDC Sensor and other sen-
sors, as they can cause electrostatic destruction. Use a blower brush and cloth. If a unit
containing these sensors is to be cleaned, first remove the sensors from the unit.
P-6
00.09.13
Precautions for Dis/Reassembly

• Be sure to unplug the copier from the outlet before attempting to service the copier.
• The basic rule is not to operate the copier anytime during disassembly. If it is absolutely
necessary to run the copier with its covers removed, use care not to allow your clothing
to be caught in revolving parts such as the timing belt and gears.
• Before attempting to replace parts and unplug connectors, make sure that the power
cord of the copier has been unplugged from the wall outlet.
• Be sure to use the Interlock Switch Actuating Jig whenever it is necessary to actuate the
Interlock Switch with the covers left open or removed.
• While the product is energized, do not unplug or plug connectors into the circuit boards
or harnesses.
• Never use flammable sprays near the copier.
• A used battery should be disposed of according to the local regulations and never be dis-
carded casually or left unattended at the user’s premises.
• When reassembling parts, make sure that the correct screws (size, type) and toothed
washer are used in the correct places.
• If it becomes necessary to replace the thermal fuse or any other fuse mounted on a
board, be sure to use one of the rating marked on the blown fuse. Always note the rating
marked on the fuse, as the rating and mounting site or number used are subject to
change without notice.
Precautions for Circuit Inspection

• Never create a closed circuit across connector pins except those specified in the text and
on the printed circuit.
• When creating a closed circuit and measuring a voltage across connector pins specified
in the text, be sure to use the GND wire.
P-7
00.09.13
Handling of PWBs
• During transportation or when in storage, new P.W. Boards must not be indiscriminately
removed from their protective conductive bags.
• Do not store or place P.W. Boards in a location exposed to direct sunlight and high tem-
perature.
• When it becomes absolutely necessary to remove a Board from its conductive bag or
case, always place it on its conductive mat in an area as free as possible from static elec-
tricity.
• Do not touch the pins of the ICs with your bare hands.
• Protect the PWBs from any external force so that they are not bent or damaged.
2. During Inspection/Replacement:
• Avoid checking the IC directly with a multimeter; use connectors on the Board.
• Never create a closed circuit across IC pins with a metal tool.
• Before unplugging connectors from the P.W. Boards, make sure that the power cord has
been unplugged from the outlet.
• When removing a Board from its conductive bag or conductive case, do not touch the
pins of the ICs or the printed pattern. Place it in position by holding only the edges of the
Board.
• When touching the PWB, wear a wrist strap and connect its cord to a securely grounded
place whenever possible. If you cannot wear a wrist strap, touch a metal part to dis-
charge static electricity before touching the PWB.
• Note that replacement of a PWB may call for readjustments or resetting of particular
items.
Handling of Other Parts

• The magnet roller generates a strong magnetic field. Do not bring it near a watch, floppy
disk, magnetic card, or CRT tube.
P-8
00.09.13
Handling of the PC Drum

✽ Only for Products Not Employing an Imaging Cartridge.
• Use the specified carton whenever moving or storing the PC Drum.
• In summer, avoid leaving the PC Drum in a car for a long time.
2. Handling:
• Ensure that the correct PC Drum is used.
• Whenever the PC Drum has been removed from the copier, store it in its carton or pro-
tect it with a Drum Cloth.
• The PC Drum exhibits greatest light fatigue after being exposed to strong light over an
extended period of time. Never, therefore, expose it to direct sunlight.
• Do not apply chemicals to the surface of the PC Drum.
If, however, the surface is contaminated with fingerprints, clean it using the following proce-
dure.
1. Place the PC Drum into one half of its carton.
1076D001
2. Gently wipe the residual toner off the surface of the

PC Drum with a dry, Dust-Free Cotton Pad.
A. Turn the PC Drum so that the area of its surface on
which the line of toner left by the Cleaning Blade is
present is facing straight up. Wipe the surface in
one continuous movement from the rear edge of
the PC Drum to the front edge and off the surface
of the PC Drum.
1076D002
B. Turn the PC Drum slightly and wipe the newly
exposed surface area with a CLEAN face of the
Dust-Free Cotton Pad. Repeat this procedure until
the entire surface of the PC Drum has been thor-
oughly cleaned.
✽ At this time, always use a CLEAN face of the dry
Dust-Free Cotton Pad until no toner is evident on the
face of the Pad after wiping.
P-9
00.09.13
3. Soak a small amount of either ethyl alcohol or iso-

propyl alcohol into a clean, unused Dust-Free Cot-
ton Pad which has been folded over into quarters.
Now, wipe the surface of the PC Drum in one con-
tinuous movement from its rear edge to its front
edge and off its surface one to two times.
✽ Never move the Pad back and forth.
1076D003
4. Using the SAME face of the Pad, repeat the proce-

dure explained in the latter half of step 3 until the
entire surface of the PC Drum has been wiped.
Always OVERLAP the areas when wiping. Two
complete turns of the PC Drum would be appropri-
ate for cleaning.
1076D004
NOTES
• Even when the PC Drum is only locally dirtied, wipe the entire surface.
• Do not expose the PC Drum to direct sunlight. Clean it as quickly as possible even under
interior illumination.
• If dirt remains after cleaning, repeat the entire procedure from the beginning one more
time.
Handling of the Imaging Cartridge

✽ Only for Products Employing an Imaging Cartridge.
• In summer, avoid leaving the Imaging Cartridge in a car for a long time.
2. Handling:
• Store the Imaging Cartridge in a place that is not exposed to direct sunlight.
3. Precautionary Information on the PC Drum Inside the Imaging Cartridge:

P-10
FrameMaker Ver.5.5E(PC) CF1501/CF2001 TROUBLESHOOTING
00.12.20
TROUBLESHOOTING
18605
00.12.20
CONTENTS
1. INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................. T-1
1-1. Reading the Text ..................................................................................... T-1
2. I/O CHECK ...................................................................................................... T-1
2-1. Electrical Components Check Procedure ................................................ T-1
2-2. I/O Check List .......................................................................................... T-3
2-3. How to Interpret “State Confirm” of “Tech. Rep. Mode” ........................... T-9
(1) Table # ............................................................................................. T-9
(2) Level History 1 ................................................................................. T-10
(3) Level History 2 ................................................................................. T-10
2-4. Paper Misfeed .......................................................................................... T-11
2-5. Misfeed Detecting Sensor Layout ............................................................ T-12
2-6. Types of Misfeed Detection and Detection Timing .................................. T-14
2-7. Misfeed Troubleshooting Procedures ...................................................... T-17
(1) Copier Paper Take-Up Misfeed ....................................................... T-17
(2) Manual Bypass Take-Up Misfeed .................................................... T-19
(3) Copier Vertical Transport Misfeed ................................................... T-22
(4) 2nd Image Transfer Misfeed ............................................................ T-25
(5) Exit Misfeed ..................................................................................... T-27
(6) PF-118 Paper Take-Up Misfeed ...................................................... T-29
(7) PF-117 Paper Take-Up Misfeed ...................................................... T-32
(8) Duplex Paper Take-Up Misfeed ...................................................... T-35
3. MALFUNCTIONS ............................................................................................ T-37
3-1. Detection Timing by Warning Code ......................................................... T-38
3-2. Detection Timing by Malfunction Code .................................................... T-40
3-3. Troubleshooting Procedures by Malfunction Code .................................. T-48
(1) C0000: Main Motor’s failure to turn
C0001: Main Motor turning at abnormal timing ............................... T-48
(2) C0010: Imaging Unit Motor C’s failure to turn
C0011: Imaging Unit Motor C turning at abnormal timing
C0012: Imaging Unit Motor M’s failure to turn
C0013: Imaging Unit Motor M turning at abnormal timing
C0014: Imaging Unit Motor Y’s failure to turn
C0015: Imaging Unit Motor Y turning at abnormal timing
C0016: Imaging Unit Motor Bk’s failure to turn
C0017: Imaging Unit Motor Bk turning at abnormal timing .............. T-49
(3) C0040: Fusing Cooling Fan Motor 1’s failure to turn
C0046: Fusing Cooling Fan Motor 2’s failure to turn
C004C: Ozone Ventilation Fan Motor’s failure to turn
C004E: Power Supply Cooling Fan Motor’s failure to turn .............. T-51
(4) C0060: Fusing Drive Motor’s failure to turn
C0061: Fusing Drive Motor turning at abnormal timing ................... T-53
(5) C0094: 2nd Image Transfer Roller pressure/retraction failure ........ T-54
(6) C0096: Image Transfer Belt pressure/retraction failure ................... T-55
(7) C0098: Fusing Roller pressure/retraction failure ............................. T-56
(8) C0200: Cyan PC Drum Charge Corona malfunction
C0202: Magenta PC Drum Charge Corona malfunction
i
00.12.20
C0204: Yellow PC Drum Charge Corona malfunction

C0206: Black PC Drum Charge Corona malfunction ...................... T-58
(9) C0400: Exposure Lamp’s failure to turn ON
C0410: Exposure Lamp turning ON at abnormal timing .................. T-60
(10) C0500: Heating Roller warm-up failure
C0501: Lower Fusing Roller Heater Lamp warm-up failure
C0510: Heating Roller abnormally low temperature
C0511: Lower Fusing Roller Heater Lamp abnormally low temperature
C0520: Heating Roller abnormally high temperature
C0521: Lower Fusing Roller Heater Lamp abnormally high temperature
............................................................................................. T-61
(11) C0650: Scanner Home Sensor malfunction
C0660: Scanner overrun failure ....................................................... T-63
(12) C0990: LCC Lift-Up Motor malfunction
C0991: LCC Lift 1 ascent motion failure
C0995: LCC Transport Motor malfunction
C0999: LCC Lift 2 ascent motion failure .......................................... T-65
(13) C0F30: Abnormally low toner density detected by Cyan ATDC Sensor/
C0F31: Abnormally high toner density detected by Cyan ATDC Sensor
C0F32: Abnormally low toner density detected by Magenta ATDC Sensor/
C0F33: Abnormally high toner density detected by Magenta ATDC Sensor
C0F34: Abnormally low toner density detected by Yellow ATDC Sensor/
C0F35: Abnormally high toner density detected by Yellow ATDC Sensor
............................................................................................. T-67
(14) C0F36: Abnormally low toner density detected by Black ATDC Sensor/
C0F37: Abnormally high toner density detected by Black ATDC Sensor
............................................................................................. T-69
(15) C0F3A: Cyan ATDC Sensor adjustment failure
C0F3B: Magenta ATDC Sensor adjustment failure
C0F3C: Yellow ATDC Sensor adjustment failure
C0F3D: Black ATDC Sensor adjustment failure .............................. T-70
(16) C13C8: New Transfer Belt Unit resetting failure
C13CA: New Fusing Unit resetting failure
C13CB: New Fusing Web Unit resetting failure
C13CC: New Oil Coating Unit resetting failure ................................ T-71
(17) C13D1: Cyan IU EEPROM failure
C13D2: Magenta IU EEPROM failure
C13D3: Yellow IU EEPROM failure
C13D4: Black IU EEPROM failure ................................................... T-72
(18) C3310: CCD clamp/gain adjustment failure .................................... T-73
(19) C3700: IR Cooling Fan Motor 1 turning at abnormal timing
C3710: IR Cooling Fan Motor 2 turning at abnormal timing
C3720: Original Glass Cooling Fan Motor turning at abnormal timing
............................................................................................. T-74
(20) C3A00: PIC communication error
C3A01: PIC Board malfunction
C3FFF: ROM contents fault detected upon start ............................. T-75
ii
00.12.20
3-4. Power Supply-Related Malfunctions ........................................................ T-76

(1) Copier Does not Turned ON. ........................................................... T-76
(2) No Control Panel Indicators Light up. .............................................. T-77
(3) No Power is Supplied to Options. .................................................... T-78
4. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEMS ........................................................................ T-79
4-1. Troubleshooting Image Quality Problems ................................................ T-79
4-2. Initial Check Items ................................................................................... T-79
4-3. Troubleshooting Procedure by a Particular Image Quality Problem ........ T-82
(1) IR Scanner System: white lines in FD, white bands in FD,
colored lines in FD, and colored bands in FD .................................. T-82
(2) IR Scanner System: white lines in CD, white bands in CD,
colored lines in CD, and colored bands in CD ................................. T-83
(3) IR Scanner System: color spots ...................................................... T-84
(4) IR Scanner System: fog ................................................................... T-85
(5) IR Scanner System: blurred image, blotchy image ......................... T-87
(6) IR Scanner System: incorrect color image registration ................... T-88
(7) IR Scanner System: moire ............................................................... T-89
(8) IR Scanner System: skewed image ................................................. T-90
(9) IR Scanner System: distorted image ............................................... T-91
(10) IR Scanner System: low image density, rough image ..................... T-92
(11) IR Scanner System: defective ACS ................................................. T-93
(12) IR Control System: blank copy, black copy ..................................... T-94
(13) IR Control System: abnormal image ................................................ T-95
(14) Printer Monocolor: white lines in FD, white bands in FD,
colored lines in FD, colored bands in FD, white lines in CD,
white bands in CD, colored lines in CD, colored bands in CD ......... T-96
(15) Printer Monocolor: uneven density in FD ........................................ T-98
(16) Printer Monocolor: uneven density in CD ........................................ T-100
(17) Printer Monocolor: low image density .............................................. T-101
(18) Printer Monocolor: gradation reproduction failure ........................... T-103
(19) Printer Monocolor: foggy background .............................................. T-105
(20) Printer Monocolor: void areas, white spots ...................................... T-107
(21) Printer Monocolor: colored spots ..................................................... T-108
(22) Printer Monocolor: blurred image .................................................... T-109
(23) Printer Monocolor: blank copy, black copy ...................................... T-110
(24) Printer Monocolor: 0.5-mm-pitch uneven image .............................. T-111
(25) Printer Monocolor: 2-mm-pitch uneven image ................................. T-112
(26) Printer Monocolor: 94-mm-pitch uneven image ............................... T-113
(27) Printer 4-Color: white lines in FD, white bands in FD,
colored lines in FD, and colored bands in FD .................................. T-114
(28) Printer 4-Color: white lines in CD, white bands in CD,
colored lines in CD, and colored bands in CD ................................. T-116
(29) Printer 4-Color: uneven density in FD ............................................. T-118
(30) Printer 4-Color: uneven density in CD ............................................. T-119
(31) Printer 4-Color: low image density ................................................... T-120
(32) Printer 4-Color: poor color reproduction .......................................... T-122
(33) Printer 4-Color: incorrect color image registration ........................... T-124
iii
00.12.20
(34)Printer 4-Color: void areas, white spots ........................................... T-126

(35)Printer 4-Color: colored spots .......................................................... T-127
(36)Printer 4-Color: oil lines, oil on copy ................................................ T-129
(37)Printer 4-Color: poor fusing performance, offset ............................. T-130
(38)Printer 4-Color: brush effect, blurred image .................................... T-131
(39)Printer 4-Color: back marking .......................................................... T-132
(40)Printer 4-Color: 75-mm-pitch uneven image,
200-mm-pitch uneven image ........................................................... T-133
(41) Printer 4-Color: 94-mm-pitch uneven image .................................... T-134
4-4. Image Stabilizer Malfunction .................................................................... T-135
(1) P-5: AIDC Sensor Failure (AIDC Sensor 2)
P-28: AIDC Sensor Failure (AIDC Sensor 1) ................................... T-135
(2) P-6: Cyan Imaging Unit Failure
P-7: Magenta Imaging Unit Failure
P-8: Yellow Imaging Unit Failure
P-9: Black Imaging Unit Failure ....................................................... T-135
(3) P-21: Color Shift Correction Failure (Test Pattern Failure) .............. T-136
(4) P-22: Color Shift Correction Failure (Correction Amount Failure) ... T-136
(5) P-23: Cyan 1st Image Transfer ATVC Failure
P-24: Magenta 1st Image Transfer ATVC Failure
P-25: Yellow 1st Image Transfer ATVC Failure
P-26: Black 1st Image Transfer ATVC Failure
P-27: 2nd Image Transfer ATVC Failure ......................................... T-136
(6) S-1: CCD Gain Adjustment Failure .................................................. T-137
(7) S-2: Intensity Adjustment Failure ..................................................... T-137
iv
00.12.20
1. INTRODUCTION
1-1. Reading the Text
1. The paper transport failure troubleshooting procedures are given according to the
symptom. First identify the location where the paper is present and start the procedure
for that particular location. For malfunction troubleshooting, start with step 1 and
onward.
2. Make checks in the numerical order of steps and, if an item is checked okay, go to the
next step.
Pattern 1 Pattern 2
Step Check Result Action Step Check Result Action
1 Is ..? YES Do this. 1 Is ..? YES Do this.
2 NO Check that.
2
Go to step 2 if you answered No.
Go to step 2 if it is checked okay.
2. I/O CHECK
2-1. Electrical Components Check Procedure
To allow the Tech. Rep. to easily and safely determine whether a particular electrical com-
ponent is fully operational, this copier provides the following provision. Checking the data of
the input port of the board IC with the copier in the standby state (including a misfeed, mal-
function, and closure failure condition) allows the Tech. Rep. to determine whether signals
are properly input to an electrical component.
<Procedure>
1. When a misfeed or malfunction occurs, identify on the circuit diagram accompanying
the text the electrical component that is probably responsible for the problem.
2. Select “State Confirm” from the “Tech. Rep. Mode” menu and then select “I/O Check.”
Then, from among the Sensors 1 to 7 screens, select the screen that contains the elec-
trical component picked out in step 1 above. (See “Tech. Rep. Mode” contained in
SWITCHES ON PWBs.)
3. Check the input data to determine if the signal is correctly input.
T-1
00.12.20
<Electrical Component Check Procedure Through Checking Input Data>
Example
When a paper misfeed occurs in the paper take-up section of the copier, the 2nd Drawer
Paper Take-Up Sensor is considered to be responsible for it.
<Procedure>
1. Remove the sheet of paper misfed.
2. From the I/O Check List that follows, it is known that the input signal of the 2nd Drawer
Paper Take-Up Sensor may be checked with the data of “Take-Up” of “2nd Drawer.”
3. From the “Tech. Rep. Mode” menu, select “State Confirm” and then “I/O Check.” Then,
select the screen that contains “Take-Up” under “2nd Drawer.”
4. Check that the data for “Take-Up” under “2nd Drawer” is “0” (sensor blocked).
5. Move the actuator to unblock the 2nd Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor.
6. Check that the data for “Take-up” under “2nd Drawer” changes from “0” to “1” on the
screen.
1: Sensor is operational. 0: Sensor is faulty.
T-2
00.12.20
2-2. I/O Check List

<I/O Check Screens>
• These are only typical screens which may be different from what are shown on each indi-
vidual copier.
Previous
Screen
Next
Screen
4004P047CA 4004P048CA
Next Previous
Screen Screen
4004P049CA
Next Previous
Screen Screen
4004P053CA 4004P050CA
Previous Next Next Previous

Screen Screen Screen Screen
Next
Screen
Previous
Screen
4004P052CA 4004P051CA
T-3
00.12.20
<I/O Check List>
Operation Characteris-
tics/Panel Display Input IC Port CN/PJ
Symbol Panel Display Part/Signal Name
Board No. No. No.
1 0
PC3 1st Drawer Set 1st Drawer Set In position Out of Master IC6 PG1 PJ17I-9A
Sensor position Board
(PWB-I)
PC6 Paper 1st Drawer Paper Paper not Paper IC5 PI7 PJ3I-8A
Empty Empty Sensor present present
PC4 Paper Near 1st Drawer Paper Blocked Unblocked IC6 PG0 PJ17I-6A
Empty Near-Empty Sensor
PC13 Double 1st Drawer Double Paper Paper not IC6 PI0 PJ5I-8B
Feed Feed Sensor present present
SW D 2nd Set 2nd Drawer Set In position Out of Control IC1 PC0 PJ3A-4B
Drawer Switch position Board
(PWB-A)
PC102 Paper 2nd Drawer Paper Paper not Paper IC1 PB5 PJ3A-14A
Empty Empty Sensor present present
PC103 Paper Near 2nd Drawer Paper Blocked Unblocked IC1 PB6 PJ3A-11A
Empty Near-Empty Sensor
PC101 Take-Up 2nd Drawer Paper Paper Paper not IC1 PB7 PJ3A-5A
Take-Up Sensor present present
PC105 Double 2nd Drawer Double Paper Paper not IC1 PC3 PJ3A-8A
Feed Feed Sensor present present
SW D 3rd Drawer Set Drawer Set Switch In position Out of Control IC1 PC0 PJ3A-4B
position Board
(PWB-A)
PC2 Paper Drawer Paper Empty Paper not Paper IC1 PB5 PJ3A-14A
Empty Sensor present present
PC3 Paper Near Drawer Paper Near- Blocked Unblocked IC1 PB6 PJ3A-11A
Empty Empty Sensor
PC1 Take-Up Drawer Paper Take- Paper Paper not IC1 PB7 PJ3A-5A
Up Sensor present present
PC5 Double Drawer Double Feed Paper Paper not IC1 PC3 PJ3A-8A
Feed Sensor present present
SW D 4th Drawer Set Drawer Set Switch In position Out of Control IC1 PC0 PJ3A-4B
position Board
(PWB-A)
PC2 Paper Drawer Paper Empty Paper not Paper IC1 PB5 PJ3A-14A
PC3 Paper Near Drawer Paper Near- Blocked Unblocked IC1 PB6 PJ3A-11A
Empty Empty Sensor
PC1 Take-Up Drawer Paper Take- Paper Paper not IC1 PB7 PJ3A-5A
Up Sensor present present
PC5 Double Drawer Double Feed Paper Paper not IC1 PC3 PJ3A-8A
Feed Sensor present present
PC15 Manual Take-Up Manual Feed Paper Paper Paper not Master IC6 PI5 PJ15I-7B
Take-Up Sensor present present Board
(PWB-I)
PC15 Set Manual Feed Paper In position Out of IC5 PH4 PJ15I-
Take-Up Sensor position 10B
PC17 Paper Timing Synchronizing Roller Paper Paper not IC1 P77 PJ14I-9B
Passage Roller Sensor present present
PC10 Exit Exit Sensor Paper Paper not IC6 PI4 PJ3I-14A
present present
PC19 Paper OHP Detect OHP Detecting OHP OHP not IC1 AN5 PJ14-2B
Passage Sensor Sensor present present
T-4
00.12.20
Board No. No. No.
1 0
LS1 LCC Lift-Up 1 Lift-Up Sensor 1 At raised Not at LCC IC4 P74/ CN4A-6
position raised Control ANI4
position Board
(PWB-A)
LS2 Lift-Up 2 Lift-Up Sensor 2 At raised Not at IC4 P73/ CN4A-9
position raised ANI3
position
RSEN Registration Registration Sensor Paper Paper not IC4 P22/ CN4A-2
present present INTP1
S1 Paper Wait Paper Standby At standby Not at IC4 P23/ CN3A-5
Position Sensor position standby INTP2/
position CI
PPS0 Take-Up 1 LCC Paper Take-Up Paper Paper not IC4 P24/ CN4A-11
Sensor present present INTP3
PPS1 Take-Up 2 Paper Empty Sensor Paper Paper not IC4 P25/ CN3A-2
1 present present INTP4/
ASCK
EMP Paper Paper Empty Sensor Paper not Paper IC4 P72/ CN3A-8
Empty 2 present present ANI2
RS1 Paper Near Paper Near Empty Unblocked Blocked IC4 P75/ CN6A-12
Empty 1 Sensor 1 ANI5
RS2 Paper Near Paper Near Empty Unblocked Blocked IC4 P76/ CN5A-5
Empty 2 Sensor 2 ANI6
PWB-A Duplex Set Duplex Unit Door Set Duplex - - PJ1A-3
PI2 Sensor (in PWB-A) Control
Board
PWB-A Paper Duplex Unit Paper Paper not - - PJ1A-12
PI1 passage 1 Transport Sensor 1 present present
(in PWB-A)
PC1 Paper Duplex Unit Paper Paper not - - PJ4A-3
passage 2 Transport Sensor 2 present present
PC1 Horizontal Horizontal Paper Sensor Paper not Paper Control IC1 P26 PJ15A-4
Trans. Unit Transport present present Board IC1 P27 PJ12-2
(PWB-A)
PC6 Rev. Empty Turnover Empty Paper Paper not IC26 PE3 PJ15A-12
Detecting Sensor present present IC1 P22 PJ13-2
PWB-B Mail Bin Exit Exit Sensor Board Paper Paper not IC1 P25 PJ6A-7
Sorter Section present present
PWB-B 1st bin Non-Sort Bin Empty Paper Paper not IC1 P40 PJ6A-5
PWB-D 2nd bin 2nd Bin Empty Paper Paper not IC1 P41 PJ7A-4A
PWB-D 3rd bin 3rd Bin Empty Paper Paper not IC1 P42 PJ7A-11A
PWB-D 4th bin 4th Bin Empty Paper Paper not IC1 P43 PJ7A-4B
PWB-D 6th bin 6th Bin Empty Paper Paper not IC1 P45 PJ8A-4A
PWB-D 7th bin 7th Bin Empty Paper Paper not IC1 P46 PJ8A-11A
PWB-D 10th bin 10th Bin Empty Paper Paper not P21 PJ9A- PWB-D
Empty Sensor present present 4
T-5
00.12.20
Board No. No. No.
1 0
PWB-B Mail Bin 1st bin Full Non-Sort Bin Full Blocked Unblocked Control IC1 P70 PJ6A-4
Sorter Sensor Board
(PWB-A)
PWB-D 2nd bin Full 2nd Bin Full Sensor Blocked Unblocked IC1 P71 PJ7A-1A
PWB-D 3rd bin Full 3rd Bin Full Sensor Blocked Unblocked IC1 P72 PJ7A-8A
PWB-D 4th bin Full 4th Bin Full Sensor Blocked Unblocked IC1 P73 PJ7A-1B
PWB-D 6th bin Full 6th Bin Full Sensor Blocked Unblocked IC1 P75 PJ8A-1A
PWB-D 7th bin Full 7th Bin Full Sensor Blocked Unblocked IC1 P76 PJ8A-8A
PWB-C 10th bin Full 10th Bin Full Sensor Blocked Unblocked IC1 P67 PJ9A-1
PC1 Finisher Exit 1st Tray Exit Sensor Paper Paper not Control IC26 PC4 PJ19A-6
(Non-sort) present present Board
(PWB-A)
PC3 Exit Storage Sensor Paper Paper not IC26 PD0 PJ20A-3
(Finisher) present present
PC4 Transport Upper Entrance Paper Paper not IC26 PE6 PJ20A-9
Upper Sensor present present
PC2 Transport Lower Entrance Paper Paper not IC26 PE7 PJ19A-8
Lower Sensor present present
PC6 Full 1st Tray Full Blocked Unblocked IC26 PC5 PJ19A-3
(Non-sort) Detecting Sensor
PC7 Full Elevator Tray Full Blocked Unblocked IC26 PA7 PJ19A-12
(Elev. Tray) Detecting Sensor
PC5 Empty Finisher Tray Paper Out of In position IC26 PD1 PJ25A-2
Detecting Sensor position
PWB-D Finisher Elevator Tray Upper Paper Paper not IC26 PA6 PJ21A-2
Limit Sensor PQ present present
PC8 Surface Elevator Tray Paper Blocked Unblocked IC26 PA5 PJ25A-9
(Elev.) Detecting Sensor
PC9 Empty CD Aligning Home Blocked Unblocked IC26 PD2 PJ25A-6
(Elev.) Position Sensor
PC14 Home Staple Home Blocked Unblocked IC26 PD3 PJ22A-3
(CD-Align) Position Sensor
PC12 Home Storage Roller Home Blocked Unblocked IC26 PC6 PJ20A-6
(Stap. Unit) Position Sensor
PC13 Hole Exit Rolls Home Blocked Unblocked IC26 PC7 PJ19A-15
(store roller) Position Sensor
- Home Stapler Home 1 Blocked Unblocked IC1 P71, PJ23A-2
(Stapler 1) ANI1
- Empty St. 1 Stapler Empty 1 Blocked Unblocked IC1 P72, PJ23A-4
Needle ANI2
T-6
00.12.20
Board No. No. No.
1 0
- Finisher Self Stapler Self-Priming Blocked Unblocked Control IC1 P73, PJ23A-3
Priming S1 1 Board ANI3
(PWB-A)
- Home Stapler Home 2 Blocked Unblocked IC1 P75, PJ24A-2
(Stapler 2) ANI5
- Empty St. 2 Staple Empty 2 Blocked Unblocked IC1 P76, PJ24A-4
Needle ANI6
- Self Stapler Self-Priming Blocked Unblocked IC1 P77, PJ24A-3
Priming S2 2 ANI7
S2 Elevate Elevate Tray Raised/ ON OFF - - PJ4A-4
S3 Tray Lowered
Raised/
Lowered
PC10 Home Shift Home Position Blocked Unblocked IC26 PD4 PJ25A-12
(Shift) Sensor
S4 Punch Hole Hole Punch Position ON OFF IC28 PE2 PJ12A-3
Change Switch
PC15 Punch Punch Motor Pulse Blocked Unblocked IC1 P21 PJ13A-8
Speed Sensor INPO
PC11 Shift Speed Shift Motor Pulse Blocked Unblocked IC1 P24 PJ25A-14
Sensor INPO
SW6 Dev. Cyan Toner Toner Empty Switch ON OFF Master IC6 PH6 PJ5I-5A
Empty C Board
(PWB-I)
SW7 Magenta Toner Empty Switch ON OFF IC6 PH5 PJ5I-3A
Toner M
Empty
SW8 Yellow Toner Empty Switch ON OFF IC6 PH4 PJ5I-1A
Toner Y
Empty
SW5 Black Toner Toner Empty Switch ON OFF IC6 PH7 PJ5I-5B
Empty Bk
PC28 Transfer Transfer 1st Image Transfer Not Retracted IC5 PI1 PJ17I-1A
Belt Unit Retraction Position Retracted
Separation Sensor
- Set - In position Out of IC5 PE7 PJ4I-8
position
PC23 2nd Transfer 2nd Image Transfer Not Retracted IC5 PI2 PJ14I-6B
Transfer Unit Pressure Position Retracted
Separation Sensor
PC29 Toner Waste Waste Toner Full Unblocked Blocked IC8 3Y PJ7I-7B
Collect Toner Detecting Sensor
PC18 Toner Box Waste Toner Bottle In position Out of IC5 PI4 PJ7I-5B
Set Set Sensor position
- Fusing Set Fusing Unit In position Out of IC5 PH5 PJ6I-7A
Unit position
- Fusing Web Not used Not used Not used - - -
Unit
PC7 Fuser Roller Fusing Pressure Pressed State IC5 PI6 PJ17I-3B
Separation Position Sensor other than
pressed
PC24 IR Home Org. Detect Sensor At home Out of Image - - PJ6C-2
Sensor home Process-
ing
SW10 Scanner Org. Cover Size Reset Switch Lowered Raised - - PJ7D-2
Board
Home (PWB-C)
Sensor
T-7
00.12.20
Board No. No. No.
1 0
PC25 Org. 15 Degree Original Cover Less than 15° or Image - - PJ2C-2B
Detect Sensor Detecting Sensor 15° more Process-
Sensor ing
PC30 Org. Detect Original Size Original Original - - PJ7C-1
Board
Sensor 1 Detecting Sensor loaded, not loaded (PWB-C)
FD1 not
mounted
Sensor 2 Detecting Sensor loaded, not loaded
FD2 not
mounted
FD2 not
mounted
FD3 not
mounted
FD3 not
mounted
CD1 not
mounted
CD1 not
mounted
CD2 not
mounted
T-8
00.12.20
2-3. How to Interpret “State Confirm” of “Tech. Rep. Mode”
Study the following to interpret data provided by “State Confirm” of “Tech. Rep. Mode.”
Note, however, that the specific data given hereunder is only for reference.
4004P054CA
(1) Table #
Vb-C/-M/-Y/-Bk
Output table value of each developing bias,
representing data applicable during making
copies.
Though the minus sign is not displayed, all
are negative values.
Standard: Color (C, M, and Y): Around -400 V
Black (Bk): Around -800 V
If the image is light, the value becomes
great.
If the image is dark, the value becomes
small.
4004P055CA
Used as a means of correcting image quality
problems.
Vg-C/-M/-Y/-Bk
Output table value of each PC Drum Charge
Corona grid mesh, representing data appli-
cable during making copies.
Though the minus sign is not displayed, all
are negative values.
Standard: Color (C, M, and Y): Around -500 V
Black (Bk): Around -900 V
If the image is light, the value becomes
great.
If the image is dark, the value becomes
small.
4004P056CA
Used as a means of correcting image quality
problems.
T-9
00.12.20
(2) Level History 1
ATDC-C/-M/-Y/-Bk
Displays T/C ratios.
The value is displayed in units of 0.01 %.
Target value:
Color (C, M, and Y) T/C: 5 ±1 %
Black (Bk) T/C: 4.5 ±1 %
AIDC1/2
Displays the AIDC Sensor output values.
The value is displayed in units of 0.01 V.
Normally, the value should be around 4.5 V
4004P057CA and the output can range from 0 V to 5 V.
Temp Upr./Lwr.
Displays the temperatures of the Upper and
Lower Fusing Rollers.
The value is displayed in units of 5 °C.
(3) Level History 2
AIDC Sensor Adjust Value 1/2

Displays the AIDC intensity adjustment val-
ues.
The values represent the intensity deter-
mined through AIDC intensity control.
The value is displayed in units of 1 step.
Intensity range: 0 to 255
4004P058CA
T-10
00.12.20
2-4. Paper Misfeed

When a paper misfeed occurs in the copier, the misfeed message, misfeed location, and
paper location are displayed on the Touch Panel.
3 1
7
8
9
6 5 11 10
12
11
13
11
14
11
15
4004P059CA
Display Misfeed/Paper Location Ref. Item No.

1 ADF take-up
2 ADF transport
3 ADF turnover/exit
See relevant
4 Horizontal Unit Option Service Manual.
Mailbin/Finishing option transport/
5
Finishing option exit
6 Mailbins
7 Duplex Unit transport (8)
8 Fusing/Exit (5)
9 2nd Image Transfer (4)
10 Manual Bypass take-up (2)
11 Vertical Transport/Duplex Unit take-up (3)
12 1st Drawer take-up (1)
13 2nd Drawer take-up (1)
3rd Drawer take-up/LCC take-up/
14 (6) (7)
LCC Lift 2 to 1 paper transport
15 4th Drawer take-up (6) (7)
<Misfeed Display Resetting Procedure>
Misfeed in copier Open the relevant door, clear the misfeed and
Misfeed in option remove paper left, and then close the door. (For
the option, clear the misfeed and then install the
option back up against the copier.)
T-11
00.12.20
2-5. Misfeed Detecting Sensor Layout

• System Mounted with AD-14 and PF-117
Exit Sensor (PC10)

2/ OHP Detecting Sensor (PC19)
Synchronizing Roller Sensor (PC17)
Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 (PI1)
Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2

(PC1)
Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Sensor
(PC15)
1st Drawer Double Feed Sensor
(PC13)
2nd Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor

(PC101)
2nd Drawer Double Feed Sensor

(PC105)
LCC Registration Sensor (RSEN)

LCC Paper Take-Up Sensor (PPS0)
4011T055AA
T-12
00.12.20
• System Mounted with AD-14 and PF-118
Exit Sensor (PC10)

OHP Detecting Sensor (PC19)
Synchronizing Roller Sensor (PC17)
Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 (PI1)
Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2

(PC1)
Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Sensor
(PC15)
1st Drawer Double Feed Sensor

(PC13)
2nd Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor
(PC101)
2nd Drawer Double Feed Sensor
(PC105)
3rd Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor
(PC1)
3rd Drawer Double Feed Sensor
(PC5)
4th Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor
(PC1)
4011T056AA
4th Drawer Double Feed Sensor
(PC5)
T-13
00.12.20
2-6. Types of Misfeed Detection and Detection Timing

• The following lists the types of misfeed detection and detection timings for different mis-
feed locations.
• The symbol “L” (for the leading edge) and “T” (for the trailing edge) given in ( ) indicate
the particular edge of the paper detected by the sensor.
<Copier Paper Take-Up Misfeed>
Type Detection Start Detection

Paper take-up 1st Drawer Paper Take-Up Synchronizing Roller Sensor (L)
failure detection Clutch energized
2nd Drawer Paper Take-Up 2nd Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor (L)
Clutch energized
1st Drawer size Synchronizing Roller Sensor (L) Synchronizing Roller Sensor (T)
error detection [When the paper size detected is ±20
mm or more of the size data fed from
the controller]
2nd Drawer size 2nd Drawer Paper Take-Up 2nd Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor (T)
error detection Sensor (L) [When the paper size detected is ±20
the controller]
Detection of Power Switch is turned ON, 2nd Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor
paper left in 2nd door or cover is opened and activated
Drawer closed, misfeed or malfunction
is reset
<Manual Bypass Take-Up Misfeed>

Bypass paper Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Synchronizing Roller Sensor (L)
take-up failure Sensor (L)
detection
Manual bypass Synchronizing Roller Sensor (L) Synchronizing Roller Sensor (T)
size error detec- [When the paper size detected is ±20
tion mm or more of the size data fed from
the controller]
Detection of Power Switch is turned ON, Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Sensor
paper left in door or cover is opened and activated
Manual Bypass closed, misfeed or malfunction
Table is reset
<Copier Vertical Transport Misfeed>

2nd Drawer 2nd Drawer Paper Take-Up Synchronizing Roller Sensor (L)
paper take-up Sensor (L)
failure
T-14
00.12.20
<2nd Image Transfer Misfeed>

2nd Image Synchronizing Roller Sensor (L) Synchronizing Roller Sensor (T)
Transfer mis- Exit Sensor (L)
feed detection
Detection of Power Switch is turned ON, Synchronizing Roller Sensor activated,
paper left at 2nd door or cover is opened and OHP Detecting Sensor activated
Image Transfer closed, misfeed or malfunction
is reset
<Exit Misfeed>

Exit misfeed Exit Sensor activated (L) Exit Sensor deactivated (T)
Exit Sensor deactivated (T) Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 (L)
Detection of Power Switch is turned ON, Exit Sensor activated
paper left at exit door or cover is opened and
closed, misfeed or malfunction
is reset
<PF-118 Paper Take-Up Misfeed>

3rd Drawer size 3rd Drawer Paper Take-Up 3rd Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor (T)
the controller]
4th Drawer size 4th Drawer Paper Take-Up 4th Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor (T)
the controller]
Detection of Power Switch is turned ON, 3rd Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor
paper left in 3rd door or cover is opened and activated
is reset
Detection of Power Switch is turned ON, 4th Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor
paper left in 4th door or cover is opened and activated
is reset
T-15
00.12.20
<PF-117 Paper Take-Up Misfeed>

LCC misfeed LCC paper take-up request LCC Exit signal ON
detection
Lift 2 to 1 mis- LCC Paper Take-Up Request LCC Paper Take-Up Sensor activated,
feed detection LCC Paper Empty Sensor 1 activated,
Paper Standby Position Sensor acti-
vated
LCC vertical LCC Exit signal ON 2nd Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor (L)
transport mis-
feed detection
LCC size error 2nd Drawer Paper Take-Up 2nd Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor (T)
detection Sensor (L) [When the paper size detected is ±20
the controller]
Detection of Power Switch is turned ON, LCC Registration Sensor Paper-Left
paper left in door or cover is opened and Misfeed signal ON
LCC closed, misfeed or malfunction
is reset
<Duplex Paper Take-Up Misfeed>

Duplex paper Duplex paper take-up start Synchronizing Roller Sensor (L), Man-
take-up mis- ual Feed Paper Take-Up Sensor (L)
feed detection
Duplex trans- Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 (L)
port misfeed (L)
detection
Detection of Power Switch is turned ON, Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 acti-
paper left in door or cover is opened and vated, Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2
Duplex closed, misfeed or malfunction activated
is reset
T-16
00.12.20
2-7. Misfeed Troubleshooting Procedures

(1) Copier Paper Take-Up Misfeed
Relevant Electrical Parts

1st Drawer Paper Take-Up Clutch (CL1) 2nd Drawer Paper Take-Up Motor (M101)
2nd Drawer Paper Take-Up Clutch (CL101) Master Board (PWB-I)
Synchronizing Roller Sensor (PC17) DC Power Supply 1 (PU1)
Main Motor (M13) 2nd Drawer Control Board (PWB-A)
PU1
PJ7PU1-4(DC24 V)
PJ7PU1-5(GND)
PWB-I
PJ105
1 PJ13I-7A(M13 LOCK)
2 PJ13I-8A(M13 REM)
M13 3
4
5 PJ13I-9A(M13 CLK)
6 PJ13I-10A(DC5 V)
7 PJ13I-11A(GND)
8 PJ13I-12A(M13 CW/CCW)
CN63
1 12
PJ116
3 7 6 PJ14I-7A(DC5 V)
2 8 5 PJ14I-8A(GND)
PC17 1 9 4 PJ14I-9A(PC17 ON)
12 1
CN55
1 2 PJ15I-10A(DC24 V)
CL1 2 1 PJ15I-11A(CL1 REM)
CN1 PWB-A(2nd
– Tray)
1 2 PJ3A-13B(DC24 V)
CL101 2 1 PJ3A-14B(CL101 REM)
CN61
4 1 –)
PJ5A-4( B
3 2 PJ5A-3(B)
M101 2 3 –)
PJ5A-2( A
1 4 PJ5A-1(A)
4004C16TAD
T-17
00.12.20
Copier Paper Take-Up Misfeed Troubleshooting Procedures
• Paper is not taken up at all.
Step Check Item Result Action

1 Paper meets product specifications. NO Change paper.
2 Paper is curled, wavy, or damp. YES Change paper. Instruct user
in correct paper storage.
Install Paper Dehumidifying
Heater.
3 Edge Guide and Trailing Edge Stop are at NO Set as necessary.
correct position to accommodate paper.
4 Paper Take-Up Roll is deformed, worn, or YES Clean or change.
dirty with paper dust or other foreign matter.
5 Paper Lifting Plate is dirty, deformed, or YES Clean or change.
scratched.
6 Separator Pad is deformed, worn, or dirty YES Clean or change.
with paper dust or other foreign matter.
7 Separator Roll is deformed, worn, or dirty YES Clean or change.
8 Paper take-up guide plate is dirty, YES Clean or change.
deformed, or scratched.
9 Paper take-up guide plate is installed prop- NO Reinstall.
erly.
10 Paper Take-Up Roll turns when the Start NO Correct drive coupling (cou-
key is pressed with the 1st Drawer selected. pling engagement, position of
drive transmitting pin).
11 1st Drawer Paper Take-Up Clutch operation YES Check for overload. Change
when the Start key is pressed with the 1st clutch.
Drawer selected: the voltage across PJ15I- NO Change Master Board.
11A on Master Board and GND is DC 24 V
when the clutch is deenergized and DC 0 V
when the clutch is energized.
key is pressed with the 2nd Drawer pling engagement, position of
selected. drive transmitting pin).
13 2nd Drawer Paper Take-Up Clutch opera- YES Check for overload. Change
tion when the Start key is pressed with the clutch.
2nd Drawer selected: the voltage across NO Change Control Board.
PJ3A-14B on Master Board and GND is DC
24 V when the clutch is deenergized and
DC 0 V when the clutch is energized.
T-18
00.12.20
(2) Manual Bypass Take-Up Misfeed

Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Sensor Synchronizing Roller Sensor (PC17)
(PC15) Synchronizing Roller Clutch (CL21)
Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Clutch (CL13) Master Board (PWB-I)
CN65
CN30 1 7
PWB-I
1 2 6 2 PJ14I-14A(DC24 V)
CL21 2 1 7 1 PJ14I-15A(CL21 REM)
CN63
1 12
PJ116
3 7 6 PJ14I-7B(DC5 V)
2 8 5 PJ14I-8B(GND)
PC17 1 9 4 PJ14I-9B(PC17 ON)
12 1
CN41 CN33
1 2 1 1 DC24 V
CL3 2 1 2 2 PJ15I-9A(CL3 REM)
3 3 PJ15I-7B(PC15 ON)
4 4 PJ15I-8B(GND)
5 5 PJ15I-9B(DC5 V)
PJ40
8 8
1
2
PC15 3
4004C17AD
T-19
00.12.20
Manual Bypass Take-Up Misfeed Troubleshooting Procedures
• Paper is not detected.

1 I/O check for Manual Feed Paper Take-Up YES Change Master Board.
Sensor operation when the Manual Bypass NO Correct actuator. Check sen-
Table is used: the voltage across PJ15I-7B sor connector connection.
on Master Board and GND is DC 0 V when Change sensor.
the sensor is unblocked and DC 5 V when
the sensor is blocked (paper present).

Heater.
3 Guide plate is dirty with paper dust, YES Clean or change.
4 Manual Bypass Take-Up Roll is dirty with YES Clean or change.
paper dust, deformed, or worn.
5 Manual Bypass Take-Up Roll turns when NO Correct drive coupling (drive
the Start key is pressed with the Manual transmitting gear engage-
Bypass Table used. ment).
6 Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Clutch opera- YES Check for overload. Change
tion when the Manual Feed Paper Take-Up clutch.
Sensor is blocked with the Manual Bypass NO Change Master Board.
Table used: the voltage across PJ15I-9A on
Master Board and GND is DC 24 V when
the clutch is deenergized and DC 0 V when
the clutch is energized.
T-20
00.12.20
• Paper is at a stop at the vertical transport section.

2 Synchronizing Rollers are dirty with paper YES Clean or change.
dust, deformed, or worn.
3 Paper Dust Remover is deformed or worn. NO Change Paper Dust Remover
Unit.
4 Paper Dust Remover is installed properly. NO Reinstall Paper Dust
Remover Unit.
5 An adequate length of loop is formed before NO Adjust “Paper Loop.” (See
the Synchronizing Rollers. ADJUSTMENT.)
6 I/O check for Synchronizing Roller Sensor YES Change Master Board.
operation when the Manual Bypass Table is NO Correct actuator. Check sen-
used: the voltage across PJ14I-9B on Mas- sor connector connection.
ter Board and GND is DC 0 V when the sen- Change sensor.
sor is unblocked (paper present) and DC 5
V when the sensor is blocked.
7 Synchronizing Rollers turn when the Start NO Correct drive coupling (drive
key is pressed with the Manual Bypass transmitting gear engage-
Table used. ment).
8 Synchronizing Roller Clutch operation when YES Check for overload. Change
the Manual Bypass Table is used: the volt- clutch.
age across PJ15I-9A on Master Board and NO Change Master Board.
GND after the Manual Feed Paper Take-Up
Clutch has been energized is DC 24 V
9 Size error display after the misfeed display YES Check paper size.
has been reset.
T-21
00.12.20
(3) Copier Vertical Transport Misfeed

Synchronizing Roller Sensor (PC17) Main Motor (M13)
2nd Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor 2nd Drawer Paper Take-Up Motor (M101)
(PC101) Master Board (PWB-I)
Synchronizing Roller Clutch (CL21) DC Power Supply 1 (PU1)
1st Drawer Paper Take-Up Clutch (CL1) 2nd Drawer Control Board (PWB-A)
2nd Drawer Paper Take-Up Clutch (CL101)
PU1
PJ7PU1-4(DC24 V)
PJ7PU1-5(GND)
PWB-I
PJ105
2 PJ13I-8A(M13 REM)
M13 3
4
5 PJ13I-9A(M13 CLK)
6 PJ13I-10A(DC5 V)
7 PJ13I-11A(GND)
CN65
CN30 1 7
1 2 6 2 PJ14I-14A(DC24 V)
CL21 2 1 7 1 PJ14I-15A(CL21 REM)
CN63
1 12
PJ116
3 7 6 PJ14I-7A(DC5 V)
2 8 5 PJ14I-8A(GND)
PC17 1 9 4 PJ14I-9A(PC17 ON)
12 1
CN55
1 2 PJ15I-10A(DC24 V)
CL1 2 1 PJ15I-11A(CL1 REM)
PJ12 PWB-A(2nd
– Tray)
3 PJ3A-3A(DC5 V)
2 PJ3A-4A(GND)
PC101 1 PJ3A-5A(PC101 ON)
CN1
1 2 PJ3A-13B(DC24 V)
CL101 2 1 PJ3A-14B(CL101 REM)
CN61
4 1 –)
PJ5A-4( B
3 2 PJ5A-3(B)
M101 2 3 –)
PJ5A-2( A
1 4 PJ5A-1(A)
4004C18TAD
T-22
00.12.20
Copier Vertical Transport Misfeed Troubleshooting Procedures
• Paper is at a stop at the vertical transport section.

1 Synchronizing Rollers are deformed or YES Check type of paper being
worn. used.
2 Paper dust deposits on Synchronizing Roll- YES Clean Synchronizing Rollers.
ers. Check Paper Dust Remover
for proper function.
3 Paper Dust Remover is deformed or worn. YES Change Paper Dust Remover
Unit.
4 Paper Dust Remover is installed properly. NO Reinstall Paper Dust
Remover Unit.
5 An adequate length of loop is formed before NO Adjust “Paper Loop.” (See
the Synchronizing Rollers. ADJUSTMENT.)
6 Vertical transport guide plate is dirty, YES Clean or change.
7 I/O check for Synchronizing Roller Sensor YES Change Master Board.
operation: the voltage across PJ14I-9B on NO Correct actuator. Check sen-
Master Board and GND is DC 0 V (paper sor connector for connection.
present) when the sensor is unblocked and Change sensor.
DC 5 V when the sensor is blocked.
key is pressed with the 1st Drawer selected. transmitting gear engage-
ment).
the 1st Drawer is used: the voltage across clutch.
PJ14I-14A on Master Board and GND is DC NO Change Master Board.
10 2nd Drawer Vertical Transport Roller 1 is YES Clean or change.
dirty with paper dust, deformed, or
scratched.
11 2nd Drawer vertical transport guide plate is YES Clean or change.
dirty, deformed, or scratched.
key is pressed with the 2nd Drawer transmitting gear engage-
selected. ment).
the 2nd Drawer is used: the voltage across clutch.
PJ14I-14A on Master Board and GND is DC NO Change Master Board.
T-23
00.12.20

14 2nd Drawer Paper Take-Up Motor turns NO Correct drive coupling (cou-
when the Start key is pressed with the 2nd pling engagement, position of
Drawer selected. drive transmitting pin).
Change motor. Change 2nd
Drawer Control Board.
15 Size error display after the misfeed display YES Check paper size. Check
has been reset. positioning of the Edge Guide
and Trailing Edge Stop.
T-24
00.12.20
(4) 2nd Image Transfer Misfeed

Exit Sensor (PC10) Fusing Drive Motor (M14)
Synchronizing Roller Sensor (PC17) Master Board (PWB-I)
Main Motor (M13) DC Power Supply 1 (PU1)
PU1
PJ7PU1-4(DC24 V)
PJ7PU1-5(GND)
PJ106 PWB-I
2 PJ13I-2A(M14 REM)
M14 3
4
5 PJ13I-3A(M14 CLK)
6 PJ13I-4A(DC5 V)
7 PJ13I-5A(GND)
8 PJ13I-6A(M14 CCM/CM)
PJ105
2 PJ13I-8A(M13 REM)
M13 3
4
5 PJ13I-9A(M13 CLK)
6 PJ13I-10A(DC5 V)
7 PJ13I-11A(GND)
PJ133 CN17
3 1 3 PJ3I-12A(DC5 V)
2 2 2 PJ3I-13A(GND)
PC10 1 3 1 PJ3I-14A(PC10 ON)
CN63
1 12
PJ116
3 7 6 PJ14I-7B(DC5 V)
2 8 5 PJ14I-8B(GND)
PC17 1 9 4 PJ14I-9B(PC17 ON)
12 1 4004C20TAB
T-25
00.12.20
2nd Image Transfer Misfeed Troubleshooting Procedures
• Paper is at a stop at the 2nd Image Transfer section.

1 Vertical transport guide plate is dirty, YES Clean or change.
2 Image Transfer Roller Unit is not installed YES Reinstall.
properly.
3 Pre-Image Transfer Guide Plate is dirty, YES Clean or change Image
deformed, or scratched. Transfer Roller Unit.
Seal is separated.
4 Transfer Belt is driven when the Start key is NO Correct drive coupling (drive
pressed. transmitting gear engage-
ment). Reinstall Transfer Belt
Unit.
5 Transfer Belt is deformed or damaged. YES Change Transfer Belt Unit.
6 Transfer Roller turns when the Start key is NO Correct drive coupling (drive
ment). Reinstall Transfer
Roller Unit.
7 Transfer Roller is dirty with paper dust or YES Clean or change Image
other foreign matter, deformed, or worn. Transfer Roller Unit.
8 Fusing Rollers turn when the Start key is NO Correct drive coupling (drive
ment). Correct the installed
position of Fusing Unit.
9 Paper winds around Transfer Belt. YES Readjust Paper Separator
Fingers. Readjust “Top Mar-
gin.”
10 Paper winds around Transfer Roller. YES Change Transfer Roller Unit.
11 I/O check for Exit Sensor operation: the YES Change Master Board.
voltage across PJ3I-14A on Master Board NO Correct actuator. Check sen-
and GND is DC 0 V (paper present) when sor connector for connection.
the sensor is unblocked and DC 5 V when Change sensor.
the sensor is blocked.
T-26
00.12.20
(5) Exit Misfeed

Exit Sensor (PC10) Master Board (PWB-I)
Fusing Drive Motor (M14) DC Power Supply 1 (PU1)
PU1
PJ7PU1-4(DC24 V)
PJ7PU1-5(GND)
PJ106 PWB-I
2 PJ13I-2A(M14 REM)
M14 3
4
5 PJ13I-3A(M14 CLK)
6 PJ13I-4A(DC5 V)
7 PJ13I-5A(GND)
PJ133 CN17
3 1 3 PJ3I-12A(DC5 V)
2 2 2 PJ3I-13A(GND)
PC10 1 3 1 PJ3I-14A(PC10 ON)
4004C21TAA
T-27
00.12.20
Exit Misfeed Troubleshooting Procedures
• Paper is at a stop at the 2nd Image Transfer section.

1 Fusing guide plate is dirty, deformed, or YES Clean or change.
damaged.
2 Fusing Rollers are dirty, deformed, or YES Clean or change Fusing Unit.
scratched.
3 Fusing Paper Separator Fingers are dirty, YES Clean, correct, or change.
deformed, or worn.
4 Fusing Exit Roller is dirty, deformed, or YES Clean or change.
scratched.
5 Fusing Rollers turn when the Start key is NO Correct drive coupling (drive
ment). Correct installed posi-
tion of Fusing Unit. Change
Fusing Unit.
6 I/O check for Exit Sensor operation: the YES Change Master Board.
voltage across PJ3I-14A on Master Board NO Correct actuator. Check sen-
and GND is DC 0 V (paper present) when sor connector for connection.
the sensor is unblocked and DC 5 V when Change sensor.
the sensor is blocked.
7 Exit Turnover Roller is dirty, deformed, or YES Clean or change.
scratched.
8 Exit Turnover Roller turns when the Start NO Correct drive coupling (roller
key is pressed. position).
T-28
00.12.20
(6) PF-118 Paper Take-Up Misfeed

3rd Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC1) 3rd Drawer Paper Take-Up Motor (M1)
4th Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC1) 4th Drawer Paper Take-Up Motor (M1)
3rd Drawer Paper Take-Up Clutch (CL1) 3rd Drawer Control Board (PWB-A)
4th Drawer Paper Take-Up Clutch (CL1) 4th Drawer Control Board (PWB-A)
PJ12 PWB-A(3rd
– Tray)
3 PJ3A-3A(DC5 V)
2 PJ3A-4A(GND)
CN73
1 2 PJ3A-13B(DC24 V)
CL1 2 1 PJ3A-14B(CL1 REM)
CN61
4 1 –)
PJ5A-4( B
3 2 PJ5A-3(B)
M1 2 3 –)
PJ5A-2( A
1 4 PJ5A-1(A)
PJ12 PWB-A(4th
– Tray)
3 PJ3A-3A(DC5 V)
2 PJ3A-4A(GND)
CN73
1 2 PJ3A-13B(DC24 V)
CL1 2 1 PJ3A-14B(CL1 REM)
CN61
4 1 –)
PJ5A-4( B
3 2 PJ5A-3(B)
M1 2 3 –)
PJ5A-2( A
1 4 PJ5A-1(A)
4004C22TAB
T-29
00.12.20
PF-118 Paper Take-Up Misfeed Troubleshooting Procedures

Heater.
3 Edge Guide and Trailing Edge Stop are at NO Set as necessary.
correct position to accommodate paper.
4 Paper Take-Up Roll is deformed, worn, or YES Clean or change.
dirty with paper dust or other foreign matter.
5 Paper Lifting Plate is dirty, deformed, or YES Clean or change.
scratched.
8 Paper take-up guide plate is installed prop- NO Reinstall.
erly.
key is pressed with the 3rd Drawer pling engagement, position of
10 3rd Drawer Paper Take-Up Clutch opera- YES Check for overload. Change
3rd Drawer selected: the voltage across NO Change 3rd Drawer Control
PJ3A-14B on Control Board and GND is DC Board.
11 3rd Drawer Paper Take-Up Motor turns NO Correct drive coupling (drive
when the Start key is pressed with the 3rd transmitting gear engage-
Drawer selected. ment). Change motor.
Change 3rd Drawer Control
Board.
key is pressed with the 4th Drawer pling engagement, position of
13 4th Drawer Paper Take-Up Clutch opera- YES Check for overload. Change
4th Drawer selected: the voltage across NO Change 4th Drawer Control
PJ3A-14B on Control Board and GND is DC Board.
T-30
00.12.20

14 4th Drawer Paper Take-Up Motor turns NO Correct drive coupling (drive
when the Start key is pressed with the 4th transmitting gear engage-
Drawer selected. ment). Change motor.
Change 4th Drawer Control
Board.
• Paper is at a stop at the Vertical Transport Rollers.

1 Paper take-up guide plate or vertical trans- YES Clean, correct, or change.
port guide plate is dirty or deformed.
2 Vertical Transport Rollers are dirty with YES Clean or change.
paper dust, deformed, or worn.
3 I/O check for 3rd Drawer Paper Take-Up YES Change 3rd Drawer Control
Sensor operation when the 3rd Drawer is Board.
used: the voltage across PJ3A-5A on Con- NO Correct actuator. Check sen-
trol Board and GND is DC 0 V when the sor connector for connection.
sensor is unblocked and DC 5 V (paper Change sensor.
present) when the sensor is blocked.
4 Vertical Transport Roller 3 turns when the NO Correct drive coupling (drive
Start key is pressed with 3rd Drawer transmitting gear engage-
selected. ment, clutch spring opera-
tion).
5 I/O check for 4th Drawer Paper Take-Up YES Change 4th Drawer Control
Sensor operation when the 4th Drawer is Board.
used: the voltage across PJ3A-5A on Con- NO Correct actuator. Check sen-
trol Board and GND is DC 0 V when the sor connector for connection.
sensor is unblocked and DC 5 V (paper Change sensor.
6 Vertical Transport Roller 4 turns when the NO Correct drive coupling (drive
Start key is pressed with 4th Drawer transmitting gear engage-
selected. ment, clutch spring opera-
tion).
7 Size error display after the misfeed display YES Check paper size.
has been reset.
T-31
00.12.20
(7) PF-117 Paper Take-Up Misfeed

LCC Paper Take-Up Sensor (PPS0) LCC Separator Clutch (BCL)
Paper Standby Position Sensor (S1) LCC Registration Clutch (RCL)
LCC Registration Sensor (RSEN) LCC Transport Motor (HMOT)
LCC Paper Take-Up Clutch 1 (P1CL) LCC Control Board (PWB-A)
LCC Paper Take-Up Clutch 2 (P2CL)
PJ10 PWB-A(LCC Tray)

1 CN3A-6(S1 LED)
S1 2 CN3A-5(S1 ON)
3 CN3A-4(DC5 V)
PJ7
1 CN4A-3(RSEN LED)
RSEN 2 CN4A-2(RSEN ON)
3 CN4A-1(DC5 V)
PJ4
1 CN4A-12(PPSO LED)
PPSO 2 CN4A-11(PPSO ON)
3 CN4A-10(DC5 V)
PJ4
1 CN6A-6(HMOT CLK)
2 CN6A-5(DC5 V)
HMOT 3 CN6A-4(HMOT SIG)
4 CN6A-3(CTND)
5
6 CN6A-1(DC24 V)
CN14
2 1 CN7A-2(BCL ON)
BCL 1 2 CN7A-1(DC24 V)
CN13
2 1 CN7A-4(RCL ON)
RCL 1 2 CN7A-3(DC24 V)
CN12
2 1 CN7A-6(P2CL ON)
P2CL 1 2 CN7A-5(DC24 V)
CN11
2 1 CN7A-8(P1CL ON)
P1CL 1 2 CN7A-7(DC24 V)
4004C23TAB
T-32
00.12.20
PF-117 Paper Take-Up Misfeed Troubleshooting Procedures
• Paper is not taken up at all. (Lift 1)

Heater.
3 Lift is dirty, deformed, or damaged. YES Clean or change.
4 Paper Take-Up Roll 1 is dirty, deformed, or YES Clean or change.
scratched.
5 Paper Take-Up Roll 1 turns when the Start NO Correct drive coupling (drive
key is pressed with Lift 1 used. transmitting gear engage-
ment, spring operation, belt
tension).
6 LCC Paper Take-Up Clutch 1 operation YES Check for overload. Change
when the Start key is pressed with Lift 1 clutch.
used: the voltage across CN7A-8 on LCC NO Change LCC Control Board.
Control Board and GND is DC 24 V when
• Paper is not taken up at all. (Lift 2)

Heater.
3 Lift is dirty, deformed, or damaged. YES Clean or change.
4 Paper Take-Up Roll 2 is dirty, deformed, or YES Clean or change.
scratched.
5 Paper Take-Up Roll 2 turns when the Start NO Correct drive coupling (drive
key is pressed with Lift 2 used. transmitting gear engage-
ment, spring operation, belt
tension).
6 LCC Paper Take-Up Clutch 2 operation YES Check for overload. Change
when the Start key is pressed with Lift 2 clutch.
used: the voltage across PJ7A-6 on LCC NO Change LCC Control Board.
T-33
00.12.20
• Paper is stationary at the Vertical Transport Roller.

1 Feed Roll is deformed, worn, or dirty with YES Clean or change.
paper dust or other foreign matter.
deformed, or damaged.
4 Vertical Transport Roller is dirty with paper YES Clean or change.
dust, deformed, or worn.
5 Vertical transport guide plate is dirty or YES Clean, correct, or change.
deformed.
6 I/O check for Paper Standby Position Sen- YES Change LCC Control Board.
sor operation when the LCC Drawer is NO Check sensor connector for
used: the voltage across PJ3A-5 on LCC connection. Change sensor.
there is reflected light and DC 0 V when
there is no reflected light.
7 Feed Roll turns when the Start key is NO Correct drive coupling (drive
pressed with the LCC Drawer selected. transmitting gear engage-
ment, belt tension).
8 Separator Roll turns when the Start key is NO Correct drive coupling (spring
pressed with the LCC Drawer selected. operation).
9 LCC Separator Clutch operation when the YES Check for overload. Change
Start key is pressed with the LCC Drawer clutch.
selected: the voltage across CN7A-2 on NO Change LCC Control Board.
LCC Control Board and GND is DC 24 V
10 I/O check for LCC Registration Sensor YES Change LCC Control Board.
operation when the LCC Drawer is used: NO Check sensor connector for
the voltage across CN4A-2 on LCC Control connection. Change sensor.
Board and GND is DC 5 V when there is
reflected light and DC 0 V when there is no
reflected light.
11 Vertical Transport Rollers turn when the NO Correct drive coupling (drive
Start key is pressed with the LCC Drawer transmitting gear engage-
selected. ment).
12 LCC Registration Clutch operation when YES Check for overload. Change
the Start key is pressed with the LCC clutch.
Drawer selected: the voltage across CN7A- NO Change LCC Control Board.
4 on LCC Control Board and GND is DC 24
V when the clutch is deenergized and DC 0
V when the clutch is energized.
T-34
00.12.20
(8) Duplex Paper Take-Up Misfeed

Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 (PI1) Duplex Unit Transport Motor (M2)
Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 (PC1) Switchback Motor (M1)
Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Sensor Duplex Control Board (PWB-A)
(PC15) Master Board (PWB-I)
Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Clutch (CL3)
DC24 V
CN41 CN33
1 2 1 1 PWB-I
CL3 2 1 2 2 PJ15A-9A(CL3 REM)
3 3 PJ15A-7B(PC15 ON)
4 4 PJ15A-8B(GND)
5 5 PJ15A-9B(DC5 V)
PJ40 8 8
1
2
PC15 3
PWB-A
–)
PJ3A-1( B
PJ3A-2(B)
M1 –)
PJ3A-3( A
PJ3A-4(A)
–)
PJ2A-1( B
PJ2A-2(B)
M2 –)
PJ2A-3( A
PJ2A-4(A)
PJ10
3 PJ4A-1(DC5 V)
2 PJ4A-2(GND)
PC1 1 PJ4A-3(PC1 ON)
PI1
4004C24TAD
4004C24TAD
T-35
00.12.20
Duplex Paper Take-Up Misfeed Troubleshooting Procedures
• Paper is at a stop in the Duplex Unit transport section.

1 Transport Roller is dirty, deformed, or worn. YES Clean or change.
2 Transport Roll is dirty, deformed, or worn. YES Clean or change.
3 Transport guide is dirty, deformed, or dam- YES Clean, correct, or change.
aged.
4 Torn piece of paper left at the transport sec- YES Clean.
tion.
5 Duplex Unit Transport Roller 1 turns when NO Correct drive coupling (drive
the Start key is pressed with the Duplex transmitting gear engage-
Unit used. ment).
6 Switchback Motor turns when the Start key NO Correct drive coupling.
is pressed with the Duplex Unit used. Change motor. Change
Duplex Control Board.
Unit used. ment).
Unit used. ment).
9 Duplex Unit Transport Motor turns when the NO Correct drive coupling.
Start key is pressed with the Duplex Unit Change motor. Change
used. Duplex Control Board.
• Paper is at a stop at the Manual Bypass take-up section.

1 I/O check for Manual Feed Paper Take-Up YES Change Master Board.
Sensor operation when the Manual Bypass NO Correct actuator. Check sen-
Table is used: the voltage across PJ15I-7B sor connector for connection.
on Master Board and GND is DC 0 V when Change sensor.
the sensor is unblocked and DC 5 V (paper
2 Manual Bypass Paper Take-Up Roll is dirty YES Clean or change.
with paper dust, deformed, or worn.
3 Manual Bypass Paper Take-Up Roll turns NO Correct drive coupling (drive
when the Start key is pressed with the Man- transmitting gear engage-
ual Bypass Table used. ment).
4 Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Clutch opera- YES Check for overload. Change
tion when Manual Feed Paper Take-Up clutch.
Sensor is unblocked with the Manual NO Change Master Board.
Bypass Table used: the voltage across
PJ15I-9A on Master Board and GND is DC
T-36
00.12.20
3. MALFUNCTIONS
The copier’s CPU performs a self-diagnostics function that, on detecting a malfunction,
gives the corresponding malfunction code and maintenance call mark on the Touch Panel.
Resetting a Malfunction
• Press the Trouble Reset Switch on the Tech. Rep. Setting Switches Board to reset the
following malfunctions: IR-related malfunctions (except the following, i.e., C3310: CCD
clamp gain adjustment failure; C3700: IR Cooling Fan Motor 1 turning at abnormal tim-
ing; C3710: IR Cooling Fan Motor 2 turning at abnormal timing; C3720: Original Glass
Cooling Fan Motor turning at abnormal timing) and fusing-related malfunctions.
• For any other malfunctions, open and close the Front Door or turn OFF and ON the
Power Switch.
<Warning>
4004P060CA
If the maintenance call mark appears, touch it to view a screen (“State Confirm”)
that shows data in greater details.
4004P045BA
4004P061CA
T-37
00.12.20
3-1. Detection Timing by Warning Code

• If an image stabilization or IR-related fault occurs, the corresponding warning code
appears.
• Refer to the following table and take necessary action to remedy the faulty spot.
Code Fault Detection Timing

P-5 AIDC Sensor failure (AIDC • All readings of the detection points are 4.8 V or
Sensor 1) more or the selected reading is 1.0 V or less dur-
ing AIDC Sensor intensity correction.
P-6 Cyan Imaging Unit failure • The results of converting the adjustment pattern
P-7 Magenta Imaging Unit fail- reading to reflection density on paper fall short of
ure the specified value during max. density adjustment
(Vg/Vb adjustment).
P-8 Yellow Imaging Unit failure
• The ATDC Sensor output when 0 gradation mea-
P-9 Black Imaging Unit failure surement is taken is 253 (4.96 V) or more during γ
correction.
• The result of converting the adjustment pattern
reading to reflection density on paper is 0.4 V or
less.
P-21 Color Shift Correction fail- • The calculated value of the CD color shift correc-
ure (test pattern failure) tion amount is more or less than the specified
value.
• The calculated value of the FD color shift correc-
tion amount is more or less than the specified
value.
P-22 Color Shift Correction fail- • The CD registration distance is greater than the
ure (correction amount fail- specified range during registration correction.
ure) • The FD registration distance is greater than the
specified range during registration correction.
• Skew correction amount is more than the specified
value.
P-23 Cyan 1st Image Transfer • The average value of voltage readings taken by
ATVC Failure the ATVC adjustment circuit is less than 0.5 V dur-
P-24 Magenta 1st Image Trans- ing ATVC adjustment.
fer ATVC Failure • The average value of voltage readings taken by
the ATVC adjustment circuit is 0.5 V or more and
P-25 Yellow 1st Image Transfer
less than 0.6 V during ATVC adjustment. Or there
ATVC Failure
are five consecutive adjustment sequences, each
P-26 Black 1st Image Transfer exceeding 4.6 V. (ATVC adjustment is made when
ATVC Failure power is turned OFF and ON. A warning is issued
P-27 2nd Image Transfer ATVC through a minimum of five sequences of turning
Failure power OFF and ON.)
P-28 AIDC Sensor failure (AIDC • All readings of the detection points are 4.8 V or
Sensor 2) more or the selected reading is 1.0 V or less dur-
ing AIDC Sensor intensity correction.
T-38
00.12.20
Code Fault Detection Timing

S-1 Gain adjustment failure • Each gain adjustment value for R, G, or B is 240
or more when a gain adjustment is made after the
Power Switch has been turned ON.
• Lamp adjustment value is 255 and, at the same
time, the target value cannot be achieved through
gain adjustment.
S-2 Intensity adjustment failure • Lamp voltage adjustment value Dx = 255 when a
lamp voltage adjustment is made after the Power
Switch has been turned ON and, at the same time,
the target value cannot be achieved through the
adjustment.
T-39
00.12.20
3-2. Detection Timing by Malfunction Code
Code Description Detection Timing

C0000 Main Motor’s failure to turn The Main Motor Lock signal remains faulty for a pre-
determined continuous period of time while the Main
Motor is turning.
C0001 Main Motor turning at The Main Motor Lock signal remains faulty for a pre-
abnormal timing determined continuous period of time while the Main
Motor remains stationary.
C0010 Imaging Unit Motor C’s The Lock signal remains faulty for a continuous 1-
failure to turn sec. period after the motor rotation has stabilized
and before the motor starts decelerating.
C0011 Imaging Unit Motor C turn- The Lock signal remains faulty for a continuous 1-
ing at abnormal timing sec. period after the motor has completely stopped
and before the motor starts accelerating.
C0012 Imaging Unit Motor M’s The Lock signal remains faulty for a continuous 1-
C0013 Imaging Unit Motor M turn- The Lock signal remains faulty for a continuous 1-
C0014 Imaging Unit Motor Y’s fail- The Lock signal remains faulty for a continuous 1-
ure to turn sec. period after the motor rotation has stabilized
C0015 Imaging Unit Motor Y turn- The Lock signal remains faulty for a continuous 1-
C0016 Imaging Unit Motor Bk’s The Lock signal remains faulty for a continuous 1-
C0017 Imaging Unit Motor Bk The Lock signal remains faulty for a continuous 1-
turning at abnormal timing sec. period after the motor has completely stopped
C0040 Fusing Cooling Fan Motor A Fusing Cooling Fan Lock signal is detected for a
2’s failure to turn continuous 3-sec. period while Fusing Cooling Fan
Motor 2 is turning.
C0046 Fusing Cooling Fan Motor A Fusing Cooling Fan Lock signal is detected for a
1’s failure to turn continuous 3-sec. period while the Fusing Cooling
Fan Motor is turning.
C004C Ozone Ventilation Fan An Ozone Fan Lock signal is detected for a continu-
Motor’s failure to turn ous 3-sec. period while the Ozone Ventilation Fan
Motor is turning.
C004E Power Supply Cooling Fan A Power Supply Cooling Fan Lock signal is detected
Motor’s failure to turn for a continuous 3-sec. period while the Power Sup-
ply Cooling Fan Motor is turning.
T-40
00.12.20

C0060 Fusing Drive Motor’s fail- A Fusing Drive Motor Lock signal remains faulty for a
ure to turn predetermined continuous period of time while the
Fusing Drive Motor is turning.
C0061 Fusing Drive Motor turn- The Fusing Drive Motor Lock signal remains faulty
ing at abnormal timing for a predetermined continuous period of time while
the Fusing Drive Motor remains stationary.
C0094 2nd Image Transfer Roller • The 2nd Image Transfer Pressure Position Sensor
pressure/retraction failure is not activated (retracted position) within 1 sec.
after the 2nd Image Transfer Roller has started its
retracting motion.
• The 2nd Image Transfer Pressure Position Sensor
is not deactivated (not the retracted position)
within 1 sec. after the 2nd Image Transfer Roller
has started its pressing motion.
C0096 1st Image Transfer Roller • The 1st Image Transfer Retraction Position Sen-
pressure/retraction failure sor is not activated (retracted position) within 3
sec. after the 1st Image Transfer Pressure/Retrac-
tion Motor has started turning.
• The 1st Image Transfer Retraction Position Sen-
sor is not deactivated (pressed position) within 1.5
sec. after the 1st Image Transfer Pressure/Retrac-
tion Motor has started turning.
C0098 Fusing Roller pressure/ • No change is observed in the encoder pulse even
retraction failure after the lapse of 0.5 sec. after the Fusing Pres-
sure/Retraction Motor has started turning for
retraction direction during retraction control.
• No change is observed in the encoder pulse even
after the lapse of 0.5 sec. after the Fusing Pres-
sure/Retraction Motor has started turning for pres-
sure direction during pressure control.
• The Fusing Pressure Position Sensor is not acti-
vated (pressed position) even when 31 motor
encoder pulses have been counted after the Fus-
ing Pressure/Retraction Motor has started turning
for pressure direction during pressure control.
C0200 Cyan PC Drum Charge The SCD signal remains inactive for a continuous 1-
Corona malfunction sec. period while charge corona is being output (i.e.,
the Remote signal is being turned ON).
C0202 Magenta PC Drum Charge The SCD signal remains inactive for a continuous 1-
C0204 Yellow PC Drum Charge The SCD signal remains inactive for a continuous 1-
C0206 Black PC Drum Charge The SCD signal remains inactive for a continuous 1-
T-41
00.12.20

C0400 Exposure Lamp’s failure to A Lamp-Out Detection signal is ON after the lapse of
turn ON 5 sec. after the Exposure Lamp has been turned ON.
C0410 Exposure Lamp turning CCD Sensor outputs are written in line RAM at the
ON at abnormal timing end of a scan job and the average of these readings
exceeds a predetermined value.
C0500 Heating Roller warm-up • Fusing Thermistor 1 does not detect a predeter-
failure mined temperature and the warm-up cycle is not
(Fusing Thermistor 1) completed within the period of 9 min. 10 sec. after
the warm-up cycle has been started.
• The temperature of Fusing Thermistor 1 does not
rise to a level more than the predetermined output
value within 30 sec. after the warm-up cycle has
started.
C0501 Lower Fusing Roller • The temperature of Fusing Thermistor 2 does not
Heater Lamp warm-up fail- reach 100 °C within 180 sec. after the warm-up
ure cycle has started.
(Fusing Thermistor 2) • The temperature of Fusing Thermistor 1 does not
rise to a level more than the predetermined output
value within 130 sec. after the warm-up cycle has
started.
C0510 Heating Roller abnormally • The temperature of Fusing Thermistor 1 remains
low temperature below 120 °C for 1 sec. or more in the standby
(Fusing Thermistor 1) state.
• The temperature of Fusing Thermistor 1 remains
below 130 °C for 1 sec. or more during a print
cycle.
below 90 °C for 1 sec. or more in the Energy
Saver mode.
C0511 Lower Fusing Roller • The temperature of Fusing Thermistor 2 remains
Heater Lamp abnormally below 100 °C for 1 sec. or more in the standby
low temperature state.
(Fusing Thermistor 2) • The temperature of Fusing Thermistor 2 remains
below 100 °C for 1 sec. or more during a print
cycle.
below 100 °C for 1 sec. or more in the Energy
Saver mode.
C0520 Heating Roller abnormally The temperature of Fusing Thermistor 1 remains
high temperature above 220 °C for 1 sec. or more at all times.
(Fusing Thermistor 1)
C0521 Lower Fusing Roller The temperature of Fusing Thermistor 2 remains
Heater Lamp abnormally above 190 °C for 1 sec. or more at all times.
high temperature
(Fusing Thermistor 2)
T-42
00.12.20

C0650 Scanner Home Sensor • The Scanner Home Sensor fails to detect the
malfunction Scanner at its home position though the Scanner
is so located.
• The Scanner Home Sensor fails to detect the
Scanner though the motor has been energized to
move the Scanner over the maximum distance.
• The Scanner Home Sensor detects the Scanner at
its home position though the Scanner has moved
5 mm away from the home position.
C0660 Scanner overrun failure The Scanner Home Sensor detects the Scanner at
its home position during a period from when the
prescan command and scan preparation command
have been executed to when home return command
is executed.
C0990 LCC Lift-Up Motor mal-
function
C0991 LCC Lift 1 ascent motion
failure
C0995 LCC Transport Motor mal-
function
C0999 LCC Lift 2 ascent motion
failure
C0B00 Finishing option transport
drive malfunction
See the relevant Option Service Manual.
C0B20 Stapling Unit CD drive
malfunction
C0B30 Finishing option Paper
Aligning Bar moving mech-
anism malfunction
C0B48 Finishing option Exit Roll
pressure/retraction failure
C0B4A Finishing option Storage
Roller pressure/retraction
failure
T-43
00.12.20

C0B50 Finishing option stapling
mechanism 1
C0B54 Finishing option stapling
mechanism 2
C0B73 Finishing option punch
cam motor mechanism
malfunction
C0B78 Finishing option punch See the relevant Option Service Manual.
selector motor mecha-
nism malfunction
C0B80 Finishing option Shift
Motor mechanism mal-
function
C0BA0 Finishing option Elevator
Tray drive failure
C0F30 Abnormally low toner den- Toner density that is 2 % or more lower than the tar-
sity detected by Cyan get level is detected ten consecutive times during a
ATDC Sensor print cycle, ATVC, or image stabilization sequence.
C0F31 Abnormally high toner Toner density that is 4 % or more higher than the tar-
density detected by Cyan get level is detected ten consecutive times during a
sity detected by Magenta get level is detected ten consecutive times during a
density detected by get level is detected ten consecutive times during a
Magenta ATDC Sensor print cycle, ATVC, or image stabilization sequence.
sity detected by Yellow get level is detected ten consecutive times during a
density detected by Yellow get level is detected ten consecutive times during a
sity detected by Black get level is detected ten consecutive times during a
density detected by Black get level is detected ten consecutive times during a
C0F3A Cyan ATDC Sensor Cyan ATDC Sensor adjustment does not function
adjustment failure properly, failing to adjust to an appropriate value.
C0F3B Magenta ATDC Sensor Magenta ATDC Sensor adjustment does not function
C0F3C Yellow ATDC Sensor Yellow ATDC Sensor adjustment does not function
T-44
00.12.20

C0F3D Black ATDC Sensor Black ATDC Sensor adjustment does not function
C13C8 New Transfer Belt Unit The output from the new unit detecting terminal
resetting failure remains HIGH and the copier does not recognize
that a new unit has been installed.
1. After an image stabilization sequence is com-
pleted, the fuse blowout signal of the new unit is
set to a blowout state.
2. After the lapse of 2 sec. after step 1, the fuse
blowout signal is brought to a state where no
new units are installed.
3. After the lapse of 0.1 sec. after step 2, a new unit
check sequence is carried out.
A total of three cycles of steps 1 to 3 are carried out

and, if the copier fails to detect a new unit a third
time, a malfunction condition results.
C13CA New Fusing Unit resetting The output from the new unit detecting terminal
failure remains HIGH and the copier does not recognize
1. The fuse blowout signal of the new unit is set to a
blowout state.
2. After the lapse of 0.5 sec. after step 1, the fuse
A total of two cycles of steps 1 to 3 are carried out

and, if the copier fails to detect a new unit a second
C13CB New Fusing Web Unit The output from the new unit detecting terminal
blowout state.

T-45
00.12.20

C13CC New Oil Coating Unit The output from the new unit detecting terminal
blowout state.

C13D1 Cyan IU EEPROM failure EEPROM access error:
When EEPROM access control is executed, setting
1 “Start Flag” of GA register does not become ready
even after the lapse of a predetermined period of
time.
C13D2 Magenta IU EEPROM fail- EEPROM access error:
ure When EEPROM access control is executed, setting
time.
C13D3 Yellow IU EEPROM failure EEPROM access error:
time.
C13D4 Black IU EEPROM failure EEPROM access error:
time.
C3310 CCD clamp/gain adjust- • When clamp adjustment is made:
ment failure (AVE1 - AVE2) =< 4
• When gain adjustment is made:
The average of CCD Sensor output values is 1 or
less.
Dgain = 0
Dgain = 255
C3700 IR Cooling Fan Motor 1 A Lock signal is detected ten consecutive times
turning at abnormal timing when it is monitored at 0.01-sec. intervals while a
Fan Motor ON signal is being output and, at the
same time, after the lapse of 2 sec. or more after the
output of the Fan Motor ON signal has been started.
T-46
00.12.20

C3710 IR Cooling Fan Motor 2 A Lock signal is detected ten consecutive times
turning at abnormal timing when it is monitored at 0.01-sec. intervals while a
Fan Motor ON signal is being output and, at the
C3720 Original Glass Cooling Fan A Lock signal is detected ten consecutive times
Motor turning at abnormal when it is monitored at 0.01-sec. intervals while a
timing Fan Motor ON signal is being output and, at the
C3A00 PIC communication error • A sampling lock is not received after the lapse of a
predetermined period of time after IREQ has been
received during AIDC sampling of image stabiliza-
tion sequence or registration adjustment.
• There is an open-circuit in the communication har-
ness between the PIC Board and Master Board.
• Either the PIC Board or Master Board is faulty.
C3A01 PIC Board malfunction The PIC Board is faulty.
C3FFF ROM contents fault The system fails to rewrite flash memory during
detected upon start updating.
T-47
00.12.20
3-3. Troubleshooting Procedures by Malfunction Code

(1) C0000: Main Motor’s failure to turn
C0001: Main Motor turning at abnormal timing

Main Motor (M13) Master Board (PWB-I)
DC Power Supply 1 (PU1)
PU1
PJ7PU1-4(DC24 V)
PJ7PU1-5(GND)
PWB-I
PJ105
PJ13I-7A(M13 LOCK)
1 PJ13I-8A(M13 REM)
2
M13 3
4 PJ13I-9A(M13 CLK)
5 PJ13I-10A(DC5 V)
6 PJ13I-11A(GND)
8
4004C01TAA
C0000: Main Motor’s failure to turn

1 Main Motor turns when the Start key is NO Check connector for connec-
pressed. tion. Correct drive coupling
(drive transmitting gear
engagement).
2 Main Motor rotation when the Start key is YES Change motor.
pressed: the voltage across PJ13I-7A on NO Change Master Board.
Master Board and GND is DC 5 V when the
motor is deenergized and DC 0 V when the
motor is energized.
3 Main Motor rotation when the Start key is NO Change DC Power Supply 1.
pressed: the voltage across PJ7PU1-4 on
DC Power Supply 1 and GND is DC 0 V
when the motor is deenergized and DC 24
V when the motor is energized.
C0001: Main Motor turning at abnormal timing

1 Main Motor rotation while it is being ener- YES Change Master Board.
gized: the voltage across PJ13I-7A on Mas- NO Change motor.
ter Board and GND remains DC 0 V.
T-48
00.12.20
(2) C0010: Imaging Unit Motor C’s failure to turn

C0011: Imaging Unit Motor C turning at abnormal timing
C0012: Imaging Unit Motor M’s failure to turn
C0013: Imaging Unit Motor M turning at abnormal timing
C0014: Imaging Unit Motor Y’s failure to turn
C0015: Imaging Unit Motor Y turning at abnormal timing
C0016: Imaging Unit Motor Bk’s failure to turn
C0017: Imaging Unit Motor Bk turning at abnormal timing

Imaging Unit Motor C (M17) Imaging Unit Motor Bk (M18)
Imaging Unit Motor M (M16) Master Board (PWB-I)
Imaging Unit Motor Y (M15) DC Power Supply 1 (PU1)
M15 PU1
PJ1Y-1(DC5V) PJ8PU1-4(DC5V)
PJ1Y-2(GMD) PJ8PU1-3(GND)
PJ1Y-3(DC24 V) PJ7PU1-2(DC24 V)
PJ1Y-4(GND) PJ7PU1-6(GND)
CL11 M15
PWB-I
PJ2Y-1(M15 REM) PJ12I-4A(M15 REM)
PJ2Y-2(M15 LOCK) PJ12I-3A(M15 LOCK)
PJ2Y-3(Speed CHG) PJ12I-2A(Speed CHG)
PJ2Y-4(CL11 REM) PJ12I-1A(CL11 REM)
M16 PU1
PJ1M-1(DC5V) PJ8PU1-4(DC5V)
PJ1M-2(GMD) PJ8PU1-3(GND)
PJ1M-3(DC24 V) PJ7PU1-2(DC24 V)
PJ1M-4(GND) PJ7PU1-7(GND)
CL12 M16
PWB-I
PJ2M-1(M16 REM) PJ12I-8A(M16 REM)
PJ2M-2(M16 LOCK) PJ12I-7A(M16 LOCK)
PJ2M-3(Speed CHG) PJ12I-6A(Speed CHG)
PJ2M-4(CL12 REM) PJ12I-5A(CL12 REM)
M17 PU1
PJ1C-1(DC5V) PJ8PU1-4(DC5V)
PJ1C-2(GND) PJ8PU1-3(GND)
PJ1C-3(DC24 V) PJ7PU1-3(DC24 V)
PJ1C-4(GND) PJ7PU1-8(GND)
CL13 M17
PWB-I
PJ2C-1(M17 REM) PJ12I-4B(M17 REM)
PJ2C-2(M17 LOCK) PJ12I-3B(M17 LOCK)
PJ2C-3(Speed CHG) PJ12I-2B(Speed CHG)
PJ2C-4(CL13 REM) PJ12I-1B(CL13 REM)
M18 PU1
PJ1K-1(DC5V) PJ8PU1-4(DC5V)
PJ1K-2(GND) PJ8PU1-3(GND)
PJ1K-3(DC24 V) PJ7PU1-3(DC24 V)
PJ1K-4(GND) PJ7PU1-9(GND)
CL14 M18
PWB-I
PJ2K-1(M18 REM) PJ12I-8B(M18 REM)
PJ2K-2(M18 LOCK) PJ12I-7B(M18 LOCK)
PJ2K-3(Speed CHG) PJ12I-6B(Speed CHG)
PJ2K-4(CL14 REM) PJ12I-5B(CL14 REM)
4004C02TAD
T-49
00.12.20
C0010, C0012, C0014, C0016

1 Imaging Unit Motor turns when the Start key NO Correct drive coupling (drive
is pressed. transmitting gear engage-
ment, coupling engagement).
Check that the LED Assy is
locked in position.
2 Imaging Unit Motor rotation when the Start YES Change motor.
key is pressed: NO Change Master Board.
Cyan: the voltage across PJ12I-3B on Mas-
ter Board and GND is DC 5 V when the
motor is energized.
Magenta: the voltage across PJ12I-7A on
motor is energized.
Yellow: the voltage across PJ12I-3A on
motor is energized.
Black: the voltage across PJ12I-7B on Mas-
ter Board and GND is DC 5 V when the
motor is energized.
C0011, C0013, C0015, C0017

1 Imaging Unit Motor rotation while it is being YES Change Master Board.
energized: NO Change motor.
Cyan: the voltage across PJ12I-3B on Mas-
Magenta: the voltage across PJ12I-7A on
Master Board and GND remains DC 0 V.
Yellow: the voltage across PJ12I-3A on
Black: the voltage across PJ12I-7B on Mas-
T-50
00.12.20
(3) C0040: Fusing Cooling Fan Motor 1’s failure to turn

C0046: Fusing Cooling Fan Motor 2’s failure to turn
C004C: Ozone Ventilation Fan Motor’s failure to turn
C004E: Power Supply Cooling Fan Motor’s failure to turn

Fusing Cooling Fan Motor 1 (M23) Power Supply Cooling Fan Motor (M21)
Fusing Cooling Fan Motor 2 (M24) High Voltage Unit 3 (HV3)
Ozone Ventilation Fan Motor (M22) Master Board (PWB-I)
CN77
1 3
PU1
PJ13PU1-1(DC24 V)
M21 2
3
2
1
PJ13PU1-2(GND)
PJ13PU1-3(M21 LOCK)
PWB-I
PJ6PU1-1(DC24 V) PJ1I-2
PJ6PU1-2(DC24 V) PJ1I-3
PJ6PU1-8(GND) PJ1I-4
PJ6PU1-9(GND) PJ1I-5
HV3
CN2HV3-1(M22 ON) CN1HV3-1(M22 LOCK) PJ10I-15(M22 LOCK)
M22 CN2HV3-2(GND) CN1HV3-2(M22 ON) PJ10I-14(M22 ON)
CN2HV3-3(M22 LOCK)
CN65
CN31 1 7
2 6
1 3 3 5 PJ14I-11A(M23 ON)
M23 2 2 4 4 PJ14I-12A(GND)
3 1 5 3 PJ14I-13A(M23 LOCK)
6 2
CN80 7 1
1 3 PJ14I-1A(M24 ON)
M24 2 2 PJ14I-2A(GND)
3 1 PJ14I-3A(M24 LOCK)
4004C03TAC
4004C03TAC
C0040

1 Fusing Cooling Fan Motor 1 turns when the NO Check connector for connec-
Start key is pressed. tion. Check fan for overload.
2 Fusing Cooling Fan Motor 1 rotation when YES Change Master Board.
the Start key is pressed: the voltage across NO Change motor.
5 V when the motor is deenergized and DC
0 V when the motor is energized.
T-51
00.12.20
C0046

1 Fusing Cooling Fan Motor 2 turns when the NO Check connector for connec-
Start key is pressed. tion. Check fan for overload.
2 Fusing Cooling Fan Motor 2 rotation when YES Change motor.
the Start key is pressed: the voltage across NO Change Master Board.
C004C

1 Ozone Ventilation Fan Motor turns when NO Check connector for connec-
the Start key is pressed. tion. Check fan for overload.
2 Ozone Ventilation Fan Motor rotation when NO Change Master Board.
the Start key is pressed: the voltage across
PJ10I-15 on Master Board and GND is DC
3 Ozone Ventilation Fan Motor rotation when YES Change motor.
the Start key is pressed: the voltage across NO Change High Voltage Unit 3.
CN2HV3-3 on High Voltage Unit 3 and
GND is DC 5 V when the motor is deener-
gized and DC 0 V when the motor is ener-
gized.
C004E

1 Power Supply Cooling Fan Motor turns NO Check connector for connec-
when the Start key is pressed. tion. Check fan for overload.
2 Power Supply Cooling Fan Motor rotation YES Change motor.
when the Start key is pressed: the voltage NO Change DC Power Supply 1.
across PJ13PU1-3 on DC Power Supply 1
and GND is DC 5 V when the motor is
deenergized and DC 0 V when the motor is
energized.
T-52
00.12.20
(4) C0060: Fusing Drive Motor’s failure to turn

C0061: Fusing Drive Motor turning at abnormal timing

Fusing Drive Motor (M14) Master Board (PWB-I)
PU1
PJ7PU1-4(DC24 V)
PJ7PU1-5(GND)
PJ106 PWB-I
2 PJ13I-2A(M14 REM)
M14 3
4
5 PJ13I-3A(M14 CLK)
6 PJ13I-4A(DC5 V)
7 PJ13I-5A(GND)
8 PJ13I-6A(M14 CCW/CW)
9
4004C04TAA
4004C0
C0060

1 Fusing Drive Motor turns when the Start key NO Check connector for connec-
is pressed. tion. Correct drive coupling
(drive transmitting gear
engagement).
2 Fusing Drive Motor rotation when the Start YES Change motor.
key is pressed: the voltage across PJ13I-1A NO Change Master Board.
on Master Board and GND is DC 5 V when
the motor is deenergized and DC 0 V when
the motor is energized.
3 Fusing Drive Motor rotation when the Start NO Change DC Power Supply 1.
key is pressed: the voltage across PJ7PU1-
4 on DC Power Supply 1 and GND is DC 0
V when the motor is deenergized and DC
C0061

1 Fusing Drive Motor rotation while it is being YES Change Master Board.
energized: the voltage across PJ13I-1A on NO Change motor.
T-53
00.12.20
(5) C0094: 2nd Image Transfer Roller pressure/retraction failure

2nd Image Transfer Pressure Position Sen- Master Board (PWB-I)
sor (PC23)
2nd Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction
Clutch (CL15)
PJ122 CN14 CN65 PWB-I

4 1 2 1 7 PJ14I-9A(DC24 V)
3 2 1 2 6 PJ14I-10A(CL15 REM)
CL15 2
1 7 1
CN63
1 12
PJ108
3 4 9 PJ14I-4B(DC5 V)
2 5 8 PJ14I-5B(GND)
PC23 1 6 7 PJ14I-6B(PC23 ON)
12 1
4004C05TAB
C0094

1 While the 2nd Image Transfer Pressure/ YES Check connector for connec-
Retraction Clutch is supposed to be deener- tion. Check for overload.
gized during timing of pressure/retraction Change clutch.
operation: the voltage across PJ14I-9A on NO Change Master Board.
Master Board and GND is DC 24 V when
2 I/O check for 2nd Image Transfer Pressure YES Change Master Board.
Position Sensor operation during pressure/ NO Correct actuator. Check sen-
retraction operation: the voltage across sor connector for connection.
PJ14I-6B on Master Board and GND is DC Change sensor.
0 V when the sensor is unblocked and DC 5
V when the sensor is blocked (pressed
position).
T-54
00.12.20
(6) C0096: Image Transfer Belt pressure/retraction failure

1st Image Transfer Retraction Position Sen- Master Board (PWB-I)
sor (PC28)
1st Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction
Motor (M11)
CN46 PWB-I
1 6 PJ16I-2B(DC24 V)
2 5 PJ16I-3B(DC24 V)
3 4 PJ16I-4B(M11 A1)
M11 4 3 PJ16I-5B(M11 B1)
5 2 PJ16I-6B(M11 A3)
6 1 PJ16I-7B(M11 B3)
PJ109
3 PJ17I-1A(PC28 ON)
2 PJ17I-2A(DC5 V)
PC28 1 PJ17I-3A(GND)
4004C06TAA
C0096

1 1st Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction NO Check connector for connec-
Motor turns during pressure/retraction oper- tion. Correct drive coupling
ation. (drive transmitting gear
engagement). Change motor.
Change Master Board.
2 I/O check for 1st Image Transfer Retraction YES Change Master Board.
Position Sensor operation during pressure/ NO Correct actuator. Check sen-
retraction operation: the voltage across sor connector for connection.
PJ17I-1A on Master Board and GND is DC Change sensor.
0 V when the sensor is unblocked and DC 5
V when the sensor is blocked (retracted
position).
T-55
00.12.20
(7) C0098: Fusing Roller pressure/retraction failure

Fusing Pressure Position Sensor (PC7) Fusing Pressure/Retraction Motor (M8)
Fusing Retraction Position Sensor (PC8) Master Board (PWB-I)
CN4
PJ136
1
2
1
2
PWB-I
3 3 3 PJ6I-9B(DC5 V)
2 4 4 PJ6I-10B(GND)
PC7 1 5 5 PJ6I-11B(PC7 ON)
24 24
PJ120
2 PJ14I-4A(M8 -)
M8 1 PJ14I-5A(M8 +)
PJ134
3 PJ17I-1B(DC5 V)
2 PJ17I-2B(GND)
PC8 1 PJ17I-3B(PC8 ON)
40
4004C07TAC
T-56
00.12.20
C0098

1 Fusing Pressure/Retraction Motor rotation YES Check motor connector for
when the Fusing Roller is retracted: the connection. Change motor.
voltage across PJ14I-4A on Master Board NO Change Master Board.
and GND is DC 0 V when the motor is
deenergized and DC 24 V when the motor
is energized.
2 I/O check for Fusing Pressure Position Sen- YES Change Master Board.
sor when the Fusing Roller is retracted: the NO Check sensor installation.
voltage across PJ6I-11B on Master Board Correct detecting plate.
and GND is DC 0 V when the sensor is Check sensor connector for
unblocked (retracted position) and DC 5 V connection. Change sensor.
when the sensor is blocked.
3 Fusing Pressure/Retraction Motor rotation NO Change Master Board.
when the Fusing Roller is pressed: the volt-
age across PJ14I-5A on Master Board and
GND is DC 0 V when the motor is deener-
gized and DC 24 V when the motor is ener-
gized.
4 I/O check for Fusing Pressure Position Sen- YES Change Master Board.
sor when the Fusing Roller is pressed: the NO Check sensor installation.
voltage across PJ6I-11B on Master Board Correct detecting plate.
and GND is DC 0 V when the sensor is Check sensor connector for
unblocked and DC 5 V when the sensor is connection. Change sensor.
blocked (pressed position).
5 I/O check for Fusing Retraction Position YES Change Master Board.
Sensor operation while the Fusing Pres- NO Check sensor installation.
sure/Retraction Motor is turning: the voltage Correct detecting plate.
across PJ17I-3B on Master Board and GND Check sensor connector for
remains DC 0 V when the sensor is connection. Change sensor.
unblocked or remains DC 5 V when the
sensor is blocked while the motor remains
stationary, and alternates between DC 0 V
when the sensor is unblocked and DC 5 V
when the sensor is blocked while the motor
is turning.
T-57
00.12.20
(8) C0200: Cyan PC Drum Charge Corona malfunction

C0202: Magenta PC Drum Charge Corona malfunction
C0204: Yellow PC Drum Charge Corona malfunction
C0206: Black PC Drum Charge Corona malfunction

Imaging Unit C High Voltage Unit 1 (HV1)
Imaging Unit M Master Board (PWB-I)
Imaging Unit Y DC Power Supply 1 (PU1)
Imaging Unit Bk
HV1 PU1
PJ16-1(DC 24V) PJ6PU1-4(DC24 V)
PJ16-2(GND) PJ6PU1-5(GND)
PWB-I
PJ17-12 PJ9I-1(G CNT-K)
PJ17-11 PJ9I-2(G CNT-C)
PJ17-10 PJ9I-3(G CNT-M)
PJ17-9 PJ9I-4(G CNT-Y)
PJ17-8 PJ9I-5(D.C SCD-Y)
PJ17-7 PJ9I-6(D.C REM-Y)
PJ17-6 PJ9I-7(D.C SCD-M)
PJ17-5 PJ9I-8(D.C REM-M)
PJ17-4 PJ9I-9(D.C SCD-C)
PJ17-3 PJ9I-10(D.C REM-C)
PJ17-2 PJ9I-11(D.C SCD-K)
PJ17-1 PJ9I-12(D.C REM-K)
4004C08TAB
T-58
00.12.20
C0200, C0202, C0204, C0206

1 Imaging Unit contact failure YES Correct or clean Imaging Unit
contact.
2 High Voltage Unit 1 contact failure YES Correct or clean High Voltage
Unit 1 contact.
3 After corona output has been turned ON: YES Change High Voltage Unit 1.
Cyan (C0200): NO Change Master Board.
The voltage across PJ9I-10 on Master
Board and GND is DC 24 V when the output
is turned OFF and DC 0 V when the output
is turned ON.
Magenta (C0202):
The voltage across PJ9I-8 on Master Board
and GND is DC 24 V when the output is
turned OFF and DC 0 V when the output is
turned ON.
Yellow (C0204):
The voltage across PJ9I-6 on Master Board
and GND is DC 24 V when the output is
turned OFF and DC 0 V when the output is
turned ON.
Bk (C0206):
The voltage across PJ9I-12 on Master
Board and GND is DC 24 V when the output
is turned OFF and DC 0 V when the output
is turned ON.
T-59
00.12.20
(9) C0400: Exposure Lamp’s failure to turn ON

C0410: Exposure Lamp turning ON at abnormal timing

Exposure Lamp (LA1) Temperature Fuse (F4)
Flat Cable (PWB-Z) DC Power Supply 2 (PU2)
Image Processing Board (PWB-C)
PJ8 PWB-Z PWB-Z PU2

2 F4 1 PJ2Z-5 PJ1Z-1 PJ2PU2-1(DC0 V)
PJ7
PJ1Z-3 PJ2PU2-3(DC70 V)
LA1 PJ2Z-3 PWB-C
PJ3PU2-1(DC24 V) PJ2C-11B
PJ3PU2-2(GND) PJ2C-10B
PJ3PU2-3(Lamp REM) PJ2C-9B
PJ3PU2-4(Lamp Down) PJ2C-8B
PJ3PU2-5(Lamp CNT) PJ2C-7B
4004C09TAB
C0400/C0410

1 Exposure Lamp conduction NO Change Exposure Lamp.
2 Temperature Fuse conduction NO Change Temperature Fuse.
3 Flat Cable conduction NO Check for correct installation
or change.
4 The problem has been eliminated through NO Change DC Power Supply 2.
the checks of steps up to 3.
5 Exposure Lamp turns ON and OFF cor- NO Change Image Processing
rectly after DC Power Supply 2 has been Board.
replaced.
T-60
00.12.20
(10) C0500: Heating Roller warm-up failure

C0501: Lower Fusing Roller Heater Lamp warm-up failure
C0510: Heating Roller abnormally low temperature
C0511: Lower Fusing Roller Heater Lamp abnormally low temperature
C0520: Heating Roller abnormally high temperature
C0521: Lower Fusing Roller Heater Lamp abnormally high temperature

Fusing Unit DC Power Supply 1 (PU1)
Master Board (PWB-I)
FUSING PU1
PJ12PU1-2(H1 ON)
UNIT PJ12PU1-3(H2 ON)
CN4 PJ12PU1-4(H3 ON)
1 1 PJ4PU1-1(L)
PJ4PU1-2(N H1)
12 12 PJ4PU1-3(N H2)
13 13 PJ4PU1-4(N H3)
14 14
15 15
16 16
17 17
18 18
24 24 PWB-I
PJ6I-1B(TH1 ON)
PJ6I-2B(GND)
PJ6I-3B(TH2 ON)
PJ6I-4B(GND)
PJ2I-8(H3 ON)
PJ2I-9(H2 ON)
PJ2I-10(H1 ON)
4004C27TAC
T-61
00.12.20
C0500, C0510

1 Fusing Unit condition: the resistance across YES Change Fusing Unit.
CN4-15 and 16 on the Fusing Unit end is NO Change Master Board.
infinity with CN4 (2P) disconnected.
2 Heating Roller Heater Lamps turn ON. YES Change DC Power Supply 1.
NO Change Fusing Unit.
C0520

CN4-15 and 16 on the Fusing Unit end is 0 NO Change Master Board.
Ω (or close to 0) with CN4 (2P) discon-
nected.
C0501, C0511

CN4-17 and 18 on the Fusing Unit end is NO Change Master Board.
infinity with CN4 (2P) disconnected.
2 Lower Fusing Roller Heater Lamp turns ON. YES Change DC Power Supply 1.
NO Change Fusing Unit.
C0521

CN4-15 and 16 on the Fusing Unit end is 0 NO Change Master Board.
Ω (or close to 0) with CN4 (2P) discon-
nected.
T-62
00.12.20
(11) C0650: Scanner Home Sensor malfunction

C0660: Scanner overrun failure

Scanner Home Sensor (PC24) Scanner Motor Drive Board (PWB-IC)
Scanner Motor (M1) DC Power Supply 2 (PU2)
PWB-IC PU2
PJ1IC-1 PJ6PU2-2(DC5 V)
PJ1IC-2 PJ6PU2-4(GND)
PJ1IC-3 PJ6PU2-7(DC24 V)
PJ1IC-4 PJ6PU2-6(GND)
PWB-C
PJ2IC-1 PJ2C-9A(GND)
PJ2IC-2 PJ2C-8A(RESET)
PJ2IC-3 PJ2C-7A(ENABLE)
PJ2IC-4 PJ2C-6A(M1 CRNT SW2)
PJ2IC-5 PJ2C-5A(M1 CRNT SW1)
PJ2IC-6 PJ2C-4A(HOLD)
PJ2IC-7 PJ2C-2A(CW/CCW)
PJ2IC-8 PJ2C-1A(CLK)
PJ38
1 PJ3IC-1(U)
M1 2 PJ3IC-2(V)
3 PJ3IC-3(W)
PJ26
3 PJ6C-1(GND)
2 PJ6C-2(DC24V)
PC24 1 PJ6C-3(DC 5V)
4004C11TAA
4004C11TAA
T-63
00.12.20
C0650, C0660

1 Scanner can be moved manually. NO Correct drive coupling (Scan-
ner Belt tension, pulley opera-
tion, drive cable tension)
2 Scan motion: initial scan motion after the NO Carry out misfeed/malfunction
Power Switch has been turned ON or Front troubleshooting procedures.
Door has been opened and closed.
3 Connectors are connected properly on NO Check connectors for connec-
Scanner Motor Drive Board: PWB-IC tion.
PJ1IC, PJ2IC, and PJ3IC.
4 Scanner Motor turns when the Start key is NO Check connectors for connec-
pressed. tion. Change motor. Change
Scanner Motor Drive Board.
5 I/O check for Scanner Home Sensor: the YES Change Image Processing
voltage across PJ6C-2 on Image Process- Board.
ing Board and GND is DC 0 V (home posi- NO Check sensor for installation.
tion) when the sensor is blocked and DC 5 Correct detecting plate.
V when the sensor is unblocked. Check sensor connector for
connection. Change sensor.
6 “IR Area” check: NO Adjust “IR Area” data.
Malfunction when Power Switch is turned
ON after “Top Image” has been set to 0 and
“FD-Mag.” to 1.000.
T-64
00.12.20
(12) C0990: LCC Lift-Up Motor malfunction

C0995: LCC Transport Motor malfunction

LCC Set Sensor (FRONT) LCC Transport Motor (HMOT)
Lift-Up Sensor 1 (LS1) LCC Lift-Up Motor (EMOT)
Lift-Up Sensor 2 (LS2) LCC Control Board (PWB-A)
PJ6 PWB-A
1 CN4A-6(LS1 ON)
2 CN4A-5(GND)
LS1 3 CN4A-4(DC5 V)
PJ5
1 CN4A-9(LS2 ON)
2 CN4A-8(GND)
LS2 3 CN4A-7(DC5 V)
CN17
1 2 CN5A-2(E MOT/CCW)
E MOT 2 1 CN5A-1(E MOT/CW)
PJ3
1 CN6A-6(H MOT CLK)
2 CN6A-5(DC5 V)
H MOT 3 CN6A-4(H MOT SIG)
4 CN6A-3(GND)
5
6 CN6A-1(DC24 V)
PJ1
1 CN6A-9(FRONT ON)
2 CN6A-8(GND)
FRONT 3 CN6A-7(DC5 V)
4004C12TAA
T-65
00.12.20
C0990

1 LCC Lift-Up Motor turns after the LCC NO Change motor. Change LCC
Drawer has been slid into position while the Control Board.
LCC Drawer is being used.
C0991

1 Lift 1 ascends after the LCC Lift-Up Motor NO Correct drive coupling (one-
has been energized. way gear engagement, cou-
pling engagement, spring
operation, and belt tension).
2 I/O check for Lift-Up Sensor 1 operation: YES Change LCC Control Board.
the voltage across CN4A-6 on LCC Control NO Check sensor for installation.
Board and GND is DC 0 V when the sensor Check sensor connector for
is unblocked and DC 5 V when the sensor connection. Change sensor.
is blocked (during lifting motion detection).
C0995

1 LCC Lift-Up Motor turns when the Start key NO Change motor. Change LCC
is pressed while the LCC Drawer is being Control Board.
used.
C0999

1 Lift 2 ascends after the LCC Lift-Up Motor NO Correct drive coupling (one-
has been energized. way gear engagement, cou-
pling engagement, spring
operation, and belt tension).
2 I/O check for Lift-Up Sensor 2 operation: YES Change LCC Control Board.
the voltage across CN4A-9 on LCC Control NO Check sensor for installation.
Board and GND is DC 0 V when the sensor Check sensor connector for
is unblocked and DC 5 V when the sensor connection. Change sensor.
is blocked (during lifting motion detection).
T-66
00.12.20
(13) C0F30: Abnormally low toner density detected by Cyan ATDC Sensor/
C0F31: Abnormally high toner density detected by Cyan ATDC Sensor
C0F32: Abnormally low toner density detected by Magenta ATDC Sensor/
C0F33: Abnormally high toner density detected by Magenta ATDC Sensor
C0F34: Abnormally low toner density detected by Yellow ATDC Sensor/
C0F35: Abnormally high toner density detected by Yellow ATDC Sensor

ATDC Sensor C (PWB-N3) Toner Replenishing Motor C/Bk (M9)
ATDC Sensor M (PWB-N2) Toner Replenishing Motor Y/M (M10)
ATDC Sensor Y (PWB-N1) Master Board (PWB-I)
CN72
CN35 1 10 PWB-I
1 4 7 4 –
PJ5I-7A(A-A1 )
2 3 8 3 PJ5I-8A(A-A3)
M10 3 2 9 2 –
PJ5I-9A(B-B1)
4 1 10 1 PJ5I-10A(B-B3)
CN36
1 4 –
PJ5I-1B(A-A1 )
2 3 PJ5I-2B(A-A3)
M9 3 2 –
PJ5I-3B(B-B1)
4 1 PJ5I-4B(B-B3)
PWB-N1 CN50
PJ88N1-4(TH1 OUT) 1 12 PJ7I-1A(TH1 OUT)
PJ88N1-3(GND) 2 11 PJ7I-2A(GND)
PJ88N1-2(DC5 V) 3 10 PJ7I-3A(DC5 V)
PJ88N1-1(UN33 REM) 4 9 PJ7I-4A(UN33 REM)
5 8 PJ7I-5A(TH2 OUT)
6 7 PJ7I-6A(GND)
7 6 PJ7I-7A(DC5 V)
8 5 PJ7I-8A(UN34 REM)
PWB-N2 10
11
3
2
PJ7I-10A(GND)
PJ7I-11A(DC5 V)
PJ89N2-4(TH2OUT)
12 1 PJ7I-12A(UN35 REM)
PJ89N2-3(GND)
PJ89N2-2(DC5 V)
PJ89N2-1(UN34 REM)
PWB-N3
PJ90N3-4(TH3 OUT)
PJ90N3-3(GND)
PJ90N3-2(DC5 V)
PJ90N3-1(UN35 REM)
4004C13TAA
4004C13TAA
T-67
00.12.20
C0F30, C0F32, C0F34

1 ATDC Sensor window is dirty. YES Clean.
2 ATDC Sensor spring moving part operates NO Correct.
properly.
3 Hopper supplies toner properly. NO Correct.
4 ATDC Sensor LED is dirty. YES Clean.
5 ATDC Sensor LED emits light properly. NO Check connector for connec-
tion. Check harness.
6 Imaging Unit Shutter operates properly. NO Correct.
7 The problem has been eliminated through NO Change Master Board.
C0F31, C0F33, C0F35

2 Bias voltage is properly applied to the NO Check wiring.
ATDC Sensor window.
T-68
00.12.20
(14) C0F36: Abnormally low toner density detected by Black ATDC Sensor/
C0F37: Abnormally high toner density detected by Black ATDC Sensor

Imaging Unit Bk Master Board (PWB-I)
Toner Replenishing Motor C/Bk (M9)
CN36 PWB-I
1 4 –
PJ5I-1B(A-A1 )
2 3 PJ5I-2B(A-A3)
M9 3 2 –
PJ5I-3B(B-B1 )
4 1 PJ5I-4B(B-B3)
Imaging Unit PJ13I-4B

PJ13I-3B
(Bk) PJ13I-5B
PJ13I-6B
4004C26TAB
C0F36

1 Image density is low. YES Check and correct Imaging
Unit Bk Shutter.
2 The problem has been eliminated through NO Check and correct Hopper.
the check of step 1.
C0F37

1 Imaging Unit Bk is installed correctly. NO Reinstall.
2 Each of Imaging Unit Bk contacts makes NO Clean or correct.
good contact.
3 ATDC Sensor harness is open-circuited. YES Change Imaging Unit Bk.
T-69
00.12.20
(15) C0F3A: Cyan ATDC Sensor adjustment failure

C0F3B: Magenta ATDC Sensor adjustment failure
C0F3C: Yellow ATDC Sensor adjustment failure
C0F3D: Black ATDC Sensor adjustment failure

ATDC Sensor C (PWB-N3) Toner Replenishing Motor C/Bk (M9)
ATDC Sensor M (PWB-N2) Toner Replenishing Motor Y/M (M10)
ATDC Sensor Y (PWB-N1) Master Board (PWB-I)
Imaging Unit Bk
CN72
CN35 1 10 PWB-I
1 4 7 4 –
PJ5I-1B(A-A1 )
2 3 8 3 PJ5I-2B(A-A3)
M10 3 2 9 2 –
PJ5I-3B(B-B1 )
4 1 10 1 PJ5I-4B(B-B3)
CN36
1 4 –
PJ5I-7A(A-A1 )
2 3 PJ5I-8A(A-A3)
M9 3 2 –
PJ5I-9A(B-B1 )
4 1 PJ5I-10A(B-B3)
PWB-N1 CN50
PJ88N1-4(TH1 OUT) 1 12 PJ7I-1A(TH1 OUT)
PJ88N1-3(GND) 2 11 PJ7I-2A(GND)
PJ88N1-2(DC5 V) 3 10 PJ7I-3A(DC5 V)
PJ88N1-1(UN33 REM) 4 9 PJ7I-4A(UN33 REM)
6 7 PJ7I-6A(GND)
7 6 PJ7I-7A(DC5 V)
8 5 PJ7I-8A(UN34 REM)
PWB-N2 10
11
3
2
PJ7I-10A(GND)
PJ7I-11A(DC5 V)
PJ89N2-4(TH2OUT)
12 1 PJ7I-12A(UN35 REM)
PJ89N2-3(GND)
PJ89N2-2(DC5 V)
PJ89N2-1(UN34 REM)
PWB-N3
PJ90N3-4(TH3 OUT)
PJ90N3-3(GND)
PJ90N3-2(DC5 V)
PJ90N3-1(UN35 REM)
Imaging Unit
PJ13I-4B
(Bk) PJ13I-3B
PJ13I-5B
PJ13I-6B
4004C25TAC
T-70
00.12.20
C0F3A, C0F3B, C0F3C

2 Imaging Unit window for ATDC Sensor is YES Clean.
dirty.
3 LED retracting lever is locked in position. NO Slide out the Imaging Unit and
then reinstall.
4 The problem has been eliminated through NO Check ATDC Sensor connec-
the checks of steps up to 3. tor. Change ATDC Sensor.
5 The problem is eliminated after the ATDC NO Change Imaging Unit.
Sensor has been replaced.
6 The problem is eliminated after the Imaging NO Change Master Board.
Unit has been replaced.
COF3D

1 Malfunction code C0F3D is displayed. YES Change Imaging Unit.
2 The problem is eliminated after the Imaging NO Check harness. Check con-
Unit has been replaced. nector for connection. Change
Master Board.
(16) C13C8: New Transfer Belt Unit resetting failure

C13CA: New Fusing Unit resetting failure
C13CB: New Fusing Web Unit resetting failure
C13CC: New Oil Coating Unit resetting failure
C13C8, C13CA, C13CB, C13CC

1 Each unit is installed properly in the copier YES Change Master Board.
(good contact connection). NO Reinstall.
T-71
00.12.20
(17) C13D1: Cyan IU EEPROM failure

C13D2: Magenta IU EEPROM failure
C13D3: Yellow IU EEPROM failure
C13D4: Black IU EEPROM failure
C13D1, C13D2, C13D3, C13D4

1 Imaging Unit is installed properly. NO Reinstall.
2 Connector between the Imaging Unit and YES Clean.
copier is dirty.
3 The problem has been eliminated through NO Change Imaging Unit.
4 The problem is eliminated after the Imaging NO Change Master Board.
T-72
00.12.20
(18) C3310: CCD clamp/gain adjustment failure

Exposure Lamp (LA1) CCD Sensor Board (PWB-A)
Flat Cable (PWB-Z) Image Processing Board (PWB-C)
Clamp/Gain Adjustment Values
RO RE GO GE BO BE
Clamp 130 130 130 130 130 130
RO RE GO GE BO BE
Gain 160 160 170 170 160 160
Lamp Adjust-
135
ment Value
✽ Clamp: Allowable up to ±100 of the above values.
✽ Gain: Allowable up to ±90 of the above values for R and B; allowable up to ±50 of the
above values for G.
✽ Exposure Lamp adjustment value: Allowable in the range between 64 and 192. A differ-
ence of up to 30 is allowed between RO and RE, between GO and GE, and between BO
and BE.
C3310

1 Check that each of the values displayed on the screen falls within the above range.
2 There is a wide difference between the YES Make positive connection of
clamp and gain adjustment values, the the harness connectors
value being close to “0” or “255.” between CCD Sensor Board
and Image Processing Board.
3 Clamp adjustment value exceeds the allow- YES Reinstall covers, as extrane-
able range. ous light is the cause of the
problem.
4 The lamp adjustment value or gain value YES Clean lens, mirrors, CCD sur-
exceeds the upper limit of the allowable face, shading sheet, and
range, being abnormally great. related parts.
5 The lamp adjustment value or gain value YES Reinstall covers, as extrane-
falls short of the lower limit of the allowable ous light is the cause of the
range, being abnormally small. problem.
Change Scanner, as the
reflectors are deformed.
T-73
00.12.20
(19) C3700: IR Cooling Fan Motor 1 turning at abnormal timing

C3710: IR Cooling Fan Motor 2 turning at abnormal timing
C3720: Original Glass Cooling Fan Motor turning at abnormal timing

IR Cooling Fan Motor 1 (M3) Image Processing Board (PWB-C)
IR Cooling Fan Motor 2 (M4) DC Power Supply 2 (PU2)
Original Glass Cooling Fan Motor (M2)
CN3 PWB-C
1 3 PJ2C-4B(M2 REM)
M2 2 2 PJ2C-5B(GND)
3 1 PJ2C-6B(M2 LOCK)
CN2
1 3 PJ6C-4(M3 REM)
M3 2 2 PJ6C-5(GND)
3 1 PJ6C-6(M3 LOCK)
CN22
1 3 PJ6C-7(M4 REM)
M4 2 2 PJ6C-8(GND)
3 1 PJ6C-9(M4 LOCK)
PU2
PJ1C-2 PJ4PU2-1(DC24 V)
PJ1C-1 PJ4PU2-4(GND)
4004C19TAB
C3700

1 IR Cooling Fan Motor 1 rotation: the voltage YES Change Image Processing
across PJ6C-6 on Image Processing Board Board.
and GND remains DC 0 V while the motor is NO Change motor.
turning.
C3710

1 IR Cooling Fan Motor 2 rotation: the voltage YES Change Image Processing
across PJ6C-9 on Image Processing Board Board.
and GND remains DC 0 V while the motor is NO Change motor.
turning.
C3720

1 Original Glass Cooling Fan Motor rotation: YES Change Image Processing
the voltage across PJ2C-6B on Image Pro- Board.
cessing Board and GND remains DC 0 V NO Change motor.
while the motor is turning.
T-74
00.12.20
(20) C3A00: PIC communication error

C3A01: PIC Board malfunction
C3FFF: ROM contents fault detected upon start
C3A00

1 Harnesses and connectors connecting PIC NO Change harnesses. Recon-
Board to Master Board are in good condi- nect connectors.
tion.
2 The problem has been eliminated through NO Change PIC Board.
3 The problem is eliminated after the PIC NO Change Master Board.
Board has been replaced.
C3A01

1 The same malfunction recurs even after the YES Change PIC Board.
malfunction has been reset, Power Switch
turned OFF and ON, and the power cord
plugged out and back in.
C3FFF

1 This malfunction occurs when an attempt is YES Try downloading again.
made to update firmware (rewriting of flash
ROM).
T-75
00.12.20
3-4. Power Supply-Related Malfunctions

(1) Copier Does not Turned ON.

Power Switch (SW1) Master Board (PWB-I)
Upper Right Door Switch (SW9) DC Power Supply 1 (PU1)
PU2 CN1
Bk
W
GR Bk
W SW1
GY
2
GY
1
PJ101
PWB-I
PJ4I-1
PJ4I-2
R 1A
Bk PU1
PJ1PU1-1(L IN)
PJ21I-1 3A W
2A PJ1PU1-3(N IN)
R SW9 2B W
PJ2PU1-3(N IN)
PJ21I-3 3B Bk
1B PJ2PU1-1(L IN)
CN88 CN12
N Bk
1 1 PJ3PU1-1
W
PG1 2 2
L
PJ3PU1-2
4004C30TAD
4004C30TAD

1 Correct wiring is made to the Power Switch NO Rewire.
terminal.
2 Correct wiring is made to the Upper Right NO Rewire.
Door Switch terminal.
3 Power source voltage is supplied to DC NO Check wiring.
Power Supply 1.
4 Power source voltage is supplied to the NO Secure power source voltage.
power outlet.
5 The 5-V line is inadvertently shorted. YES Turn OFF Power Switch, wait
for a while, and then turn ON
the Power Switch again.
T-76
00.12.20
(2) No Control Panel Indicators Light up.

Control Panel (UN1) IR PRIF Board (PWB-D)
UN1 PWB-D
PJ30UN1-1A(GND) PJ3D-1A
PJ30UN1-2A(FLM) PJ3D-2A
PJ30UN1-4A(CL1) PJ3D-4A
PJ30UN1-6A(CL2) PJ3D-6A
PJ30UN1-8A(LD0) PJ3D-8A
PJ30UN1-2B(DC5 V) PJ3D-13B
PJ30UN1-4B(GND) PJ3D-11B
PJ30UN1-8B(SLEEP OUT) PJ3D-7B
PJ30UN1-9B(PRE MOTE) PJ3D-6B
PJ30UN1-10B(DIS POFF) PJ3D-5B
PJ30UN1-12B(SD OUT) PJ3D-3B
PJ30UN1-13B(SD IN) PJ3D-2B
PJ30UN1-14B(S CLK) PJ3D-1B
PJ6D
CN2
PWB-C
4004C29TAA
4004C29TAA

1 DC 24 V is output from PJ3D-9B on IR NO Change IR PRIF Board.
PRIF Board.
2 DC 24 V is input to PJ30UN1-6B on Control NO Check or change harness.
Panel.
3 Control Panel screen is displayed with 24 V NO Change Image Processing
being input. Board. Change IR PRIF
Board.
T-77
00.12.20
(3) No Power is Supplied to Options.

DC Power Supply 1 (PU1) DC Power Supply 2 (PU2)
PU1 Sorter
PJ5PU1-2(DC24 V) CN60-11
PJ5PU1-3(GND) CN60-5
L
N
Duplex
PJ5PU1-5(DC24 V) CN62-1
Tray
PJ5PU1-6(DC24 V) CN82-1
CN83-1
CN83-2
PU2 ADF
PJ5PU2-1(DC24 V) CN5-11
PJ5PU2-2(GND) CN5-5
4004C28TAA

1 Power source voltage is applied to DC NO Check wiring.
Power Supply 1.
2 DC 24 V is output from DC Power Supply 1 NO Change DC Power Supply 1.
and DC Power Supply 2. Change DC Power Supply 2.
3 There is an open-circuit in the harness from YES Change harness.
DC Power Supply 1 and DC Power Supply
2 to option connector.
T-78
00.12.20
4. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEMS

4-1. Troubleshooting Image Quality Problems
• This chapter is divided into two parts: “Initial Check Items” and “Troubleshooting Proce-
dure by a Particular Image Quality Problem.”
• When an image quality problem occurs, first go through the “Initial Check Items” and, if
the cause is yet to be identified, go to “Troubleshooting Procedure by a Particular Image
Quality Problem.”
4-2. Initial Check Items

1. First determine which of the following three is responsible for the image quality prob-
lem: the input system (IR), interface system, or the output system (printer).
When an image quality problem occurs, possible causes that are likely to be responsi-
ble for it may be broadly grouped into the following three: those relating to the Scanner
of the IR unit, the interface between the IR unit and printer, and the printer.
As a procedure to isolate basic causes, you first let the printer produce test prints. If the
image quality problem of the same sort is evident on the test patterns, then the printer is
very likely to be responsible for it. If not, the cause is attributable to the Scanner of the
IR unit or the interface.
The next step to take to identify whether the problem is attributable to the IR Scanner or
the interface is to produce IR test prints. If the problem of the same sort is evident on
the test patterns, then the interface is probably responsible for it.
If the same symptom does not occur on the test prints, then the IR Scanner is responsi-
ble for the problem.
CCD Sensor
IR Area
Image Processing Boad IR Test print
I/F Area I/F Cable
Printer Test print

PIC Board
Printer Area LED Drive
4004T006CA
T-79
00.12.20
Ref.
Step Symptom Check Result Cause
Page
The faulty symptom occurs when YES Printer ☞ T-96
Gradation fail- a test print is produced with the
ure, density following settings made: “Test
failure Print” → “Gradation Pattern” → “4 NO To step 2 –
Color.”
Uneven den- The faulty symptom occurs when YES Printer ☞ T-96
sity, pitch a test print is produced with the
noise, or image following settings made: “Test
noise (lines, Print” → “Halftone Pattern” → “C → NO To step 2 –
bands, spots, M → Y → Bk” → Enter “64” in
etc.) “Density.” → Select “Hyper.”
1
a test print is produced with the
Foggy back- following settings made: “Test
ground Print” → “Halftone Pattern” → “C → NO To step 2 –
M → Y → Bk” → Enter “0” in “Den-
sity.”
a test print is produced with the
Color reproduc-
following settings made: “Test
tion failure NO To step 2 –
Print” → “Color Sample” → Enter
“255” in “Density.”
The faulty symptom occurs when YES Interface ☞ T-93
Abnormal a test print is produced with the
2
image following settings made: “Test NO IR ☞ T-82
Print” → “IR Test Pattern.”
T-80
00.12.20
2. If the output system (printer) is responsible for the image quality problem, determine if it
occurs with a single color of Y, M, C, or Bk, or four colors.
By rule of thumb, if the problem occurs with a single color, the corresponding Imaging
Unit is very likely to be faulty. If the problem occurs with four colors, the Transfer Belt
and/or Fusing Unit are probably defective.
The same problematic symptom occurs with each of the four colors, then the Transfer
Belt, Image Transfer Rollers, and/or the Fusing Unit are responsible for it.
If the symptom occurs with a single color, each Imaging Unit is responsible for it.
4 colors
Mono color
4004T008CA
Ref.
Step Symptom Check Result Cause
Page
The faulty symptom occurs with Printer
YES ☞ T-114
Gradation fail- each of the four colors when a test 4 color
ure, density print is produced with the follow- Printer
failure ing settings made: “Test Print” → NO mono- ☞ T-96
“Gradation Pattern” → “4 Color.” color
The faulty symptom occurs with Printer
Uneven den- YES ☞ T-114
each of the four colors when a test 4 color
sity, pitch
print is produced with the follow-
noise, or image
1 ing settings made: “Test Print” → Printer
noise (lines,
“Halftone Pattern” → “C → M → Y NO mono- ☞ T-96
bands, spots,
→ Bk” → Enter “64” in “Density.” → color
etc.)
Select “Hyper.”
he faulty symptom occurs with Printer
YES ☞ T-114
each of the four colors when a test 4 color
Foggy back- print is produced with the follow-
ground ing settings made: “Test Print” → Printer
“Halftone Pattern” → “C → M → Y NO mono- ☞ T-96
→ Bk” → Enter “0” in “Density.” color
T-81
00.12.20
4-3. Troubleshooting Procedure by a Particular Image Quality

Problem
(1) IR Scanner System: white lines in FD, white bands in FD, colored lines in FD,
and colored bands in FD
<Typical Faulty Images>
White lines in FD White bands in FD Colored lines in FD Colored bands in FD
4011T015AA 4011T020AA 4011T017AA 4011T023AA
<Troubleshooting Procedure>
Section Step Check Item Result Action

Original 1 Original is damaged or dirty. YES Change original.
Original 2 Original Pad is dirty. YES Clean.
Cover
Original 3 Original Glass is dirty. YES Wipe the surface clean with a
Glass soft cloth.
Shading 4 Shading sheet is dirty. YES Wipe the surface clean with a
sheet soft cloth.
Mirror, lens, 5 Mirror is dirty. YES Clean.
Exposure Lens is dirty. YES Clean.
Lamp, and
reflectors Exposure Lamp is dirty. YES Clean.
Reflectors are dirty. YES Clean.
Left Image 6 The Scanner starts reading the NO Adjust the image reading
(Tech. Rep. image at the position of 0 mm position in the range of ±10
function) from the scale. mm.
IR 7 The white lines/bands or col- YES Change Scanner Assy.
ored lines/bands are blurry.
8 The white lines/bands or col- YES Change CCD Unit.
ored lines/bands are clear and
distinct.
T-82
00.12.20
(2) IR Scanner System: white lines in CD, white bands in CD, colored lines in CD,
and colored bands in CD
White lines in CD White bands in CD Colored lines in CD Colored bands in CD
4011T016AA 4011T021AA 4011T018AA 4011T022AA

Cover
Glass soft cloth.
Flat cable 4 Flat cable terminal is con- NO Clean terminal. Reconnect.
nected properly. Change flat cable.
Top Image 5 The Scanner starts reading the NO Adjust the image reading
(Tech. Rep. image at the position of 0 mm position in the range of ±10
function) from the scale. mm.
IR 6 The problem has been elimi- NO Change Scanner Assy.
nated through the checks of
steps up to 5.
7 The problem is eliminated after NO Change CCD Unit.
the Scanner Assy has been
replaced.
T-83
00.12.20
(3) IR Scanner System: color spots
<Typical Faulty Image>
Color spots
CF
4011T027AA

Cover
Glass soft cloth.
steps up to 3.
replaced.
T-84
00.12.20
(4) IR Scanner System: fog
Fog
4011T004AA

Warning 1 Maintenance call mark S-2 YES Carry out remedial action pro-
display (intensity adjustment failure) is cedures for S-2 as part of
displayed. image stabilizer malfunction
troubleshooting procedures.
2 Maintenance call mark S-1 YES Carry out remedial action pro-
(gain adjustment failure) is dis- cedures for S-1 as part of
played. image stabilizer malfunction
Cover 5 Original Cover does not lie flat. YES Change Original Cover if it is
deformed or hinges are bro-
ken.
Glass soft cloth.
sheet soft cloth.
Lamp, and
Exposure Lamp is dirty. YES Clean.
reflectors
Exposure 9 The problem is eliminated after NO Change the exposure mode
setting the exposure mode has been to Manual.
(panel set- changed to Auto.
ting)
T-85
00.12.20

steps up to 9.
replaced.
T-86
00.12.20
(5) IR Scanner System: blurred image, blotchy image
Blurred image, blotchy image
4011T046AA

Original 1 Original Cover does not lie flat. YES Change Original Cover if it is
Cover deformed or hinges are bro-
ken.
Original 2 Original Glass tilts. YES Position Original Glass cor-
Glass rectly. Check original loading
position.
IR 3 Scanner is not aligned with the YES Readjust with the Scanner/
2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage. Mirrors Carriage Positioning
Jigs.
4 The problem has been elimi- NO Change Scanner Assy.
steps up to 3.
replaced.
T-87
00.12.20
(6) IR Scanner System: incorrect color image registration
Incorrect color image registration
CF
4011T039AA

Original 1 Original Cover does not lie flat. YES Change Original Cover if it is
Cover deformed or hinges are bro-
ken.
Slide rails 2 Foreign matter on rails. YES Clean.
Drive 3 Cable kinks or is damaged. YES Correct or change.
Cables
Scanner 4 Scanner Motor turns smoothly. NO Change belt. Change Scan-
Motor ner Motor.
IR 5 The problem has been elimi- NO Change CCD Unit.
steps up to 4.
T-88
00.12.20
(7) IR Scanner System: moire
Moire
4011T040AA

Original 1 Moire distortions occur. YES Change original loading direc-
tion.
Original 2 Moire distortions recur even YES Change the original mode
after the orientation of original (select one other than that
has been changed. resulted in moire).
Mode 3 Moire distortions recur even YES Select “Gradation” (mode
change after the original mode has optimized for gradation) or
been changed. “Resolution” (that optimized
for resolution).
4 The problem has been elimi- NO Change the zoom ratio.
steps up to 3.
T-89
00.12.20
(8) IR Scanner System: skewed image
Skewed image
CF
4011T048AA

Original 1 Original is skew. YES Reposition original.
Original 2 Original Glass is in positive NO Reinstall the glass. Check the
Glass contact with the flat spring original loading position.
without being tilt.
2nd/3rd 3 Scanner Assy is not properly YES Readjust with the Scanner/
Mirrors Car- aligned with 2nd/3rd Mirrors Mirrors Carriage Positioning
riage Carriage. Jigs.
steps up to 3.
replaced.
T-90
00.12.20
(9) IR Scanner System: distorted image
Distorted image
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
4011T045AA

Installation 1 IR is installed on a level sur- NO Reinstall.
face if mounted without any
rack.
Rack is installed on a level sur- NO Reinstall.
face.
Rack is tilt with a lot of play. YES Adjust rack legs.
2nd/3rd 2 Scanner Assy is not properly YES Readjust with the Scanner/
Mirrors Car- aligned with 2nd/3rd Mirrors Mirrors Carriage Positioning
riage Carriage. Jigs.
Scanner 3 Scanner Motor turns smoothly. NO Change belt. Change Scan-
Motor ner Motor.
steps up to 3.
replaced.
T-91
00.12.20
(10) IR Scanner System: low image density, rough image
Low image density
4011T003AA

Warning 1 Maintenance call mark S-2 YES Carry out remedial action pro-
display (intensity adjustment failure) is cedures for S-2 as part of
displayed. image stabilizer malfunction
2 Maintenance call mark S-1 YES Carry out remedial action pro-
(gain adjustment failure) is dis- cedures for S-1 as part of
played. image stabilizer malfunction
Original 3 Original sticks to Original YES Reposition original.
Glass.
Glass soft cloth.
sheet soft cloth.
Lamp, and
Exposure Lamp is dirty. YES Clean.
reflectors
Exposure 7 The problem has been elimi- NO Clean or change Exposure
Lamp nated through the check of Lamp.
step 6.
IR 8 The problem is eliminated after NO Change Scanner Assy.
the Exposure Lamp has been
changed.
changed.
T-92
00.12.20
(11) IR Scanner System: defective ACS
Defective ACS
CF Colored Area of Original
ABCDE
ABCDE
Black-and-White Area of
ABCDE Original
ABCDE
ABCDE
4011T052AA

ACS Deter- 1 ACS failure occurs. YES Change ACS Determination
mination Level Adjust function.
Level The problem persists even YES Change the original loading
Adjust after the ACS Determination direction. Make manual set-
(User’s Level Adjust function has been tings according to the type of
Choice changed. original. (If the original con-
function) tains a colored area in one of
its corners, the copier may fail
to properly detect the colored
area.)
T-93
00.12.20
(12) IR Control System: blank copy, black copy
Blank copy Black copy
4011T036AA 4011T035AA

Cable con- 1 Connector is connected prop- NO Reconnect.
necting IR erly with no pins bent.
and printer
Image Pro- 2 Connectors on the Image Pro- NO Reconnect.
cessing cessing Board are connected
Board properly.
Connection 3 The problem has been elimi- NO Change I/F connection cable.
between IR nated through the check using
and printer IR test pattern.
Image Pro- 4 The problem is eliminated after NO Change Image Processing
cessing the I/F connection cable has Board.
Board been changed.
PIC Board 5 The problem has been elimi- NO Change PIC Board.
steps up to 4.
T-94
00.12.20
(13) IR Control System: abnormal image
Abnormal image Abnormal image
ABCDE
ABCDE Data on previous page
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE CF Data on current page
4011T053AA 4011T063AA

Cable con- 1 Connector is connected prop- NO Reconnect.
necting IR erly with no pins bent.
and printer
Image Pro- 2 Connectors on the Image Pro- NO Reconnect.
cessing cessing Board are connected
Board properly.
PIC Board 3 If the copy contains part of NO Reinstall expanded memory.
data on the previous page
together with that on the cur-
rent page, the expanded mem-
ory (rim) is properly mounted
to the PIC Board.
Connection 4 The problem has been elimi- NO Change interface connection
between IR nated as checked on IR test cable.
and printer prints produced.
Image Pro- 5 The problem is eliminated after NO Change Image Processing
cessing the interface connection cable Board.
Board has been changed.
PIC Board 6 The problem is eliminated NO Change PIC Board.
through the checks of steps up
to 5.
T-95
00.12.20
(14) Printer Monocolor: white lines in FD, white bands in FD, colored lines in FD,
colored bands in FD, white lines in CD, white bands in CD, colored lines in CD,
colored bands in CD
4011T015AA 4011T020AA 4011T017AA 4011T023AA
4011T016AA 4011T021AA 4011T018AA 4011T022AA

Imaging 1 The surface of the PC Drum is YES Change Imaging Unit.
Unit scratched.
LED Assy 2 The surface of the lens array is YES Clean with cleaning jig.
dirty.
Imaging 3 Dirty on the outside. YES Clean.
Unit 4 Connectors and contact termi- NO Clean contact terminals.
nals make good connection Reconnect.
between each Imaging Unit
and LED Assy.
5 Developing bias contact termi- NO Clean contact terminal and
nal makes good connection. check terminal position.
6 The problem has been elimi- NO Change Imaging Unit.
steps up to 5.
Transfer 7 The problem is eliminated after NO Change Transfer Belt Unit.
Belt Unit the Imaging Unit has been
replaced.
T-96
00.12.20

LED Assy 8 The problem is eliminated after NO Change LED Assy.
the Transfer Belt Unit has
been replaced.
T-97
00.12.20
(15) Printer Monocolor: uneven density in FD
Uneven density in FD Uneven density in FD
4011T031AA
4011T042AA

High image 1 Uneven density in FD occurs YES Feed 10 to 20 blank sheets of
density at a pitch of 40 mm to 50 mm paper with no originals
original when a multi-copy cycle is run placed, as the Imaging Unit
using an original with high fails to keep up with a high
image density (50 % or more). demand for toner.
LED Assy 2 LED retracting lever is locked NO Slide out the Imaging Unit and
in position. reinstall.
Unit scratched.
4 Dirty on the outside. YES Clean.
dirty.
Transfer 6 Cam gear operates properly. NO Change Transfer Belt Unit.
Belt Unit
Imaging 7 The problem has been elimi- NO The problem is eliminated
Unit nated through the checks of after the Imaging Unit has
steps up to 6. been replaced.
replaced.
been replaced.
LED Unit 10 The problem is eliminated after NO Change LED Unit.
the LED Assy has been
replaced.
PIC Board 11 The problem is eliminated after NO Change PIC Board.
the LED Unit has been
replaced.
T-98
00.12.20

High Volt- 12 The problem of uneven density NO Change High Voltage Unit 2.
age Unit 2 in CD is eliminated after the
PIC Board has been replaced.
T-99
00.12.20
(16) Printer Monocolor: uneven density in CD
Uneven density in CD Uneven density in CD
4011T032AA 4011T043AA

Unit scratched.
dirty.
Transfer 5 Transfer Belt Unit makes posi- NO Check and correct contacts.
Belt Unit tive contact with plates on
rails.
6 Cam gear operates properly. NO Change Transfer Belt Unit.
Imaging 7 The problem has been elimi- NO Change Imaging Unit.
Unit nated through the checks of
steps up to 6.
replaced.
been replaced.
replaced.
replaced.
High Volt- 12 The problem of uneven density NO Change High Voltage Unit 2.
age Unit 2 in CD is eliminated after the
PIC Board has been replaced.
T-100
00.12.20
(17) Printer Monocolor: low image density
Low image density
4011T003AA

Level His- 1 ATDC data is within ±1 % of NO Readjust.
tory 1 the target value.
(Tech. Rep. 2 AIDC output value is around NO Clean AIDC Sensor. Check
function) 4.5 V. Transfer Belt for damage.
3 Vg and Vb values are correct. NO Go to next step.
Color Vb: Around 400 V
Vg: Around 500 V
Black Vb: Around 800 V
Vg: Around 900 V
Level His- 4 Low ATDC and low Vg and Vb YES Go to step 5.
tory data Low ATDC and high Vg and YES Go to step 12.
check Vb
results
ATDC falling within specified YES Go to step 5.
range and low Vg and Vb
range and high Vg and Vb
Imaging 6 Imaging Unit and LED Assy YES Clean.
Unit connectors are dirty.
dirty.
ATDC Sen- 9 The color ATDC Sensor win- YES Clean. Change ATDC.
sor window dow on the LED Assy is dirty. Change Imaging Unit.
Transfer 10 Transfer Belt Unit makes posi- NO Check and correct contacts.
Belt Unit tive contact with plates on
rails.
11 Cam gear operates properly. NO Change Transfer Belt Unit.
T-101
00.12.20

Hopper Unit 12 Connectors are loose. YES Reconnect.
13 Gear is cracked. YES Change gear.
14 Toner empty lever and/or YES Change Hopper Unit.
detecting switch are defective.
Toner 15 Image is okay after T/C has NO Go to next step.
replenish- been increased by 1 %
ing through toner replenishing.
Gradation 16 Data after three cycles of Gra- NO Run another cycle of Grada-
Adjust dation Adjust falls within the tion Adjust. Go to next step if
(Tech. Rep. specified range. it does not still make data
function) Max: 0 ±100 okay.
Highlight = 0 ±60
PRT Max 17 After Max has been adjusted, NO Go to next step.
Density run Stabilizer to reflect the
(Tech. Rep. adjustment in image stabiliza-
function) tion.
PRT High- 18 After Highlight has been NO Go to next step.
light (Tech. adjusted, run Stabilizer to
Rep. func- reflect the adjustment in image
tion) stabilization.
Reset + 19 After the Reset + Stabilizer NO Go to next step.
Stabilizer sequence has been com-
(Tech. Rep. pleted, run Gradation Adjust; if
function) the problem persists, make the
adjustments of PRT Max Den-
sity and PRT Highlight. There-
after, run Stabilizer again.
ATDC Sen- 20 The problem has been elimi- NO For color, change ATDC Sen-
sor nated through the checks of sor and Imaging Unit at once.
steps up to 19. For black, change Imaging
Unit.
steps up to 20.
replaced.
been replaced.
replaced.
replaced.
High Volt- 26 The problem is eliminated after NO Change High Voltage Unit 2.
age Unit 2 the PIC Board has been
replaced.
T-102
00.12.20
(18) Printer Monocolor: gradation reproduction failure
Gradation reproduction failure Gradation reproduction failure
4011T034AA 4011T029AA

Original 1 Original type and screen pat- NO Change screen pattern.
mode tern are selected properly.
LED Assy 2 LED retracting lever is locked YES Slide out the Imaging Unit and
Unit
dirty.
ATDC Sen- 6 The color ATDC Sensor win- YES Clean.
sor window dow on the LED Assy and the
ATDC Sensor window on the
Imaging Unit are dirty.
Level His- 7 AIDC output value is around NO Clean AIDC Sensor. Check
tory 1 4.5 V. Transfer Belt for damage.
(Tech. Rep.
Function)
Adjust dation Adjust falls within the tion Adjust. If the specifica-
(Tech. Rep. specified range. tions are not met yet, go to
function) Max: 0 ±100 next step.
Highlight = 0 ±60
function) tion.
T-103
00.12.20

steps up to 11.
the Imaging Unit has been
replaced.
replaced.
replaced.
replaced.
T-104
00.12.20
(19) Printer Monocolor: foggy background
Foggy background
4011T004AA

Level His- 1 ATDC data is within ±1 % of NO Readjust.
tory 1 the target value.
(Tech. Rep. 2 AIDC output value is around NO Clean AIDC Sensor. Check
function) 4.5 V. Transfer Belt for damage.
3 Vg and Vb values are correct. NO Go to next step.
Color Vb: Around 400 V
Vg: Around 500 V
Black Vb: Around 800 V
Vg: Around 900 V
Level His- 4 High ATDC and low Vg and Vb YES Go to step 16.
tory data High ATDC and high Vg and YES Go to step 5.
check Vb
results
range and low Vg and Vb
range and high Vg and Vb
ATDC Sen- 8 The color ATDC Sensor win- YES Clean. Change ATDC.
sor window dow on the LED Assy is dirty. Change Imaging Unit.
High Volt- 9 High Voltage Unit 2 connector NO Reconnect.
age Unit 2 is connected properly.
Adjust dation Adjust falls within the tion Adjust. Go to next step if
(Tech. Rep. specified range. it does not still make data
function) Max: 0 ±100 okay.
Highlight = 0 ±60
T-105
00.12.20

Back- 11 After Background Voltage Mar- NO Go to next step.
ground gin has been adjusted, run
Voltage Stabilizer to reflect the adjust-
Margin ment value in image stabiliza-
(Tech. Rep. tion.
function)
function) tion.
steps up to 14.
replaced.
age Unit 2 the LED Assy has been
replaced.
High Voltage Unit 2 has been
replaced.
T-106
00.12.20
(20) Printer Monocolor: void areas, white spots
Void areas White spots
4011T008AA
4011T030AA

Level His- 1 Low ID. YES Take action for low ID.
tory 1
(Tech. Rep.
function)
Unit scratched.
dirty.
Unit
Hopper Unit 5 Foreign matter or caked toner YES Remove foreign matter.
in the Hopper.
steps up to 5.
replaced.
T-107
00.12.20
(21) Printer Monocolor: colored spots
Colored spots
CF
4011T027AA

Imaging 1 Developing bias contact termi- NO Clean contact terminal and
Unit nal makes good connection. check terminal position.
2 The surface of the PC Drum is YES Change Imaging Unit.
scratched.
dirty.
steps up to 4.
replaced.
T-108
00.12.20
(22) Printer Monocolor: blurred image
Blurred image
4011T046AA

2 The surface of the lens array is YES Clean with cleaning jig.
dirty.
3 LED Unit positioning pin is YES Change LED Assy.
loose.
Unit 5 The problem has been elimi- NO Change Imaging Unit.
steps up to 4.
replaced.
T-109
00.12.20
(23) Printer Monocolor: blank copy, black copy
Blank copy Black copy
4011T035AA 4011T036AA

Imaging 1 Coupling of Imaging Unit drive NO Check and correct drive trans-
Unit mechanism is installed prop- mitting coupling. Change
erly. Imaging Unit.
2 The PC Drum Charge Corona NO Check, clean, or correct the
voltage contact or PC Drum contact.
ground contact of the Imaging
Unit is connected properly.
High Volt- 3 Connector is connected prop- NO Reconnect.
age Unit 2 erly.
4 The problem has been elimi- NO Change High Voltage Unit 2.
nated through the check of
step 3.
High Voltage Unit 2 has been
replaced.
the PIC Board has been
replaced.
T-110
00.12.20
(24) Printer Monocolor: 0.5-mm-pitch uneven image
0.5-mm-pitch uneven image
0.5mm
4011T060AA

Unit nated through the check of
step 1.
replaced.
replaced.
T-111
00.12.20
(25) Printer Monocolor: 2-mm-pitch uneven image
2-mm-pitch uneven image

2 mm
4011T059AA

Imaging 1 The drive mechanisms for YES Clean.
Unit spent toner conveying and
Imaging Unit are dirty.
nated through the check of
step 1.
T-112
00.12.20
(26) Printer Monocolor: 94-mm-pitch uneven image
94-mm-pitch uneven image 94-mm-pitch uneven image 94-mm-pitch uneven image
94 mm 94 mm 94 mm
4011T047AD 4011T057AA 4011T058AA

Unit scratched.
2 94-mm-pitch uneven image YES Store the Imaging Unit in a
occurs on the image. dark place overnight.
steps up to 2.
Transfer 4 Transfer Belt Unit drive gear is NO Correct. Change Transfer Belt
Belt Unit intact. Unit.
Transfer 5 Transfer Roller is damaged. YES Change Transfer Roller Unit.
Roller Unit
T-113
00.12.20
(27) Printer 4-Color: white lines in FD, white bands in FD, colored lines in FD, and
colored bands in FD
4011T015AA 4011T020AA 4011T017AA 4011T023AA

Transfer 1 Fingerprints, oil, or other for- YES Clean with specified solvent.
Belt Unit eign matter is evident on the (See DIS/REASSEMBLY,
Transfer Belt. ADJUSTMENT.)
2 Transfer Belt is dirty or YES Clean dirty belt with a soft
scratched. cloth. Change Transfer Belt
Unit if belt is damaged.
3 Cleaning Blade is not effective YES Clean or change Transfer Belt
in removing toner completely. Unit.
Transfer 4 Transfer Roller is dirty or YES Change Transfer Roller Unit.
Roller Unit scratched.
Paper path 5 There is foreign matter on YES Remove foreign matter.
paper path.
6 Image Transfer Paper Separa- YES Clean or change.
tor Fingers are damaged or
dirty.
7 Paper dust accumulates on YES Clean.
Paper Dust Remover.
Fusing Unit 8 Fusing Belt is dirty or YES Change Fusing Unit.
scratched.
9 Fusing Entrance Guide Plate is YES Clean or change.
dirty or damaged.
10 Fusing Paper Separator Fin- YES Clean.
gers are dirty.
Fusing Web 11 Web is properly taken up. NO Change Fusing Web Unit.
Unit
Oil Coating 12 Oil exudes more than appropri- YES Change Oil Coating Unit.
Unit ate.
T-114
00.12.20

Transfer 13 The problem has been elimi- NO Change Transfer Roller Unit.
Roller Unit nated through the checks of
steps up to 12.
Belt Unit the Transfer Belt Cleaner has
been cleaned.
been replaced.
replaced.
Paper Dust 17 The problem is eliminated after NO Change Paper Dust Remover.
Remover the LED Unit has been
replaced.
the Paper Dust Remover has
been replaced.
T-115
00.12.20
(28) Printer 4-Color: white lines in CD, white bands in CD, colored lines in CD, and
colored bands in CD
4011T016AA 4011T021AA 4011T018AA 4011T022AA

paper path.
scratched.
Unit ate.
Paper Dust 7 Paper dust accumulates. YES Clean.
Remover
steps up to 7.
Belt Unit the Transfer Roller Unit has
been replaced.
been replaced.
replaced.
T-116
00.12.20

Remover the LED Unit has been
replaced.
the Paper Dust Remover has
been replaced.
T-117
00.12.20
(29) Printer 4-Color: uneven density in FD
Uneven density in FD Uneven density in FD
4011T031AA
4011T042AA

3 Terminal is dirty. YES Clean.
Transfer 4 Transfer Roller is installed NO Reinstall.
Roller Unit properly.
5 Transfer Roller is dirty or YES Change Transfer Roller Unit.
scratched.
6 The problem has been elimi- NO Change Transfer Roller Unit.
steps up to 5.
been replaced.
T-118
00.12.20
(30) Printer 4-Color: uneven density in CD
Uneven density in CD Uneven density in CD
4011T032AA 4011T043AA

scratched.
6 The problem has been elimi- NO Change Transfer Roller Unit.
steps up to 5.
been replaced.
age Unit 2 the Transfer Belt Unit has
been replaced.
T-119
00.12.20
(31) Printer 4-Color: low image density
Low image density
4011T003AA

Paper 1 Paper is damp. YES Change paper to one just
unwrapped from its package.
Heater.
scratched.
Paper path 7 Charge Neutralizing Cloth is NO Correct or change.
not separated and ground ter-
minal is connected properly.
AIDC Sen- 8 Sensor is dirty. YES Clean with blower brush.
sor
Highlight = 0 ±60
function) tion.
T-120
00.12.20

steps up to 12.
been replaced.
been replaced.
replaced.
replaced.
T-121
00.12.20
(32) Printer 4-Color: poor color reproduction
Poor color reproduction
4011T050AA

Heater.
scratched.
AIDC Sen- 7 Sensor is dirty. YES Clean with blower brush.
sor
Highlight = 0 ±60
function) tion.
T-122
00.12.20

steps up to 11.
been replaced.
been replaced.
replaced.
replaced.
T-123
00.12.20
(33) Printer 4-Color: incorrect color image registration
Incorrect color image registration
CF
4011T049AA

Warning 1 Warning display of P-5 (AIDC YES Carry out remedial action pro-
display Sensor 2 failure) or P-28 cedures for P-5 or P-28 as
(AIDC Sensor 1 failure) is dis- part of image stabilizer mal-
played. function troubleshooting pro-
cedures.
Machine 2 Vibration is given to copier YES Turn OFF and ON Power
condition after Power Switch has been Switch.
turned ON.
6 Drive coupling to the copier is YES Clean.
dirty.
Unit scratched.
scratched.
Fuser 10 The problem has been elimi- NO Take steps to eliminate brush
Speed nated through the check of effect or blurred image
(Tech. Rep. step 9. according to the type of
function) paper. Readjust Fuser Speed.
T-124
00.12.20

Paper Loop 11 If incorrect registration occurs YES Readjust Paper Loop.
(Tech. Rep. in the main scanning (CD) or
function) sub-scanning (FD) direction, it
is evident on the first copy and
onward.
Color Shift 12 Paper skews a lot. YES Adjust Color Shift Correction
Correction (Bk).
(Tech. Rep. After the correction has been
function) made, adjust PRT Area (Top
Margin, Left Margin, and Dup.
Left Margin) and then check
skew again.
If the problem persists, repeat
these steps.
steps up to 12.
Belt Unit the Transfer Belt Cleaner has
been cleaned.
been replaced.
replaced.
replaced.
T-125
00.12.20
(34) Printer 4-Color: void areas, white spots
Void areas White spots
4011T008AA
4011T030AA

paper path.
5 Pre-Image Transfer Guide YES Clean or change.
Plate is damaged or dirty.
Paper Dust Remover.
7 Charge Neutralizing Cloth is NO Correct or change.
not separated and ground ter-
minal is connected properly.
steps up to 7.
been replaced.
Remover the Transfer Belt Unit has
been replaced.
T-126
00.12.20
(35) Printer 4-Color: colored spots
Colored spots
CF
4011T027AA

Unit scratched.
paper path.
Paper Dust Remover.
scratched.
Unit
steps up to 8.
been replaced.
Fusing Web 11 The problem is eliminated after NO Change Fusing Web Unit.
Unit the Transfer Belt Unit has
been replaced.
Oil Coating 12 The problem is eliminated after NO Change Oil Coating Unit.
Unit the Fusing Web Unit has been
replaced.
T-127
00.12.20

Fusing Unit 13 The problem is eliminated after NO Change Fusing Unit.
the Oil Coating Unit has been
replaced.
T-128
00.12.20
(36) Printer 4-Color: oil lines, oil on copy
Oil lines Oil on copy
4011T019AA 4011T054AA

Unit ate.
2 Oil Coating Roller is scratched. YES Change Oil Coating Unit.
scratched.
Unit 5 The problem has been elimi- NO Change Fusing Web Unit.
steps up to 4.
replaced.
replaced.
T-129
00.12.20
(37) Printer 4-Color: poor fusing performance, offset
Poor fusing performance Offset
CF
CF
CF
4004T002AA 4004T003AA

Paper 1 Paper type is wrong. YES Change paper type.
Unit ate.
Unit
Fuser Nip 5 Nip width meets the specifica- NO Readjust.
(Tech. Rep. tions: 7 ±0.5 mm.
function)
Fuser 6 Changing fusing temperature NO Go to next step.
Temp. eliminates the problem of poor
(Tech. Rep. fusing performance and offset.
function)
Fusing Web 7 The problem has been elimi- NO Change Fusing Web Unit.
steps up to 6.
replaced.
replaced.
T-130
00.12.20
(38) Printer 4-Color: brush effect, blurred image
Brush effect Blurred image
4004T004AA 4011T046AA

Heater.
2 Paper type is wrong. YES Change paper type.
Fusing Unit 3 Fusing Entrance Guide Plate is YES Clean.
dirty.
4 Fusing Belt is dirty or YES Change Fusing Unit.
scratched.
Unit
Unit ate.
Fuser Nip 8 Nip width meets the specifica- NO Readjust.
(Tech. Rep. tions: 7 ±0.5 mm.
function)
Fuser 9 Brush effect or blurred image YES Readjust.
Speed is evident on different types of
(Tech. Rep. paper.
function)
Fusing Web 10 The problem has been elimi- NO Change Fusing Web Unit.
steps up to 9.
replaced.
replaced.
T-131
00.12.20
(39) Printer 4-Color: back marking
Back marking Back marking
CF
4011T009AA 4011T051AA

Transfer 1 Transfer Roller is scratched or YES Change Transfer Roller Unit.
Roller Unit dirty.
paper path.
Fusing Unit 3 Fusing Entrance Guide Plate is YES Clean or change.
scratched or dirty.
4 Lower Fusing Roller is YES Change Fusing Unit.
scratched or dirty.
steps up to 5.
been replaced.
Unit the Transfer Belt Unit has
been replaced.
Fusing Web 9 The problem is eliminated after NO Change Fusing Web Unit.
Unit the Oil Coating Unit has been
replaced.
the Fusing Web Unit has been
replaced.
age Unit 2 the Fusing Unit has been
replaced.
T-132
00.12.20
(40) Printer 4-Color: 75-mm-pitch uneven image, 200-mm-pitch uneven image
75-mm-pitch uneven image 200-mm-pitch uneven image
75 mm
200 mm
4011T062AA 4011T061AA

Oil Coating 1 Oil Coating Roller is damaged YES Change Oil Coating Unit.
Unit when 75-mm-pitch uneven
image occurs.
Fusing Unit 2 Fusing Belt is damaged when YES Change Fusing Unit.
200-mm-pitch uneven image
occurs.
T-133
00.12.20
(41) Printer 4-Color: 94-mm-pitch uneven image
94-mm-pitch uneven image 94-mm-pitch uneven image 94-mm-pitch uneven image
94 mm 94 mm 94 mm
4011T047AD 4011T057AA 4011T058AA

Unit scratched.
2 94-mm-pitch uneven image YES Store the Imaging Unit in a
occurs on the image. dark place overnight.
steps up to 2.
Transfer 4 Transfer Belt Unit drive gear is NO Correct. Change Transfer Belt
Belt Unit intact. Unit.
Transfer 5 Transfer Roller is damaged. YES Change Transfer Roller Unit.
Roller Unit
T-134
00.12.20
4-4. Image Stabilizer Malfunction

(1) P-5: AIDC Sensor Failure (AIDC Sensor 2)
P-28: AIDC Sensor Failure (AIDC Sensor 1)

1 AIDC Sensor Shutter operates properly. NO Correct.
2 The area on the Transfer Belt facing the YES Clean the dirty area with a
AIDC Sensor is dirty. soft cloth. If it is seriously con-
taminated, use the specified
solvent. (See DIS/REASSEM-
BLY, ADJUSTMENT.)
3 The area on the Transfer Belt facing the YES Change Transfer Belt Unit.
AIDC Sensor is scratched.
4 AIDC Sensor is mounted at an inappropriate YES Reinstall. Reconnect.
position or connectors are not connected
properly.
5 AIDC Sensor window is dirty. YES Clean.
6 Value changes when AIDC Sensor output NO Change AIDC Sensor.
value is varied. YES Change PIC Board.
(2) P-6: Cyan Imaging Unit Failure

P-7: Magenta Imaging Unit Failure
P-8: Yellow Imaging Unit Failure
P-9: Black Imaging Unit Failure

1 PRT Max Density (Tech. Rep. Function) is NO Readjust.
correct.
2 Density during γ correction is normal. NO Readjust.
3 Imaging Unit is being driven. NO Check and correct drive cou-
pling.
4 T/C is unusually low as found through YES Check Hopper.
checking.
5 AIDC Sensor window is dirty. YES Clean.
6 Imaging Unit connector contact is dirty. YES Clean.
7 The problem has been eliminated through NO Change Imaging Unit.
8 The problem is eliminated after the Imaging NO Change Transfer Belt Unit.
T-135
00.12.20
(3) P-21: Color Shift Correction Failure (Test Pattern Failure)

1 Produce a test pattern. Go to step 2 if the image on
the Transfer Belt is correct.
-
Go to step 4 if the image den-
sity is low.
2 The area on the Transfer Belt facing the YES Clean the dirty area with a
AIDC Sensor is dirty. soft cloth. If it is seriously con-
taminated, use the specified
solvent. (See DIS/REASSEM-
BLY, ADJUSTMENT.)
3 The area on the Transfer Belt facing the YES Change Transfer Belt Unit.
AIDC Sensor is scratched.
(4) P-22: Color Shift Correction Failure (Correction Amount Failure)

1 LED retracting lever is locked in position. NO Slide out the Imaging Unit and
then reinstall.
2 AIDC Sensor is installed slantwise. YES Reinstall.
3 Vertical Transport Guide is installed slant- YES Correct.
wise.
(5) P-23: Cyan 1st Image Transfer ATVC Failure

P-24: Magenta 1st Image Transfer ATVC Failure
P-25: Yellow 1st Image Transfer ATVC Failure
P-26: Black 1st Image Transfer ATVC Failure
P-27: 2nd Image Transfer ATVC Failure

1 Transfer Belt Unit contact makes positive NO Clean or correct.
contact with High Voltage Unit contact.
2 The problem has been eliminated through NO Change Transfer Belt Unit.
3 The problem is eliminated after the Transfer NO Change High Voltage Unit 2.
Belt Unit has been replaced. Change Master Board.
T-136
00.12.20
(6) S-1: CCD Gain Adjustment Failure
Clamp/Gain Adjustment Values
RO RE GO GE BO BE
Clamp 130 130 130 130 130 130
RO RE GO GE BO BE
Gain 160 160 170 170 160 160
Lamp Adjustment Value 135
✽ Clamp: Allowable up to ±100 of the above values.
✽ Gain: Allowable up to ±90 of the above values for R and B; allowable up to ±50 of the
above values for G.
✽ Exposure Lamp adjustment value: Allowable in the range between 64 and 192.

1 Check that each of the values displayed on the screen falls within the above range.
2 There is a wide difference between the YES Make positive connection of
clamp and gain adjustment values, the the harness connectors
value being close to “0” or “255.” between CCD Sensor Board
and Image Processing Board.
3 Clamp adjustment value exceeds the allow- YES Reinstall covers, as extrane-
able range only slightly. ous light is the cause of the
problem.
4 The lamp adjustment value or gain value YES Clean lens, mirrors, CCD sur-
exceeds the upper limit of the allowable face, shading sheet, and
range, being abnormally great. related parts.
5 The lamp adjustment value or gain value YES Reinstall covers, as extrane-
falls short of the lower limit of the allowable ous light is the cause of the
range, being abnormally small. problem.
(7) S-2: Intensity Adjustment Failure

1 Original Glass, mirrors, CCD surface, and YES Clean or change; then, turn
Main and Auxiliary Reflectors are dirty. ON Power Switch.
Exposure Lamp is dirty or has discolored. NO Change Exposure Lamp.
Change CCD Sensor Board.
T-137
FrameMaker Ver.5.5(PC) CF1501/CF2001 Unit Replacement Manual
00.12.22
UNIT REPLACEMENT
MANUAL
18605
00.12.22
CONTENTS
1. The Unit Life Manual ........................................................................................ 1
2. The Indication of Replacement for CRU/TFU/FRU .......................................... 1
3. Unit Replacement Manual ............................................................................... 1

3-1. Unit Layout ............................................................................................... 1
3-2. Replacing the Units .................................................................................. 2
(1) Replacing the Fusing Web Unit ....................................................... 2
(2) Replacing the Oil Coating Unit ........................................................ 6
(3) Replacing the Imaging Unit (C, M, Y) .............................................. 11
(4) Replacing the Waste Toner Bottle ................................................... 19
(5) Replacing the Imaging Unit Bk ........................................................ 21
(6) Replacing the Fusing Unit ............................................................... 22
(7) Replacing the Paper Dust Remover, Image Transfer Roller Unit,
Image Transfer Belt Unit, and Ozone Filter ..................................... 26
i
1. The Unit Life Manual
NOTES
• The life specifications values represent the number of copies made or figures equivalent to it when given conditions are met. They can be more or less depending on the copier operating conditions
of each individual user.
• The initiation of a new copy cycle is inhibited upon 1K after a near life condition has been detected for all units (except the Toner Bottle and Waste Toner Bottle).
Copying Condition
Unit Life Spec. Value Description Near Life Value Life Value
Code
Toner Bottle – B/E An approximate life value is 10K under the specified conditions. – 10K
A waste toner full condition is detected when about 4.5K copies are made after a
Waste Toner Bottle 40K B/C/D/E/F – 40K
waste toner near-full condition has been detected.
The life specifications value is based on A4C or Letter C. A near life condition is
Fusing Web Unit 17K B/C/D/F detected when a web empty condition is detected or a predetermined number of 16K 17K
copies are made, whichever arrives earlier.
20-cpm copier Oil Coating Unit 33K The life specifications value is based on A4C or Letter C. A near life condition or a 33K 34K
life condition is detected when the Oil Coating Roller has turned a predetermined
A/B/C/D/F
15-cpm copier Oil Coating Unit 26K period of time or a predetermined number of copies are made, whichever arrives 26K 27K
earlier.
Fusing Unit 101K B/C/D/F The life specifications value is based on A4C or Letter C. 101K ✽1 102K
✽2 120K ✽2 121K
Transfer Belt Unit 120K A/B/C/D/F The life specifications value is based on A4C or Letter C.
(17400M) (17545M)
✽3 4415M ✽3 4562M
20-cpm copier Imaging Unit (C, M, and Y) 30K
(30K) (31K)
✽3 4415M ✽3 4562M
15-cpm copier Imaging Unit (C, M, and Y) 27K The near life and life time values are detected when the PC Drum has turned or the (27K) (28K)
A/B/C/D/F Developing Unit has been energized for a predetermined period of time, whichever
arrives earlier. ✽3 6972M ✽3 7122M
20-cpm copier Imaging Unit (Bk) 50K
(50K) (51K)
✽3 6972M ✽3 7122M
15-cpm copier Imaging Unit (Bk) 47k
(47K) (48K)
M: minutes
✽ 1: As a rule, the Fusing Unit is to be replaced at the same time that the Fusing Web Unit is replaced a sixth time (17K × 6 = 102K). If the Fusing Web Unit is replaced before 17K is reached, there
will be a discrepancy in the replacement cycle, resulting in a near life and life value ranging between 90K and 110K.
✽ 2: The life of the Transfer Belt Unit is controlled based on the number of copies made. The life counter gives a time value display.
✽ 3: The life of the Imaging Unit is controlled based on a time value. The life counter gives a time value display.
• Conditions for Life Specifications Values

Copying Condition CF2001 CF1501
Job Type A Making two copies per job
Paper Size B A4 or Letter
Color Ratio C C (color) : Bk (black) = 5 : 1 C (color) : Bk (black) = 2.5 : 1
CV/M D 6K 3.5K
Original Density E B/W = 5% for each color
No. of Operating Days per Month F 20 days (Power Switch turned ON and OFF 20 times per month)
1
00.12.22
2. The Indication of Replacement for CRU/TFU/FRU

✽ K=1,000 copies
✽ The contents of the this list are subject to change without notice.
✽ For details, see the unit life manual about the PM cycle.
PM Cycle
Page
No. Unit Name Maintenance Message Display CF2001/
No.
CF1501
Imaging Unit 7122 min

1. P-21
(Bk) (51K/48K)

2. P-11
(C) (31K/28K)

3. P-11
(M) (31K/28K)
1
00.12.22
PM Cycle
Page
No.
CF1501

4. P-11
(Y) (31K/28K)
5. Fusing Unit 102K/102K P-22
Oil Coating
6. 34K/27K P-6
Unit
2
00.12.22
PM Cycle
Page
No.
CF1501
Fusing Web
7. 17K/17K P-2
Unit
Waste Toner
8. 40K/40K P-19
Bottle
Image
17545 min
9. Transfer Belt P-26
(121K/121K)
Unit
3
00.12.22
PM Cycle
Page
No.
CF1501
Image
10. Transfer Nothing to indicate 121K/121K P-26
Roller Unit
Paper Dust
11. Nothing to indicate 121K/121K P-26
Cleaner
12. Ozone Filter Nothing to indicate 121K/121K P-26
4
00.12.22
3. Unit Replacement Manual

3-1. Unit Layout
Image Transfer Belt Unit

Replace every 121 K.
Replace the waste toner

bottle about 4.5 K prints
after WASTE TONER
BOTTLE NEARLY FULL
is detected.
Ozone Filter
4004D301AA
Imaging Unit
C, M, Y: Replace every 4,562 M.
Bk: Replace every 7,204 M.
Fusing Web Unit
Replace the web unit every 17 K prints,
or about 1 K prints after WEB UNIT
NEARLY EMPTY is detected.
Fusing Unit
Oil Coating Unit
Replace every 34 K or
325,000 sec.
Paper Dust Remover

Image Transfer Roller Unit

4004D351CA
1
00.12.22
3-2. Replacing the Units

(1) Replacing the Fusing Web Unit
Removal method
NOTE
• Before replacing the fusing web unit, ensure that it is not hot.
1. Turn OFF the main switch,

then wait for about 20 min-
utes.
2. Open the Upper Right
Door.
NOTE
• When opening the upper
right door, be sure to sup-
port it with your hand until it
is in the fully open position.
If you remove your hand
from the upper right door, it
may drop, and the resulting
impact may cause the
4004D352CA
hinges to bend.
3. Release the two blue lock

levers.
(➀: Push up, ➁: Rotate)
➁
➀
➁
➀
4004D305AA
2
00.12.22
4. Grasp the two blue lock

levers, and remove the
fusing web unit.
4004D306AA
NOTE
• Do not touch the metal ter-
minals beneath the fusing
Terminals (metal)
web unit (on the fusing unit
side).
Failure to observe this pre-
caution may cause an elec-
trostatic discharge, resulting
in a breakdown.
4004D307AA
3
00.12.22
Installation method
1. Remove the fusing web

unit from its box, and
remove the packing mate-
rial.
2. Grasp the two blue lock
levers, and set the fusing
web unit in place.
NOTE
• When setting the fusing web
unit, align the ▼ mark on
the fusing web unit with the
▼ mark on the fusing unit.
4004D308AA
3. Lock the two blue lock

➀ levers.
(➀: Push, ➁: Rotate,
➂: Push down)
➁
➂ ➀
➁
➂
4004D309AA
4
00.12.22
4. Close the Upper Right

Door.
4004D353CA
5
00.12.22
(2) Replacing the Oil Coating Unit

Removal method
NOTE
• Before replacing the oil coating unit, ensure that it is not hot.
• When placing the oil coating unit on a bench, for example, stand it upright.

and wait for about 20 min-
utes.
Door.
NOTE
4004D352CA
hinges to bend.
6
00.12.22
3. Release the two green lock levers.
4004D312AA
4. Grasp the two green han-

dles, and remove the oil
coating unit.
4004D313AA
7
00.12.22
NOTE
Terminal (metal) • Do not touch the metal ter-
minals beneath the fusing
web unit (on the fusing unit
side).
Failure to observe this pre-
caution may cause an elec-
trostatic discharge, resulting
in a breakdown.
4004D314AA
8
00.12.22
Installation method
1. Withdraw the oil coating

unit from its box, and
rial.
2. Grasp the two green han-
dles, and set the oil coat-
ing unit in place.
4004D315AA
3. Lock the two green lock levers.
4004D316AA
9
00.12.22

Door.
4004D353CA
10
00.12.22
(3) Replacing the Imaging Unit (C, M, Y)

Removal method
1. Turn OFF the main switch.

2. Unplug the power cord.
3. Disconnect the grounding
cord.
4004D317AA
5. Release the lock lever of

the imaging unit.
4004D318AA
11
00.12.22
6. Remove the removal jig of

the imaging unit from the
main unit.
4004D319AA
7. Set the removal jig of the

imaging unit in place.
8. Slowly rotate the jig clock-
wise until it is fixed.
4004D320AA
9. Install the bottom cover of

the imaging unit.
NOTE
• When installing the bottom
cover of the imaging unit,
align it with the blue label on
the lock lever.
4004D321AA
12
00.12.22
10. Grasp the removal jig of

the imaging unit, then
slowly withdraw the imag-
ing unit while supporting
the bottom cover with your
hand.
NOTE
• Do not remove the bottom
cover after removing the
imaging unit.
4004D322AA
11. Remove the removal jig of

the imaging unit, and
return it to the main unit.
4004D323AA
13
00.12.22
Installation method
NOTE
• To prevent damaging the imaging unit by exposure to light, keep the imaging unit in its
light-proof vinyl pouch until immediately before installing it.
• When holding the Imaging Unit, be sure to hold it by its bottom cover.
If the Top Imaging Unit Cover is hold, it may full off or the PC Drum installed on the
Imaging Unit may be damage, resulting in decreased image quality.
1. Remove the imaging unit

from its box, then remove
the light-proof vinyl pouch.
2. Tilt the imaging unit to the
left, and shake it gently
twice in the tilted direc-
tion, then tilt the imaging
unit to the right, and shake
it gently twice in the tilted
direction.
4004D324AA
3. Remove the protective

tapes.
C4004U213AA
14
00.12.22
4. Remove the shipping

cushion.
C4004U214AA
NOTE
• When installing the imaging unit, ensure that the color of the mounting guide of the
imaging unit is the same as the color of the label at the mounting position on the main
unit.
5. Support the bottom of the

imaging unit with your left
hand, and the bottom front
side with your right hand,
hold the unit horizontally,
then push it in until the
front edge stops.
6. Confirm that the imaging
unit is inserted to the posi-
tion where the front edge
of the bottom cover
touches the main unit.
4004D325AA
NOTE
• Do not insert the Imaging Unit into its compartment at an angle.
15
00.12.22
7. Using your left hand, sup-

port the bottom of the
imaging unit, then using
your right hand gently
push in the part shown in
the drawing of the unit.
NOTE
• When installing the imaging
unit, insert it to the position
where it clicks into place.
4004D326AA
8. Pull out the Imaging Unit

Cover.
9. Make sure that the Imag-
ing Unit is inserted as far
as possible.
4004D327AA
10. Gently return the lock lever

of the imaging unit so that
the unit locks.
NOTE
• When locking the imaging
unit, return the lock lever to
the position where it clicks
into place.
4004D328AA
16
00.12.22
11. Close the Front Door.
4004D329AA
12. Separate the top and bot-

tom halves of the Imaging
Unit Cover.
4004D330AA
17
00.12.22
13. Install the top cover on the

imaging unit that you
removed in step 10 on
Page 13.
NOTE
• The four claws of the top
cover must be engaged with
the four claw holders.
14. Connect the grounding

lead.
15. Connect the power cord.
16. Turn ON the main switch.
4004D331AA
NOTE
• The bottom cover of the imaging unit is needed the next time you replace the imaging
unit, so store it carefully.
18
00.12.22
(4) Replacing the Waste Toner Bottle
NOTE
• If the paper exit system option is installed, remove it from the main unit before replac-
ing the waste toner bottle.
• When removing the paper exit system option, support the horizontal transport unit with
your hand to prevent it from dropping.

4004D332AA
3. Grasp the handle, and

remove the waste toner
bottle.
4004D354CA
19
00.12.22
NOTE
• Raise the waste toner bottle gently before removing it.
• If scattered toner has accumulated in the vicinity of the toner collecting port, do not tilt
the waste toner bottle when removing it.
• Do not leave the waste toner bottle in a tilted condition after removing it.
4. Remove the seals from the

two toner collecting ports.
4004D337AA
5. Peel off the seals for

blocking the two toner col-
lecting ports, and place
them over the toner col-
lecting ports.
4004D334AA
20
00.12.22
Installation method
1. Remove the waste toner

bottle from its box, and
rial.
2. Grasp the handle, and set
the waste toner bottle in
place.
4004D355CA
3. Close the Left Door.

4004D336AA
(5) Replacing the Imaging Unit Bk

For the method of replacing the imaging unit, refer to “(3) Replacing the Imaging Unit (C, M,
Y)”.
☞ page 11
21
00.12.22
(6) Replacing the Fusing Unit

Removal method
NOTE
• Before replacing the fusing unit, ensure that it is not hot.

then wait for about 20 min-
utes.
4004D356CA

Door.
NOTE
hinges to bend.
4004D352CA
22
00.12.22
4. Grasp the blue lever, and

remove the fusing unit.
4004D357CA
5. Grasp the two handles

with the blue labels, and
remove the fusing unit.
4004D338AA
23
00.12.22
Installation method
1. Remove the fusing unit

from its box, and remove
the packing material.
2. Grasp the two handles
with the blue labels, and
install the fusing unit.
NOTE
• When installing the fusing
unit, align it with the posi-
tioning pin on the main unit.
4004D339AA
3. Grasp the blue lever, and

push in the fusing unit.
4004D358CA

Door.
4004D353CA
24
00.12.22
5. Close the Right Door.
NOTE
• Ensure that both the front
and rear sides are locked.
4004D359CA
25
00.12.22
(7) Replacing the Paper Dust Remover, Image Transfer Roller Unit, Image Transfer
Belt Unit, and Ozone Filter
Removal method
NOTE
• If the paper exit system option is installed, remove it from the main unit before replac-
ing the paper dust remover.
• When removing the paper exit system option, support the horizontal transport unit with
your hand to prevent it from dropping.

4004D356CA
3. Remove the paper dust

remover while pushing the
hook with the gray label at
the front to the rear.
4004D340AA
26
00.12.22
4. Release the two blue lock levers.

5. Grasp the two blue lock levers, and remove the image transfer roller unit.
4004D341AA
4004D332AA
27
00.12.22

remove the waste toner
bottle.
4004D354CA
NOTE
• Raise the waste toner bottle gently before removing it.
• If scattered toner has accumulated in the vicinity of the toner collecting port, do not tilt
the waste toner bottle when removing it.
• Do not leave the waste toner bottle in a tilted condition after removing it.
NOTE
• Do not attempt to pull out the image transfer belt unit when the right door is not open
because you may damage the belt.
8. Pull out the image transfer

belt unit.
4004D360CA
28
00.12.22
9. Remove the ozone filter

while grasping the hooks
at both ends.
4004D343AA
29
00.12.22
Installation method
1. Install the Ozone Filter.
4004D344AA
NOTE
• When installing the image transfer belt unit, wear the gloves packed with the unit.
(This is to prevent the possibility of a defective image due to finger marks adhering to
the transfer film.)
• When inserting the image transfer belt unit, align the boss on the transfer belt unit with
the part of the main unit guide section marked with the arrow.
• When installing the transfer belt, insert it until into clicks into place.
Boss Boss
4004D361CA
30
00.12.22
2. Insert the Image Transfer

Belt Unit.
4004D346AA

install the waste toner bot-
tle.
4004D355CA
4. Close the Left Door.
4004D336AA
31
00.12.22
5. Grasp the two blue lock levers, and install the image transfer roller unit.
6. Lock the two blue lock levers.
4004D347AA
7. Install the paper dust

remover.
NOTE
• Push in the hook with the
gray label until it clicks into
place.
4004D348AA
32
00.12.22
8. Close the Right Door.
NOTE
• Both the front and rear
sides must be locked.
4004D359CA
33
FrameMaker Ver5.5E(PC) COVER [TROUBLESHOOTING] FOR CF1501/CF2001 FrameMaker Ver5.5E(PC) COVER [TROUBLESHOOTING] FOR CF1501/CF2001
00.12.20 00.12.20
CF1501/CF2001
CF1501/CF2001 SERVICE MANUAL [TROUBLESHOOTING]

SERVICE MANUAL
[TROUBLESHOOTING]
Copyright
Printed in Japan

avoid disclosure of
MINOLTA Co., Ltd. 4004-7998-11 01011200

Manual Servicio Field

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual Servicio Field

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FrameMaker Ver5.

5E(PC) COVER [FIELD] FOR CF1501/CF2001

Safety Precautions for Inspection and Service

1. Always observe precautions.

2. Before starting the procedures, be sure to unplug the power cord.

3. Use the specified parts.

5. Be careful with the high-voltage parts.

6. Do not work with wet hands.

7. Do not touch a high-temperature part.

9. Do not remodel the product.

10. Restore all parts and harnesses to their original positions.

2. Precautions for Servicing with Covers and Parts Removed

3. Precautions for the Working Environment

4. Precautions for Handling Batteries (Lithium, Nickel-Cadmium, etc.)

Used Batteries Precautions

Precautions for Service

Precautions Before Service

How to Use this Book

Precautions for Service

Precautions for Dis/Reassembly

Precautions for Circuit Inspection

Handling of Other Parts

Handling of the PC Drum

1. Place the PC Drum into one half of its carton.

2. Gently wipe the residual toner off the surface of the

3. Soak a small amount of either ethyl alcohol or iso-

4. Using the SAME face of the Pad, repeat the proce-

Handling of the Imaging Cartridge

3. Precautionary Information on the PC Drum Inside the Imaging Cartridge:

1.1 INSTALLATION CF1501 / CF2001 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-1

Di250 I-2 Rev. 1.0/03.99

1.3 INSTALLATION SCANNER - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-54

Rev. 1.0/03.99 I-3 Di250

1.4 INSTALLATION COPY TABLE (CT-2)

1.5 INSTALLATION JS-1002- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-69

1.6 Installation AD-14 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-78

1.7 INSTALLATION PF-118 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-85

1.8 INSTALLATION PF-117 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-95

Di250 I-4 Rev. 1.0/03.99

1.9 INSTALLATION FN-107 / 108 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-106

1.10 INSTALLATION INTERFACE KIT-E - - - - - - - - - - I-118

1.11 INSTALLATION INTERFACE KIT-I - - - - - - - - - - - I-119

1.12 INSTALLATION M128-2 (DIMM) - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-123

1.13 INSTALLING THE MECHANICAL COUNTER - - - I-125

Rev. 1.0/03.99 I-5 Di250

Di250 I-6 Rev. 1.0/03.99

1.1 INSTALLATION CF1501 / CF2001

1.1.2 Unpacking the Printer

Rev. 1.1/01.01 I-1 CF1501/2001

3. Grasp the two handles on the right side of the

4. Carefully place the printer on a level and

1.1.3 Removing the protective tape and packing materials

Outside surface of the Printer

CF1501/2001 I-2 Rev. 1.1/01.01

3. Pinch the release lever for an imaging

4. Swing the release lever toward you.

5. Remove the packing material from the

Rev. 1.1/01.01 I-3 CF1501/2001

6. Remove the packing materials from the other

8. Carefully swing the front door closed, making

1.1.3.1 Paper Feed Section

paper take-up NOTE

2. Remove the 2 pieces of tape shown in the